This document is an excerpt from the EUR-Lex website
Document L:2019:139I:FULL
Official Journal of the European Union, L 139 I, 27 May 2019
Official Journal of the European Union, L 139 I, 27 May 2019
Official Journal of the European Union, L 139 I, 27 May 2019
|
ISSN 1977-0677 |
||
|
Official Journal of the European Union |
L 139I |
|
|
||
|
English edition |
Legislation |
Volume 62 |
|
|
|
|
|
(1) Text with EEA relevance. |
|
EN |
Acts whose titles are printed in light type are those relating to day-to-day management of agricultural matters, and are generally valid for a limited period. The titles of all other Acts are printed in bold type and preceded by an asterisk. |
II Non-legislative acts
REGULATIONS
|
27.5.2019 |
EN |
Official Journal of the European Union |
LI 139/1 |
COMMISSON IMPLEMENTING REGULATION (EU) 2019/772
of 16 May 2019
amending Regulation (EU) No 1300/2014 as regards inventory of assets with a view to identifying barriers to accessibility, providing information to users and monitoring and evaluating progress on accessibility
(Text with EEA relevance)
THE EUROPEAN COMMISSION,
Having regard to the Treaty on the Functioning of the European Union,
Having regard to Directive (EU) 2016/797 of the European Parliament and of the Council of 11 May 2016 on the interoperability of the rail system within the European Union (1), and in particular Article 5(11) thereof,
Whereas:
|
(1) |
Pursuant to Article 7 of Commission Regulation (EU) No 1300/2014 (2), chapter 7 of the Annex of Regulation (EU) No 1300/2014 is to be amended in order to specify the characteristics of the inventory of assets, including the content, data format, functional and technical architecture, operating mode, rules for data input and consultation, and rules for self-assessment and designation of the entities responsible for data provision. |
|
(2) |
Pursuant to Article 5(1) of Regulation (EU) 2016/796 of the European Parliament and of the Council (3) and Article 7(2) of Regulation (EU) No 1300/2014 a working party was established in order to make a proposal for a recommendation as regards the minimum structure and content of data to be collected for the inventory of assets with a view to identifying barriers to accessibility, providing information to users and monitoring and evaluating progress on accessibility. That working party completed its work in May 2017, and as a result, the Agency finalised the recommendation ERA-REC-128 for amending Regulation (EU) No 1300/2014. |
|
(3) |
The Inventory of Assets is a static tool indicating the existence of the equipment and is therefore not intended to provide information on the status and functioning of the equipment. |
|
(4) |
Where a station, or elements thereof, undergoes an upgrade, renewal or any work foreseen by a national implementation plan in accordance with Article 8 of Regulation (EU) No 1300/2014, the information related to the compliance of that work with Regulation (EU) No 1300/2014 of the station, or elements thereof, should be collected. |
|
(5) |
The measures provided for in this Regulation are in accordance with the opinion of the Committee established by Article 51(1) of Directive (EU) 2016/797, |
HAS ADOPTED THIS REGULATION:
Article 1
Regulation (EU) No 1300/2014 is amended as follows:
|
(1) |
The following Article 7a is inserted after Article 7 ‘Article 7a Collection, maintenance and exchange of accessibility data 1. Within nine months after 16 June 2019, each Member State shall decide which entities are in charge of collecting, maintaining and exchanging the accessibility data. 2. Member States may ask the Commission for an extension of the time limit. This extension shall be exceptional, duly justified and limited in time. In particular it is considered to be justified if the data collection tool and the operating modes as set out in the Annex of this regulation are not made available and fully operational by the European Union Agency for Railways two months following its entry into force. 3. For each station, there shall be an entity responsible for exchanging the accessibility data. 4. Collection and conversion of data shall be finalised within 36 months following the entry into force of this Regulation. 5. Until the architecture for data exchange described in sections 7.2, 7.3 and 7.4 of Annex I to Commission Regulation (EU) No 454/2011 (*1) is completely operational, the exchange of the accessibility data shall consist of transfer of that data to the European Railway Stations Accessibility Database (ERSAD) hosted by the European Union Agency for Railways. (*1) Commission Regulation (EU) No 454/2011 of 5 May 2011 on the technical specification for interoperability relating to the subsystem “telematics applications for passenger services” of the trans-European rail system (OJ L 123, 12.5.2011, p. 11).’ " |
|
(2) |
The Annex is amended in accordance with the Annex to this Regulation. |
Article 2
This Regulation shall enter into force on the twentieth day following that of its publication in the Official Journal of the European Union.
This Regulation shall be binding in its entirety and directly applicable in all Member States.
Done at Brussels, 16 May 2019.
For the Commission
The President
Jean-Claude JUNCKER
(1) OJ L 138, 26.5.2016, p. 44.
(2) Commission Regulation (EU) No 1300/2014 of 18 November 2014 on the technical specifications for interoperability relating to accessibility of the Union's rail system for persons with disabilities and persons with reduced mobility (OJ L 356, 12.12.2014, p. 110).
(3) Regulation (EU) 2016/796 of the European Parliament and of the Council of 11 May 2016 on the European Union Agency for Railways and repealing Regulation (EC) No 881/2004 (OJ L 138, 26.5.2016, p. 1).
ANNEX
The Annex to Regulation (EU) No 1300/2014 is amended as follows:
|
(1) |
In Chapter 2, section 2.3, the following paragraph is inserted after the first sentence: ‘ Accessibility data Accessibility data consists of the information related to the accessibility of passenger railway stations that needs to be collected, maintained and exchanged, that is to say, of a description of the characteristics and equipment of the passenger railway stations. Where relevant that description is complemented by the information regarding the stations' state of conformity to this TSI.’ |
|
(2) |
In Chapter 7, section 7.2, sub-section 7.2.1, the following sub-sections are inserted: ‘7.2.1.1. 7.2.1.1.1. Functional and technical architecture The functions of the inventory of assets consist of:
The architecture for the exchange of accessibility data is provided for in Regulation (EU) No 454/2011 (TAP TSI). The following standards shall apply for the formatting and exchange of accessibility data:
For the intended particular usage, a harmonised specific transmodel profile as is provided for in the technical documents referred to in Appendix O, index 1. 7.2.1.1.2. Rules for the input and self-assessment of accessibility data The rules for the input and self-assessment of accessibility data shall be the following:
A data collection tool, the operating modes of which are described in the technical documents referred to in Appendix O, index 2, shall be made available by the Commission. Alternatively, where structured accessibility data exist and may be converted to the harmonised profile, those data may be transferred after conversion. The methodology for the conversion of existing accessibility data and the communication protocol are provided for in the technical documents referred to in Appendix O, index 3. 7.2.1.1.3. Rules for consultation From the ERSAD:
The ERSAD database hosted by the Agency shall not be linked to other database(s). 7.2.1.1.4. Rules for the management of user feedback Feedback from users may take the form of:
In both situations, the feedback from users shall be adequately considered by the entity(ies) responsible for collecting, maintaining and exchanging the data. (*1) Commission Implementing Regulation (EU) 2019/772 of 16 May 2019 amending Commission Regulation (EU) No 1300/2014 as regards inventory of assets with a view to identifying barriers to accessibility, providing information to users and monitoring and evaluating progress on accessibility (OJ L 139 I, 27.5.2019, p. 1).’ " |
|
(3) |
The following Appendix is added: ‘Appendix O List of technical documents
|
(*1) Commission Implementing Regulation (EU) 2019/772 of 16 May 2019 amending Commission Regulation (EU) No 1300/2014 as regards inventory of assets with a view to identifying barriers to accessibility, providing information to users and monitoring and evaluating progress on accessibility (OJ L 139 I, 27.5.2019, p. 1).’ ’
|
27.5.2019 |
EN |
Official Journal of the European Union |
LI 139/5 |
COMMISSION IMPLEMENTING REGULATION (EU) 2019/773
of 16 May 2019
on the technical specification for interoperability relating to the operation and traffic management subsystem of the rail system within the European Union and repealing Decision 2012/757/EU
(Text with EEA relevance)
THE EUROPEAN COMMISSION,
Having regard to the Treaty on the Functioning of the European Union,
Having regard to Directive (EU) 2016/797 of the European Parliament and of the Council of 11 May 2016 on the interoperability of the rail system within the European Union (1), and in particular Article 5(11) thereof,
Whereas:
|
(1) |
Article 11 of Commission Delegated Decision (EU) 2017/1474 (2) sets out the specific objectives for drafting, adoption and review of technical specifications for interoperability (TSIs) of the rail system within the Union. |
|
(2) |
Pursuant to points (b) and (f) of Article 3(5) of Decision (EU) 2017/1474 TSIs are to be reviewed in order to take into account the developments of the Union railway system and related research and innovation activities, and update references to standards. |
|
(3) |
Pursuant to point (c) of Article 3(5) of Decision (EU) 2017/1474 TSIs should be reviewed in order to close the remaining open points. In particular, the scope of the open points for operations is to be defined and a distinction is to be made between national applicable rules and rules requiring harmonisation through Union law in order to allow for migration to an interoperable system defining the optimal level of technical harmonisation. |
|
(4) |
On 22 September 2017, in accordance with Article 19(1) of Regulation (EU) 2016/796 of the European Parliament and of the Council (3), the Commission requested the European Union Agency for Railways (the ‘Agency’) to prepare recommendations implementing a selection of the specific objectives set out in Decision (EU) 2017/1474. |
|
(5) |
On 25 October 2018, the Agency issued the recommendation ERA-REC-125 as regards the technical specification for interoperability (TSI) relating to the operation and traffic management subsystem of Union rail system, covering paragraphs 1 to 6 of Article 11 of Commission Delegated Decision (EU) 2017/1474. |
|
(6) |
Commission Decision 2012/757/EU (4) has been amended on several occasions. In order to ensure the readability and the legal certainty, it is advisable to repeal it and replace it by this Regulation. |
|
(7) |
Decision 2012/757/EU should thus be repealed. |
|
(8) |
This Regulation should provide the implementation dates for the different requirements of the TSI relating to the ‘operation and traffic management’ subsystem of the Union rail system. The implementation dates should take into account that certain Member States have notified the Agency and the Commission in accordance with Article 57(2) of Directive (EU) 2016/797 and certain Member States that have not. |
|
(9) |
The changes of process and responsibilities brought by Article 23 of Directive (EU) 2016/797 and by Section 4.2.2.5 and Appendix D1 of the Annex to this Regulation should be managed by the railway undertakings and where appropriate the infrastructure managers, through their respective safety management system. Moreover, railway undertakings should apply for an update of their safety certificates in accordance with Article 10(13) of Directive (EU) 2016/798 of the European Parliament and of the Council (5), if due to Article 23 the type or the extent of its operations are substantially altered, or a safety certification body so requires in accordance with Article 10(15) of Directive (EU) 2016/798. |
|
(10) |
If Member States trigger the deficiency procedure in accordance with Article 6 of Directive (EU) 2016/797, the Commission and the Agency, where appropriate, should act in a timely manner to rectify the situation and issue an opinion constituting an acceptable means of compliance or correct this Regulation. |
|
(11) |
The measures provided for in this Regulation are in accordance with the opinion of the Committee established in accordance with Article 51(1) of Directive (EU) 2016/797, |
HAS ADOPTED THIS REGULATION:
Article 1
This Regulation lays down the technical specification for interoperability (TSI) relating to the operation and traffic management subsystem of Union rail system, as set out in the Annex.
The TSI set out in the Annex shall apply to the operation and traffic management subsystem set out in point 2.5 of Annex II to Directive (EU) 2016/797.
Article 2
Member States shall notify the following types of agreement to the Commission by 1 January 2020, where they have not already been notified pursuant to Commission Decisions 2006/920/EC (6), 2008/231/EC (7), 2011/314/EU (8) or 2012/757/EU:
|
(a) |
bilateral or multilateral agreements between railway undertakings, infrastructure managers or safety authorities that deliver significant levels of local or regional interoperability; |
|
(b) |
international agreements between one or more Member States and at least one third country, or between Member State(s') railway undertakings or infrastructure managers and at least one railway undertaking or infrastructure manager of a third country, that deliver significant levels of local or regional interoperability. |
Article 3
The conditions to be complied with for verifying the interoperability pursuant to Article 13 of Directive (EU) 2016/797 shall be as set out in the national rules applicable in the Member State where the operation takes place, in the following situations:
|
(a) |
in the specific situations referred to in point 7.2 of the Annex to this Regulation; |
|
(b) |
with regard to the topics listed as open points and areas for national rules referred to in Appendix I to that Annex. |
Article 4
By 1 July 2019 at the latest, the Agency shall publish a guide on the application of the operation and traffic management subsystem (application guide). The Agency shall keep the application guide up to date.
Article 5
Decision 2012/757/EU is repealed with effect from 16 June 2021.
However, Appendix A and C of the Annex to Decision 2012/757/EU may continue to apply by 16 June 2024 at the latest.
Article 6
This Regulation shall enter into force on the twentieth day following that of its publication in the Official Journal of the European Union.
It shall apply from 16 June 2021.
However, Sections 4.2.2.1.3.2 and 4.4 of the Annex shall apply from 16 June 2019.
Section 4.2.2.5 and Appendix D1 of the Annex to this Regulation shall apply from 16 June 2019 in the Member States that have not notified the Agency and the Commission in accordance with Article 57(2) of Directive (EU) 2016/797.
Section 4.2.2.5 and Appendix D1 of the Annex to this Regulation shall apply from 16 June 2020 in the Member States that have notified the Agency and the Commission in accordance with Article 57(2) of Directive (EU) 2016/797.
Appendix A and C of the Annex to this regulation shall apply from 16 June 2024 at the latest.
This Regulation shall be binding in its entirety and directly applicable in all Member States.
Done at Brussels, 16 May 2019.
For the Commission
The President
Jean-Claude JUNCKER
(1) OJ L 138, 26.5.2016, p. 44.
(2) Commission Delegated Decision (EU) 2017/1474 of 8 June 2017 supplementing Directive (EU) 2016/797 of the European Parliament and of the Council with regard to specific objectives for the drafting, adoption and review of technical specifications for interoperability (OJ L 210, 15.8.2017, p. 5).
(3) Regulation (EU) 2016/796 of the European Parliament and of the Council of 11 May 2016 on the European Union Agency for Railways and repealing Regulation (EC) No 881/2004 (OJ L 138, 26.5.2016, p. 1).
(4) Commission Decision 2012/757/EU of 14 November 2012 concerning the technical specification for interoperability relating to the operation and traffic management subsystem of the rail system in the European Union and amending Decision 2007/756/EC (OJ L 345, 15.12.2012, p. 1).
(5) Directive (EU) 2016/798 of the European Parliament and of the Council of 11 May 2016 on railway safety (OJ L 138, 26.5.2016, p. 102).
(6) Commission Decision 2006/920/EC of 11 August 2006 concerning the technical specification of interoperability relating to the subsystem Traffic Operation and Management of the trans-European conventional rail system (OJ L 359, 18.12.2006, p. 1).
(7) Commission Decision 2008/231/EC of 1 February 2008 concerning the technical specification of interoperability relating to the operation subsystem of the trans-European high-speed rail system adopted referred to in Article 6(1) of Council Directive 96/48/EC and repealing Commission Decision 2002/734/EC of 30 May 2002 (OJ L 84, 26.3.2008, p. 1).
(8) Commission Decision 2011/314/EU of 12 May 2011 concerning the technical specification for interoperability relating to the ‘operation and traffic management’ subsystem of the trans-European conventional rail system (OJ L 144, 31.5.2011, p. 1).
ANNEX
TABLE OF CONTENTS
|
1. |
Introduction | 12 |
|
1.1. |
Technical scope | 12 |
|
1.2. |
Geographical scope | 12 |
|
1.3. |
Content of this Regulation | 12 |
|
2. |
Description of scope | 12 |
|
2.1. |
Staff and trains | 12 |
|
2.2. |
Principles | 13 |
|
2.3. |
Applicability to existing non TSI conform vehicles and infrastructure | 13 |
|
3. |
Essential requirements | 13 |
|
3.1. |
Compliance with the essential requirements | 13 |
|
3.2. |
Essential requirements — overview | 13 |
|
4. |
Characteristics of the subsystem | 16 |
|
4.1. |
Introduction | 16 |
|
4.2. |
Functional and technical specifications of the subsystem | 16 |
|
4.2.1. |
Specifications relating to staff | 17 |
|
4.2.1.1. |
General requirements | 17 |
|
4.2.1.2. |
Documentation for drivers | 17 |
|
4.2.1.2.1. |
Driver's Rule Book | 17 |
|
4.2.1.2.2. |
Description of the line and the relevant line-side equipment associated with the lines worked over | 18 |
|
4.2.1.2.2.1. |
Preparation of the Route Book | 18 |
|
4.2.1.2.2.2. |
Modifications to information contained within the Route Book | 19 |
|
4.2.1.2.2.3. |
Informing the driver in real time | 19 |
|
4.2.1.2.3. |
Timetables | 19 |
|
4.2.1.2.4. |
Rolling stock | 19 |
|
4.2.1.3. |
Documentation for railway undertaking staff other than drivers | 19 |
|
4.2.1.4. |
Documentation for infrastructure manager's staff authorising train movements | 19 |
|
4.2.1.5. |
Safety-related communications between train crew, other railway undertaking staff and staff authorising train movements | 20 |
|
4.2.2. |
Specifications relating to trains | 20 |
|
4.2.2.1. |
Train visibility | 20 |
|
4.2.2.1.1. |
General requirement | 20 |
|
4.2.2.1.2. |
Front-end | 20 |
|
4.2.2.1.3. |
Rear end | 21 |
|
4.2.2.1.3.1. |
Passenger trains | 21 |
|
4.2.2.1.3.2. |
Freight trains | 21 |
|
4.2.2.2. |
Train audibility | 22 |
|
4.2.2.2.1. |
General requirement | 22 |
|
4.2.2.2.2. |
Control | 22 |
|
4.2.2.3. |
Vehicle identification | 23 |
|
4.2.2.4. |
Safety of passengers and load | 23 |
|
4.2.2.4.1. |
Safety of load | 23 |
|
4.2.2.4.2. |
Safety of passengers | 23 |
|
4.2.2.5. |
Route compatibility and train composition | 23 |
|
4.2.2.5.1. |
Route compatibility | 23 |
|
4.2.2.5.2. |
Train composition | 24 |
|
4.2.2.6. |
Train braking | 25 |
|
4.2.2.6.1. |
Minimum requirements of the braking system | 25 |
|
4.2.2.6.2. |
Braking performance and maximum speed allowed | 25 |
|
4.2.2.7. |
Ensuring that the train is in running order | 26 |
|
4.2.2.7.1. |
General requirement | 26 |
|
4.2.2.7.2. |
Pre-departure data | 26 |
|
4.2.2.8. |
Requirements for signal and lineside marker sighting | 26 |
|
4.2.2.9. |
Driver vigilance | 27 |
|
4.2.3. |
Specifications relating to train operations | 27 |
|
4.2.3.1. |
Train planning | 27 |
|
4.2.3.2. |
Identification of trains | 27 |
|
4.2.3.2.1. |
Format of train running number | 27 |
|
4.2.3.3. |
Train departure | 27 |
|
4.2.3.3.1. |
Checks and tests before departure | 27 |
|
4.2.3.3.2. |
Informing the infrastructure manager of the train's operational status | 27 |
|
4.2.3.4. |
Traffic management | 27 |
|
4.2.3.4.1. |
General requirements | 27 |
|
4.2.3.4.2. |
Train reporting | 28 |
|
4.2.3.4.2.1. |
Data required for train position reporting and predicted hand over time | 28 |
|
4.2.3.4.3. |
Dangerous goods | 28 |
|
4.2.3.4.4. |
Operational quality | 29 |
|
4.2.3.5. |
Data recording | 29 |
|
4.2.3.5.1. |
Recording of supervision data outside the train | 29 |
|
4.2.3.5.2. |
Recording of supervision data on-board the train | 29 |
|
4.2.3.6. |
Degraded operation | 30 |
|
4.2.3.6.1. |
Advice to other users | 30 |
|
4.2.3.6.2. |
Advice to train drivers | 30 |
|
4.2.3.6.3. |
Contingency arrangements | 30 |
|
4.2.3.7. |
Managing an emergency situation | 30 |
|
4.2.3.8. |
Aid to train crew in the event of an incident or of a major rolling stock malfunction | 31 |
|
4.3. |
Functional and technical specifications of the interfaces | 31 |
|
4.3.1. |
Interfaces with the infrastructure TSI (INF TSI) | 31 |
|
4.3.2. |
Interfaces with the control-command and signalling TSI (CCS TSI) | 32 |
|
4.3.3. |
Interfaces with the rolling stock TSIs | 32 |
|
4.3.3.1. |
Interfaces with the locomotives and passenger rolling stock TSI (LOC&PAS TSI) | 32 |
|
4.3.3.2. |
Interfaces with the freight wagons TSI (WAG TSI) | 33 |
|
4.3.4. |
Interfaces with the Energy TSI (ENE TSI) | 34 |
|
4.3.5. |
Interfaces with the Safety in Railway Tunnels TSI (SRT TSI) | 34 |
|
4.3.6. |
Interfaces with the Noise TSI (NOI TSI) | 34 |
|
4.3.7. |
Interfaces with the Person with Reduced Mobility TSI (PRM TSI) | 35 |
|
4.4. |
Operating rules | 35 |
|
4.4.1. |
European Union railway system operational principles and rules | 35 |
|
4.4.2. |
National rules | 35 |
|
4.4.3. |
Acceptable Means of Compliance | 35 |
|
4.4.4. |
Transition from application of national rules to implementation of this Regulation | 36 |
|
4.5. |
Maintenance rules | 36 |
|
4.6. |
Professional competences | 36 |
|
4.6.1. |
Professional competence | 36 |
|
4.6.2. |
Language competence | 36 |
|
4.6.2.1. |
Principles | 36 |
|
4.6.2.2. |
Level of knowledge | 36 |
|
4.6.3. |
Initial and ongoing assessment of staff | 37 |
|
4.6.3.1. |
Basic elements | 37 |
|
4.6.3.2. |
Analysis and update of training needs | 37 |
|
4.6.4. |
Auxiliary staff | 37 |
|
4.7. |
Health and safety conditions | 37 |
|
4.7.1. |
Introduction | 37 |
|
4.7.2. |
Medical examinations and psychological assessments | 38 |
|
4.7.2.1. |
Before appointment | 38 |
|
4.7.2.1.1. |
Minimum content of the medical examination | 38 |
|
4.7.2.1.2. |
Psychological assessment | 38 |
|
4.7.2.2. |
After appointment | 39 |
|
4.7.2.2.1. |
Frequency of periodic medical examinations | 39 |
|
4.7.2.2.2. |
Minimum content of the periodic medical examination | 39 |
|
4.7.2.2.3. |
Additional medical examinations and/or psychological assessments | 39 |
|
4.7.3. |
Medical requirements | 39 |
|
4.7.3.1. |
General requirements | 39 |
|
4.7.3.2. |
Vision requirements | 39 |
|
4.7.3.3. |
Hearing requirements | 40 |
|
4.8. |
Additional information on infrastructure and vehicles | 40 |
|
4.8.1. |
Infrastructure | 40 |
|
4.8.2. |
Rolling stock | 40 |
|
5. |
Interoperability constituents | 40 |
|
5.1. |
Definition | 40 |
|
5.2. |
List of constituents | 40 |
|
6. |
Assessment of conformity and/or suitability for use of the constituents and verification of the subsystem | 40 |
|
6.1. |
Interoperability constituents | 40 |
|
6.2. |
Operation and traffic management subsystem | 41 |
|
6.2.1. |
Principles | 41 |
|
7. |
Implementation | 41 |
|
7.1. |
Principles | 41 |
|
7.2. |
Specific cases | 41 |
|
7.2.1. |
Introduction | 41 |
|
7.2.2. |
List of specific cases | 41 |
|
7.2.2.1. |
Permanent specific case (P) Estonia, Latvia, Lithuania, Poland, Hungary and Slovakia | 41 |
|
7.2.2.2. |
Permanent specific case Ireland and the UK for Northern Ireland | 42 |
|
7.2.2.3. |
Temporary specific case (T1) Ireland and United Kingdom | 42 |
|
7.2.2.4. |
Permanent specific case (P) Finland | 42 |
| Appendix A ERTMS/ETCS operational rules | 43 |
| Appendix B Common operational principles and rules | 44 |
| Appendix C Safety related communications methodology | 49 |
| Appendix D Route compatibility and Route Book | 56 |
| Appendix D1 Parameters for the vehicle and train compatibility over the route intended for operation | 56 |
| Appendix D2 Elements the infrastructure manager has to provide to the railway undertaking for the Route Book | 66 |
| Appendix E Language and communication level | 86 |
| Appendix F Minimum elements relevant to professional qualification for the tasks associated with ‘accompanying trains’ | 87 |
| Appendix G Minimum elements relevant to professional qualification for the task of preparing trains | 89 |
| Appendix H European Vehicle Number and linked alphabetical marking on the bodywork | 91 |
| Appendix I List of areas for which national rules may continue to apply according to Article 8 of Directive (EU) 2016/798 | 93 |
| Appendix J Glossary | 95 |
1. INTRODUCTION
1.1. Technical scope
This Technical Specification for Interoperability (‘TSI’) covers the ‘operation and traffic management’ subsystem shown in the list contained in point 1 and defined in point 2.5 of Annex II to Directive (EU) 2016/797.
1.2. Geographical scope
The geographical scope of this Regulation is the Union's network as specified in section 1 to Annex I of Directive (EU) 2016/797 and excludes the cases referred to in Article 1(3) and 1(4) of Directive (EU) 2016/797.
1.3. Content of this Regulation
In accordance with Article 4(3) of Directive (EU) 2016/797, this Regulation:
|
(a) |
indicates its intended scope for the ‘operation and traffic management’ subsystem; |
|
(b) |
lays down essential requirements for the subsystem concerned and its interfaces vis-à-vis other subsystems; |
|
(c) |
establishes the functional and technical specifications to be met by the target subsystem and its interfaces vis-à-vis other subsystems. If necessary, these specifications may vary according to the use of the subsystem; |
|
(d) |
determines the interoperability constituents and interfaces covered by European specifications, including European standards, which are necessary to achieve interoperability within the European rail system; |
|
(e) |
states, in each case under consideration, which procedures are to be used in order to assess the conformity or suitability for use of the interoperability constituents; |
|
(f) |
indicates the strategy for implementing the TSI. In particular, it is necessary to specify the stages to be completed and the elements that may be applied in order to make a gradual transition from the existing situation to the final situation in which compliance with the TSI shall be the norm; |
|
(g) |
indicates, for the staff concerned, the professional qualifications and health and safety conditions at work required for the operation and maintenance of the subsystem concerned, as well as for the implementation of the TSI; |
|
(h) |
indicates the provisions applicable to the existing non TSI conform subsystems and vehicles, in particular in the event of upgrading and renewal and, in such cases, the modification work which requires an application for a new authorisation; |
|
(i) |
indicates the parameters of the vehicles and fixed subsystems to be checked by the railway undertaking and the procedures to be applied to check those parameters after the delivery of the vehicle authorisation for placing on the market and before the first use of the vehicle to ensure compatibility between vehicles and the routes on which they are to be operated. |
Moreover, in accordance with Article 4(5) of Directive (EU) 2016/797, provision may be made for specific cases for each TSI.
2. DESCRIPTION OF SCOPE
2.1. Staff and trains
Points 4.6 and 4.7 apply to those staff undertaking the safety-critical tasks associated with accompanying a train.
Point 4.6.2 applies to train drivers without prejudice to point 8 of Annex VI to Directive 2007/59/EC of the European Parliament and of the Council (1).
For those staff undertaking the safety-critical tasks associated with despatching trains and authorising train movements, mutual recognition of professional qualifications and health and safety conditions between Member States shall apply.
For those staff undertaking the safety-critical tasks associated with the last preparation of a train before it is scheduled to cross a border(s) and work beyond any location(s) designated as the ‘frontier’ in the network statement of an infrastructure manager and included in its safety authorisation, point 4.6 shall apply while mutual recognition between Member States shall apply for point 4.7. A train shall not be considered to be a cross border service, if it complies with the conditions of point (8) of Article 10 of Directive (EU) 2016/798.
2.2. Principles
This Regulation covers those elements of the rail ‘operation and traffic management’ subsystem, where there are operational interfaces between railway undertakings and infrastructure managers and where there is a particular benefit to interoperability.
Railway undertaking and infrastructure manager shall ensure that all requirements concerning rules and procedures as well as documentation are met by the establishment of the appropriate processes. The set-up of these processes is a relevant part of railway undertaking's and infrastructure manager's safety management system (hereinafter referred to as ‘SMS’) as required by Directive (EU) 2016/798. The SMS itself is assessed by the relevant national safety authority (hereinafter referred to as ‘NSA’) before granting safety authorisation and by the European Union Agency for Railways or the relevant NSA before granting safety certificate.
2.3. Applicability to existing non TSI conform vehicles and infrastructure
While the majority of the requirements contained in this Regulation relates to processes and procedures, a number also relates to physical elements of vehicles and infrastructure that are important for their operational function in the context of this Regulation.
Those physical elements are specified in the structural TSIs covering other subsystems than operation and traffic management. They have to be assessed according to the procedures defined in those TSIs.
None of the provisions of this Regulation shall be used to justify a national rule under a structural TSI.
3. ESSENTIAL REQUIREMENTS
3.1. Compliance with the essential requirements
In accordance with Article 3 of Directive (EU) 2016/797, the Union rail system, its subsystems and their interoperability constituents shall meet the essential requirements set out in general terms in Annex III to that Directive.
3.2. Essential requirements — overview
The essential requirements cover:
|
— |
safety, |
|
— |
reliability and availability, |
|
— |
health, |
|
— |
environmental protection, |
|
— |
technical compatibility, |
|
— |
accessibility. |
According to Directive (EU) 2016/797, the essential requirements may be generally applicable to the whole Union rail system or be specific to each subsystem and its constituents.
The following table summarises the correspondence between the essential requirements set out in Annex III to Directive (EU) 2016/797 and this Regulation.
|
Clause |
Clause Title |
Safety |
Reliability & Availability |
Health |
Environmental protection |
Technical compatibility |
Accessibility |
Essential requirements specific to operation and traffic management |
|||||||||||||
|
1.1.1 |
1.1.2 |
1.1.3 |
1.1.4 |
1.1.5 |
1.2 |
1.3.1 |
1.3.2 |
1.4.1 |
1.4.2 |
1.4.3 |
1.4.4 |
1.4.5 |
1.5 |
1.6.1 |
1.6.2 |
2.6.1 |
2.6.2 |
2.6.3 |
2.6.4 |
||
|
4.2.1.2 |
Documentation for drivers |
|
|
|
|
|
X |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
X |
|
X |
|
|
4.2.1.2.1 |
Driver's Rule book |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
X |
|
|
|
|
X |
|
X |
|
|
4.2.1.2.2 |
Route book |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
X |
|
X |
|
|
4.2.1.2.2.1 |
Preparation of the Route book |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
X |
|
|
|
|
4.2.1.2.2.2 |
Modification to Information contained within the route book |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
X |
|
X |
|
|
4.2.1.2.2.3 |
Informing the driver in real time |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
X |
X |
X |
|
|
4.2.1.2.3 |
Time tables |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
X |
X |
X |
|
|
4.2.1.2.4 |
Rolling stock |
|
|
|
|
|
X |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
X |
|
X |
|
|
4.2.1.3 |
Documentation for railway undertaking staff other than drivers |
|
|
|
|
|
X |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
X |
|
X |
|
|
4.2.1.4 |
Documentation for infrastructure manager's staff authorising train movements |
|
|
|
|
|
X |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
X |
X |
|
|
|
4.2.1.5 |
Safety-related communications between train crew, other railway undertaking staff and staff authorising train movements |
|
|
|
|
|
X |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
X |
X |
X |
|
|
4.2.2.1 |
Train visibility |
X |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
X |
|
X |
|
|
4.2.2.1.1 |
General requirement |
X |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
X |
|
X |
|
|
4.2.2.1.2 |
Front end |
X |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
X |
|
X |
|
|
4.2.2.1.3 |
Rear end |
X |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
X |
|
X |
|
|
4.2.2.2 |
Train audibility |
X |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
X |
|
|
|
|
X |
|
X |
|
|
4.2.2.2.1 |
General requirement |
X |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
X |
|
X |
|
|
4.2.2.2.2 |
Control |
X |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
X |
|
|
4.2.2.3 |
Vehicle identification |
|
|
|
|
|
X |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
X |
|
X |
|
|
4.2.2.4 |
Safety of passengers and load |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
X |
|
|
|
|
4.2.2.5 |
Route Compatibility and Train composition |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
X |
|
|
|
|
4.2.2.5.1 |
Route Compatibility |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
X |
|
|
|
|
4.2.2.5.2 |
Train composition |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
X |
|
|
|
|
4.2.2.6 |
Train braking |
|
X |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
X |
|
X |
|
|
4.2.2.6.1 |
Minimum requirements of the braking system |
|
X |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
X |
|
X |
|
|
4.2.2.6.2 |
Braking performance |
|
X |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
X |
|
X |
|
|
4.2.2.7 |
Ensuring that the train is in running order |
|
X |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
X |
|
X |
|
|
4.2.2.7.1 |
General requirement |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
X |
|
X |
|
|
4.2.2.7.2 |
Pre-departure Data |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
X |
|
X |
|
|
4.2.2.8 |
Requirements for Signal and lineside marker sighting |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
X |
|
|
X |
|
|
|
|
4.2.2.9 |
Driver vigilance |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
X |
|
|
|
|
4.2.3.1 |
Train planning |
|
X |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
X |
X |
|
|
4.2.3.2 |
Identification of trains |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
X |
X |
X |
|
|
4.2.3.3 |
Train departure |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
X |
|
X |
|
|
4.2.3.3.1 |
Checks and tests before departure |
|
X |
|
|
|
X |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
X |
|
X |
|
|
4.2.3.3.2 |
Informing the infrastructure manager of the train's operational status |
|
X |
|
|
|
X |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
X |
X |
|
|
4.2.3.4 |
Traffic management |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
X |
X |
X |
|
|
4.2.3.4.1 |
General requirements |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
X |
X |
X |
|
|
4.2.3.4.2 |
Train reporting |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
X |
X |
X |
|
|
4.2.3.4.2.1 |
Data required for train position reporting |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
X |
|
X |
|
|
4.2.3.4.2.2 |
Predicted hand over time |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
X |
|
X |
|
|
4.2.3.4.3 |
Dangerous goods |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
X |
X |
|
|
|
4.2.3.4.4 |
Operational quality |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
X |
X |
|
|
4.2.3.5 |
Data recording |
|
|
|
|
|
X |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
X |
|
|
|
4.2.3.5.1 |
Recording of supervision data outside the train |
|
|
|
|
|
X |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
X |
|
|
|
4.2.3.5.2 |
Recording of supervision data on-board the train |
|
|
|
|
|
X |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
X |
|
|
|
4.2.3.6 |
Degraded operation |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
X |
X |
X |
|
|
4.2.3.6.1 |
Advice to other users |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
X |
|
X |
|
|
4.2.3.6.2 |
Advice to train drivers |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
X |
|
|
|
|
4.2.3.6.3 |
Contingency arrangements |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
X |
X |
X |
|
|
4.2.3.7 |
Managing an emergency situation |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
X |
X |
X |
|
|
4.2.3.8 |
Aid to train crew in the event of an incident or of a major rolling stock malfunction |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
X |
|
|
4.4 |
ERTMS operating rules |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
X |
X |
|
|
|
4.6 |
Professional qualifications |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
X |
X |
X |
|
|
4.7 |
Health and safety conditions |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
X |
|
|
|
|
4.8 |
Additional information on infrastructure and vehicles |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
X |
|
|
|
|
4.8.1 |
Infrastructure |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
X |
|
|
|
|
4.8.2 |
vehicles |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
X |
|
|
|
4. CHARACTERISTICS OF THE SUBSYSTEM
4.1. Introduction
In accordance with Directive 2012/34/EU of the European Parliament and of the Council (2), it is the overall responsibility of the infrastructure manager to provide all the appropriate requirements which shall be met by trains permitted to run on its network, taking into account the geographic particularities of individual lines and the functional or technical specifications set out in this Chapter.
4.2. Functional and technical specifications of the subsystem
The functional and technical specifications of the ‘operation and traffic management’ subsystem comprise of the following:
|
— |
specifications relating to staff, |
|
— |
specifications relating to trains, |
|
— |
specifications relating to train operations. |
4.2.1. Specifications relating to staff
4.2.1.1.
This point deals with staff who contributes to the operation of the subsystem by performing safety-critical tasks involving a direct interface between a railway undertaking and an infrastructure manager.
|
(1) |
Railway undertaking staff:
|
|
(2) |
Infrastructure manager's staff undertaking the task of authorising the movement of trains The areas covered are:
|
In addition, for the staff as defined in point 2.1, this Regulation sets out requirements on:
|
— |
Qualifications (see point 4.6 and Appendix G) |
|
— |
Health and safety conditions (see point 4.7) |
4.2.1.2.
The railway undertaking operating the train shall supply the driver with all the necessary information and documentation required to carry out her/his duties; they may be paper based or in electronic format.
This information shall take into account the necessary elements for operation in normal, degraded and emergency situations for the routes to be worked over and the rolling stock used on those routes.
4.2.1.2.1.
All the necessary procedures for the driver shall be included in a document or a computer medium called the ‘Driver's Rule Book’.
The Driver's Rule Book shall state the requirements for all the routes worked and the rolling stock used on those routes according to the situations of normal operation, degraded operation and in emergency situations which the driver may encounter.
The Driver's Rule Book shall cover two distinct aspects:
|
— |
one which describes the set of common rules and procedures (taking into account the contents of Appendices A, B and C), |
|
— |
another which sets out any necessary rules and procedures specific to each infrastructure manager. |
It shall include procedures covering, as a minimum, the following aspects:
|
— |
Staff safety and security, |
|
— |
Signalling and control command, |
|
— |
Train operation including degraded mode, |
|
— |
Traction and rolling stock, |
|
— |
Incidents and accidents. |
The railway undertaking shall be responsible for the Driver's Rule Book and compile it in such a way that it is complete and accurate, and the driver's application of all operational rules is enabled.
The railway undertaking must present the Driver's Rule Book in a clear format for the entire infrastructure over which their drivers will work.
It shall have two appendices:
|
— |
Appendix 1: Manual of communication procedures; |
|
— |
Appendix 2: Book of Forms. |
Predefined messages and forms shall at least exist in the ‘operating’ language(s) of infrastructure manager(s).
The railway undertaking's process for preparing and updating the Driver's Rule Book shall include the following steps:
|
— |
the infrastructure manager (or the organisation responsible for the preparation of the operating rules) shall provide the railway undertaking with the appropriate information in the infrastructure manager's operating language, |
|
— |
the railway undertaking shall draw up the initial or updated document; |
|
— |
if the language chosen by the railway undertaking for the Driver's Rule Book is not the language in which the appropriate information was originally supplied, it is the responsibility of the railway undertaking to arrange for any necessary translation and/or provide explanatory notes in another language. |
The infrastructure manager shall ensure that the content of the documentation provided to the railway undertaking(s) is complete and accurate.
4.2.1.2.2.
Drivers shall be provided with a description of the lines and the associated line-side equipment for the lines over which they shall operate and relevant to the driving task. Such information shall be set out in a single document called the ‘Route Book’.
The following is a list of information which shall, as a minimum, be provided:
|
— |
the general operating characteristics, |
|
— |
indication of rising and falling gradients, |
|
— |
detailed line diagram. |
4.2.1.2.2.1. Preparation of the Route Book
The format of the Route Book shall be prepared in the same manner for all the infrastructures worked over by the trains of an individual railway undertaking.
The railway undertaking is responsible for the complete and correct compilation of the Route book, using the information supplied by the infrastructure manager(s). The railway undertaking shall ensure that the content of the Route Book is complete and accurate, including when grouping the modifications to information contained within the Route book. The railway undertaking shall ensure the route book duly describes operational conditions related to line characteristics and vehicle characteristics.
The infrastructure manager shall provide the railway undertaking with at least the information for the route book as defined in Appendix D2 through RINF. This information shall include relevant information that shall be taken into account to adapt train operation to line characteristics and vehicle characteristics. Until RINF provides the relevant parameters in accordance with Article 6 of Commission Implementing Regulation (EU) 2019/777 (3), the infrastructure manager shall provide this information through other means free of charge and as soon as reasonably possible and in any event within 15 days for the first submission unless the railway undertaking agrees a longer deadline.
The infrastructure manager shall inform the railway undertaking of the changes on the information of the route book through RINF whenever such information becomes available or through other means until RINF allows for such functionality.
The infrastructure manager shall ensure that the information provided to the railway undertaking(s) is complete and accurate. For emergency situations or real time information appropriate alternative means of communication of the infrastructure manager shall ensure immediate information to the railway undertaking about Appendix D2.
4.2.1.2.2.2. Modifications to information contained within the Route Book
The infrastructure manager shall advise the railway undertaking of any permanent or temporary modifications to information supplied in accordance with point 4.2.1.2.2.1.
These changes shall be grouped by the railway undertaking into a dedicated document or computer medium whose format shall be the same for all the infrastructures worked over by the trains of an individual railway undertaking.
4.2.1.2.2.3. Informing the driver in real time
The infrastructure manager shall inform drivers of any changes to the line or relevant lineside equipment that have not been advised as modifications to information for the Route Book as set out in point 4.2.1.2.2.2.
4.2.1.2.3.
The provision of train schedule information facilitates the punctual running of trains and assists in service performance.
The railway undertaking shall provide drivers with the information necessary for the normal running of the train and as a minimum include:
|
— |
the train identification; |
|
— |
the train running days (if necessary); |
|
— |
the stopping points and the activities associated with them |
|
— |
other timing points; |
|
— |
the arrival/departure/passing times at each of those points. |
Such train running information, which shall be based on information supplied by the infrastructure manager, may be provided either electronically or in a paper format.
Presentation to the driver shall be consistent across all the lines over which the railway undertaking operates.
4.2.1.2.4.
The railway undertaking shall provide the driver with all information relevant to the working of the rolling stock during degraded situations (such as trains requiring assistance). Such documentation shall also focus on the specific interface with the infrastructure manager's staff in these cases.
4.2.1.3.
The railway undertaking shall provide all members of its staff (whether on train or otherwise) who undertake safety-critical tasks involving a direct interface with the staff, equipment or systems of the infrastructure manager with the rules, procedures, rolling stock and route specific information it deems appropriate to such tasks. Such information shall be applicable in both normal and degraded operation.
For staff on-board trains, the structure, format, content and process for preparation and updating of such information shall be based on the specification set out in Subsection 4.2.1.2.
4.2.1.4.
All the information necessary to ensure safety-related communication between staff authorising the movement of trains and train crews shall be set out in:
|
— |
documents describing the Communications Principles (Appendix C); |
|
— |
the document entitled Book of forms. |
The infrastructure manager shall draw up these documents in all its operating language(s).
4.2.1.5.
The language used for safety-related communication between train crew, other railway undertaking staff (as defined in Appendix G) and the staff authorising train movements is the operating language(s) (as defined in Appendix J) used by the infrastructure manager on the route concerned.
The principles for safety-related communication between train crew and staff responsible for authorising the movement of trains are to be found in Appendix C.
In accordance with Directive 2012/34/EU, the infrastructure manager is responsible for publishing the ‘operating’ language(s) used by its personnel in daily operational use.
Where, however, local practice requires that a second language is also provided for, it is the responsibility of the infrastructure manager to determine the geographic boundaries for its use.
4.2.2. Specifications relating to trains
4.2.2.1.
4.2.2.1.1.
The railway undertaking shall ensure that trains are fitted with means of indicating the front and rear of the train.
4.2.2.1.2.
The railway undertaking shall ensure that an approaching train is clearly visible and recognisable as such, by the presence and layout of its lit white front-end lights.
The forward facing front-end of the leading vehicle of a train shall be fitted with three lights in an isosceles triangle, as shown below. These lights shall always be lit when the train is being driven from that end.
The front-end lights shall optimise train detectability (marker lights), provide sufficient visibility for the train driver (head lights) by night and during low light conditions and shall not dazzle the drivers of oncoming trains.
The spacing, the height above rails, the diameter, the intensity of the lights, the dimensions and shape of the emitted beam in both day and night time operation are defined in the ‘rolling stock — locomotives and passenger rolling stock’ TSI (‘LOC&PAS TSI’).
By the dates mentioned below for the harmonisation of the rear end signal as per section 4.2.2.1.3.2, the luminous intensity of vehicle headlamps shall be in accordance with point (5) of section 4.2.7.1.1 of the Annex to Commission Regulation (EU) No 1302/2014 (4) (Loc&Pas TSI) in order to access the lines identified in RINF where permissive driving is used.
4.2.2.1.3.
The railway undertaking shall provide the required means of indicating the rear of a train. The rear end signal shall only be exhibited on the rear of the last vehicle of the train. It shall be displayed as shown below.
4.2.2.1.3.1. Passenger trains
The rear end signal of a passenger train shall consist of 2 steady red lights at the same height above buffer on the transversal axis.
4.2.2.1.3.2. Freight trains
The rear end signal of a freight train shall consist of 2 reflective plates at the same height above buffer on the transversal axis. Any train equipped with 2 steady red lights shall also be considered to comply with this obligation.
Reflective plates shall comply with Appendix E to Wagon TSI and have the following shape with white side triangles and red top and bottom triangle:
The plates shall be on the same height above buffer on the transversal axis
Specific cases:
Belgium, France, Italy, Portugal, Spain and UK may continue to apply notified national rules that require freight trains to be equipped with 2 steady red lights as a condition to run on sections of their network, where this is justified by operating practices already in place and/or national rules notified before end of January 2019.
Reports:
At the latest by 30 September 2020, the concerned Member States shall deliver to the Commission reports on their use of reflective plates, identifying any serious obstacles to the planned elimination of national rules.
Cooperation with neighbouring countries:
In the meantime Member States concerned, in particular at the request of the railway undertakings, shall perform an assessment with a view to accept the use of 2 reflective plates in one or more sections of their network if the result of the assessment is positive and define appropriate conditions, which shall be based upon an assessment of the risks and operational requirements. This assessment shall be completed within a maximum period of 6 months after receiving the railway undertaking's request. The acceptance of reflective plates shall be granted, unless the Member State can duly justify the refusal based on the negative result of the assessment.
Member States shall in particular endeavour to permit the use of reflective plates on rail freight corridors, with a view to prioritise the current bottlenecks. These sections and details of any conditions pertaining to them shall be recorded in the RINF. Until the information is encoded in RINF, the infrastructure manager shall ensure the information is communicated to railway undertakings by other appropriate means. The infrastructure manager shall identify the sections of lines on which 2 steady red lights are required in the RINF.
Phasing out:
By 31 March 2021, the Commission shall, on the basis of a recommendation from the Agency and taking into account the findings in the reports delivered by Member States, review the dates and specifications with a view of harmonising the rear end signal to have reflective plates accepted for the whole Union, bearing in mind the safety and capacity concerns as well as cost impact during the transition.
Unless such revision provides otherwise the following deadlines shall apply for accepting freight trains equipped with 2 reflective plates:
|
(1) |
From 1 January 2022, along the rail freight corridors specified in accordance with Regulation (EU) No 913/2010 of the European Parliament and of the Council (5). |
|
(2) |
From 1 January 2026, in the whole European Union rail network. |
The Commission shall report to the committee referred to in Article 51 of Directive (EU) 2016/797 on the implementation progress of section 4.2.2.1.
4.2.2.2.
4.2.2.2.1.
The railway undertaking shall ensure that trains are fitted with an audible warning device to indicate the approach of a train.
4.2.2.2.2.
The activation of the audible warning device shall be possible from all driving positions.
4.2.2.3.
Each vehicle shall have a number to uniquely identify it from any other rail vehicle. This number shall be prominently displayed at least on each longitudinal side of the vehicle.
It shall also be possible to identify operational restrictions applicable to the vehicle.
Further requirements are specified in Appendix H.
4.2.2.4.
4.2.2.4.1.
The railway undertaking shall make sure that freight vehicles are safely and securely loaded and remain so throughout the journey.
4.2.2.4.2.
The railway undertaking shall ensure that passenger transport is undertaken safely at the departure and during the journey.
4.2.2.5.
4.2.2.5.1.
|
(A) |
The railway undertaking is responsible for ensuring that all vehicles composing its train are compatible with the intended route(s). The railway undertaking shall have a process in its SMS to ensure that all vehicles it uses are authorised, registered and compatible with the intended route(s) including the requirements to be followed by its staff. The route compatibility process shall not duplicate processes performed as part of the vehicle authorisation under Commission Implementing Regulation (EU) 2018/545 (6) to ensure technical compatibility between the vehicle and the network(s). Parameters of Appendix D1 already verified and checked during vehicle authorisation or other similar processes shall not be reassessed in the framework of route compatibility check. For vehicle authorised under Directive (EU) 2016/797, the relevant vehicle data related to the parameters listed in Appendix D1, already checked during the authorisation process, being part of:
shall be provided by the applicant referred to in Article 2(22) of Directive (EU) 2016/797 or the keeper to the railway undertaking upon request, when such information is not available in ERATV or other registers for rail vehicles. For vehicles authorised before Directive (EU) 2016/797, the relevant vehicle data related to the parameters listed in Appendix D1 shall be provided to the railway undertaking by the holder of the vehicle authorisation documentation or the keeper upon request, when such information is not available in ERATV or other registers for rail vehicles. The processes for route compatibility in the SMS of the railway undertaking shall include the following checks, which may be performed in parallel at any appropriate time or in any appropriate sequence:
|
|
(B) |
The infrastructure manager shall provide the information for route compatibility as defined in Appendix D1 through RINF. Appendix D1 sets out all the parameters that shall be used in the process of the railway undertaking before the first use of a vehicle or train configuration in order to ensure all vehicles composing a train are compatible with the route(s) the train is planned to operate on including, where appropriate, deviation routes and routes to workshops. Modifications of the route and changes of infrastructure characteristics have to be taken into account. When a parameter of Appendix D1 is harmonised at network(s) level of an area of use, conformity with that parameter may be presumed for any vehicle authorised for that area of use. National rules or additional national requirements for network access in respect of route compatibility are in principle considered incompatible with Appendix D1. The infrastructure manager shall not require additional technical checks for the purpose of route compatibility beyond the list laid down in Appendix D1. As required by Article 23(1)(b) of Directive (EU) 2016/797, until RINF provides all necessary information in respect of the relevant parameters, the infrastructure manager shall provide this information through other means free of charge as soon as possible and in electronic format to railway undertakings, authorized applicants for path requests and, where applicable, for the applicant referred to in Article 2(22) of Directive (EU) 2016/797. The first submission of route compatibility information by the infrastructure manager through other mean than RINF shall be delivered at the request of the railway undertaking as soon as reasonably possible and in any event within 15 days unless the infrastructure manager and the railway undertaking agree a longer deadline. The infrastructure manager shall ensure that the information provided to the railway undertaking(s) is complete and accurate. The infrastructure manager shall inform the railway undertaking of the changes on characteristics of the route through RINF whenever such information becomes available or through other means until RINF allows for such functionality. For emergency situations or real time information, the infrastructure manager shall ensure immediate information is given to the railway undertaking through appropriate means of communication. |
|
(C) |
Additional elements for route compatibility shall be checked when relevant:
|
4.2.2.5.2.
Train composition requirements shall take into account the following elements according to the allocated path:
|
(a) |
all vehicles composing a train including their loads
|
|
(b) |
all vehicles on the train shall remain within their specified maintenance interval for the duration (in terms of both time and distance) of the journey being undertaken; |
|
(c) |
the train composed of vehicles including their loads, shall comply with the technical and operational constraints of the route concerned and be within the maximum length permissible for forwarding and receiving terminals. |
|
(d) |
the railway undertaking is responsible for ensuring that all vehicles composing the train including their load are technically fit for the journey to be undertaken and remains so throughout the journey. |
The railway undertaking may need to consider additional constraints due to the type of braking regime or traction type on a particular train (see point 4.2.2.6).
4.2.2.6.
4.2.2.6.1.
All vehicles in a train shall be connected to the continuous automatic braking system as defined in the LOC&PAS and WAG TSIs.
The first and last vehicles (including any traction units) in any train shall have the automatic brake operative.
In the case of a train becoming accidentally divided into two parts, both sets of detached vehicles shall come automatically to a stand as a result of a maximum application of the brake.
4.2.2.6.2.
|
(1) |
The infrastructure manager shall provide the railway undertaking with all relevant line characteristics for each route through RINF:
Until RINF provides the relevant parameters, the infrastructure manager shall provide this information through others means free of charge and as soon as reasonably possible and in any event within 15 days for the first submission unless the railway undertaking agrees a longer deadline. The infrastructure manager shall inform the railway undertaking of the changes on the line characteristics through RINF whenever such information becomes available or through other means until RINF allows for such functionality. The infrastructure manager shall ensure that the information provided to the railway undertaking(s) is complete and accurate. |
|
(2) |
The infrastructure manager may provide the following information:
If the infrastructure manager provides the above mentioned information, it shall be made available to all railway undertakings who intend to operate trains on its network in a non-discriminatory way. The braking tables already in use and accepted for the existing non TSI conform lines at the date of entry into force of the present Regulation shall also be made available. |
|
(3) |
The railway undertaking shall, in the planning stage, determine the braking capability of the train and corresponding maximum speed taking into account:
Furthermore, the railway undertaking shall ensure that during operation each train achieves at least the necessary braking performance. The railway undertaking shall set up and implement corresponding rules and shall manage them within its safety management system. In particular the railway undertaking has to set up rules to be used if a train does not reach the necessary braking performance during operation. In this case, the railway undertaking shall immediately inform the infrastructure manager. The infrastructure manager may take appropriate measures to reduce the impact on the overall traffic on its network. |
4.2.2.7.
4.2.2.7.1.
The railway undertaking shall define the process to ensure that all safety-related on-train equipment is in a fully functional state and that the train is safe to run.
The railway undertaking shall inform the infrastructure manager of any modification to the characteristics of the train affecting its performance or any modification that might affect the ability to accommodate the train in its allocated path.
The infrastructure manager and the railway undertaking shall define and keep up to date conditions and procedures for train running temporarily in degraded mode.
4.2.2.7.2.
The railway undertaking shall ensure that the following data required for safe and efficient operation is made available to the infrastructure manager(s) prior to the departure of the train:
|
— |
the train identification |
|
— |
the identity of the railway undertaking responsible for the train |
|
— |
the actual length of the train |
|
— |
if a train carries passengers or animals when it is not scheduled to do so |
|
— |
any operational restrictions with an indication of the vehicle(s) concerned (gauge, speed restrictions, etc.) |
|
— |
information the infrastructure manager requires for the transport of dangerous goods. |
The railway undertaking shall advise the infrastructure manager(s) if a train does not occupy its allocated path or is cancelled.
4.2.2.8.
The driver shall be able to observe signals and lineside markers, and they shall be observable by the driver whenever applicable. The same applies for other types of lineside signs if they are safety related.
Therefore, signals, lineside markers, signs and information boards shall be designed and positioned in such a consistent way to facilitate this. Issues that shall be taken into account include:
|
— |
that they are suitably sited so that train head lights allow the driver to read the information, |
|
— |
suitability and intensity of lighting, where required to illuminate the information, |
|
— |
where retro-reflectivity is employed, the reflective properties of the material used are in compliance with appropriate specifications and the signs are fabricated so that train head lights easily allow the driver to read the information. |
Driving cabs shall be designed in such a consistent way that the driver is able to easily see the information displayed to him.
4.2.2.9.
A means of on-board monitoring of driver vigilance is necessary. This shall intervene to bring the train to a stand if the driver does not react within a certain time; the time range is specified in the rolling stock TSIs.
4.2.3. Specifications relating to train operations
4.2.3.1.
In accordance with Directive 2012/34/EU, the infrastructure manager shall advise what data is required when a train path is requested.
4.2.3.2.
Each train shall be identified by a train running number. The train running number is given by the infrastructure manager when allocating a train path and shall be known by the railway undertaking and all infrastructure managers operating the train. The train running number shall be unique per network. Changes of train running number during a train journey should be avoided.
4.2.3.2.1.
The train running number format is defined in the control-command and signalling TSI (hereinafter referred to as ‘CCS TSI’, Commission Regulation (EU) 2016/919 (7))
4.2.3.3.
4.2.3.3.1.
The railway undertaking shall define the checks and tests to ensure that any departure is undertaken safely (e.g. doors, load, brakes).
4.2.3.3.2.
The railway undertaking shall inform the infrastructure manager when a train is ready for access to the network.
The railway undertaking shall inform the infrastructure manager of any anomaly affecting the train or its operation having possible repercussions on the train's running prior to departure and during the journey.
4.2.3.4.
4.2.3.4.1.
Traffic management shall ensure the safe, efficient and punctual operation of the railway, including effective recovery from service disruption.
The infrastructure manager shall determine procedures and means for:
|
— |
the real time management of trains, |
|
— |
operational measures to maintain the highest possible performance of the infrastructure in case of delays or incidents, whether actual or anticipated, and |
|
— |
the provision of information to the railway undertaking(s) in such cases. |
Any additional processes required by the railway undertaking and which affect the interface with the infrastructure manager(s) may be introduced after being agreed with the infrastructure manager.
4.2.3.4.2.
4.2.3.4.2.1. Data required for train position reporting and predicted hand over time
The infrastructure manager shall:
|
(a) |
provide a means of real time recording of the times at which trains depart from, arrive at or pass appropriate pre-defined reporting points on their networks and the delta-time value; |
|
(b) |
have a process which enables an indication of the estimated number of minutes of deviation from the scheduled time a train is scheduled to be handed over from one infrastructure manager to another; this shall include information on service disruption (description and location of problem). |
|
(c) |
provide the specific data according to Commission Regulation (EU) No 1305/2014 (8) (Telematics Applications for Freight — TAF TSI) and Commission Regulation (EU) No 454/2011 (9) (Telematics Applications for Passengers — TAP TSI) required in relation to train position reporting. Such information shall include:
|
4.2.3.4.3.
The railway undertaking shall define the procedures to perform the transport of dangerous goods.
These procedures shall include:
|
— |
the provisions as specified in Directive 2008/68/EC of the European Parliament and of the Council (10) and Directive 2010/35/EU of the European Parliament and of the Council (11), as applicable |
|
— |
inform to the driver of the presence and position of dangerous goods on the train |
|
— |
information the infrastructure manager requires for transport of dangerous goods |
|
— |
determination, in conjunction with the infrastructure manager, of lines of communication and planning of specific measures in case of emergency situations involving the goods. |
4.2.3.4.4.
The infrastructure manager and the railway undertaking shall have processes in place to monitor the efficient operation of all the services concerned.
Monitoring processes shall be designed to analyse data and detect underlying trends, both in terms of human error and system error. The results of this analysis shall be used to generate improvement actions, designed to eliminate or mitigate against events which could compromise the efficient operation of the network.
Where such improvement actions would have network-wide benefits, involving other infrastructure managers and railway undertakings, they shall, subject to commercial confidentiality, be communicated accordingly.
Events that have significantly disrupted operations shall be analysed as soon as possible by the infrastructure manager. Where appropriate, and in particular where one of their staff is concerned, the infrastructure manager shall invite those railway undertaking(s) involved in the event concerned to participate in the analysis. Where the result of such analysis leads to network improvement recommendations designed to eliminate or mitigate against causes of accidents/incidents, these shall be communicated to all relevant infrastructure managers and railway undertakings concerned.
These processes shall be documented and subject to internal audit.
4.2.3.5.
Data pertaining to the running of a train shall be recorded and retained for the purposes of:
|
— |
Supporting systematic safety monitoring as a means of preventing incidents and accidents. |
|
— |
Identification of driver, train and infrastructure performance in the period leading up to and, if appropriate, immediately after an incident or accident, in order to enable the identification of causes, and supporting the case for new or changed measures to prevent recurrence. |
|
— |
Recording information relating to the performance of both the locomotive/traction unit and the person driving. |
It shall be possible to match recorded data to:
|
— |
the date and time of the recording; |
|
— |
the precise geographic location of the event being recorded; |
|
— |
the train identification; |
|
— |
the identity of the driver. |
Data to be recorded for ETCS/GSM-R are those defined in the TSI CCS and that are relevant considering the requirements in this point 4.2.3.5.
The data shall be securely sealed and stored and accessible to authorised bodies including Investigating Bodies in carrying out their role pursuant to Article 22 of Directive (EU) 2016/798.
4.2.3.5.1.
As a minimum, the infrastructure manager shall record the following data:
|
— |
the failure of lineside equipment associated with the movement of trains (signalling, points etc.); |
|
— |
the detection of an overheating axle bearing, if fitted; |
|
— |
safety related communication between the train driver and signaller. |
4.2.3.5.2.
As a minimum, the railway undertaking shall record the following data:
|
— |
the detection of passing of signals at danger or ‘end of movement authority’; |
|
— |
application of the emergency brake; |
|
— |
speed at which the train is running; |
|
— |
any isolation or overriding of the on-board train control (signalling) systems; |
|
— |
operation of the audible warning device; |
|
— |
operation of door controls (release, closure), if fitted; |
|
— |
detection by on-board alarm systems related to the safe operation of the train, if fitted; |
|
— |
identity of the cab for which data is being recorded to be checked. |
Further technical specifications concerning the recording device are set out in the LOC&PAS TSI.
4.2.3.6.
4.2.3.6.1.
The infrastructure manager in conjunction with the railway undertaking(s) shall define a process to immediately inform each other of any situation that impedes the safety, performance and/or the availability of the rail network or rolling stock.
4.2.3.6.2.
In any case of degraded operation associated with the infrastructure manager's area of responsibility, the infrastructure manager shall give formal instructions to drivers on what measures to take in order to safely overcome the degradation.
4.2.3.6.3.
The infrastructure manager in conjunction with all the railway undertakings operating over its infrastructure, and neighbouring infrastructure managers as appropriate, shall define, publish and make available appropriate contingency measures and assign responsibilities based on the requirement to reduce any negative impact as a result of degraded operation.
The planning requirements and the response to such events shall be proportional to the nature and potential severity of the degradation.
These measures, which shall as a minimum include plans for recovering the network to ‘normal’ status, may also address:
|
— |
rolling stock failures (for example, those which could result in substantial traffic disruption, the procedures for rescuing failed trains); |
|
— |
infrastructure failures (for example, when there has been a failure of the electric power or the conditions under which trains may be diverted from the booked route); |
|
— |
extreme weather conditions. |
The infrastructure manager shall establish and keep updated contact information for key infrastructure manager and railway undertaking staff who may be contacted in the event of service disruption leading to degraded operation. This information shall include contact details both during and outside office hours.
The railway undertaking shall submit this information to the infrastructure manager and advise the infrastructure manager of any changes to these contact details.
The infrastructure manager shall advise all the railway undertaking(s) of any changes to its details.
4.2.3.7.
The infrastructure manager shall, in consultation with:
|
— |
all railway undertakings operating over its infrastructure, or, where appropriate, representative bodies of railway undertakings operating over its infrastructure, |
|
— |
neighbouring infrastructure managers, as appropriate, |
|
— |
local authorities, representative bodies of the emergency services (including fire-fighting and rescue) at either local or national level, as appropriate, |
define, publish and make available appropriate measures to manage emergency situations and restore the line to normal operation.
Such measures shall typically cover:
|
— |
collisions, |
|
— |
fires on train, |
|
— |
evacuation of trains, |
|
— |
accidents in tunnels, |
|
— |
incidents involving dangerous goods |
|
— |
derailments. |
The railway undertaking shall provide the infrastructure manager with any specific information in respect to these circumstances, especially in respect to the recovery or re-railing of their trains.
Additionally, the railway undertaking shall have processes to inform passengers about on-board emergency and safety procedures.
4.2.3.8.
The railway undertaking shall define appropriate procedures to assist the train crew in degraded situations in order to avoid or decrease delays caused by technical or other failures of the rolling stock (for example, lines of communication, measures to be taken in case of evacuation of a train).
4.3. Functional and technical specifications of the interfaces
In the light of the essential requirements set out in Chapter 3 of this Regulation, the functional and technical specifications of the interfaces are as follows:
4.3.1. Interfaces with the infrastructure TSI (INF TSI)
|
Reference this Regulation |
|
Reference INF TSI |
|
|
Parameter |
Point |
Parameter |
Point |
|
Braking performance and maximum speed allowed |
4.2.2.6.2 |
Longitudinal track resistance |
4.2.6.2 |
|
Modifications to information contained within the route book |
4.2.1.2.2.2 |
Operating rules |
4.4 |
|
Degraded operation |
4.2.3.6 |
||
|
Parameters for the vehicle and train compatibility over the route intended for operation |
Appendix D1 |
Ascertain Compatibility of infrastructure and rolling stock after authorisation of rolling stock |
7.6 |
4.3.2. Interfaces with the control-command and signalling TSI (CCS TSI)
|
Reference this Regulation |
|
Reference CCS TSI |
|
|
Parameter |
Point |
Parameter |
Point |
|
Driver's Rule Book |
4.2.1.2.1 |
Operating rules (normal and degraded conditions) |
4.4 |
|
Operating rules |
4.4 |
||
|
Requirements for lineside signal and marker sighting |
4.2.2.8 |
Visibility of track-side control-command and signalling objects |
4.2.15 |
|
Train braking |
4.2.2.6 |
Train braking performance and characteristics |
4.2.2 |
|
Driver's Rule Book |
4.2.1.2.1 |
Use of sanding equipment On-board flange lubrication Use of composite brake blocks |
4.2.10 |
|
Format of train running number |
4.2.3.2.1 |
ETCS DMI |
4.2.12 |
|
GSM-R DMI |
4.2.13 |
||
|
Data recording |
4.2.3.5 |
Interface to data recording for regulatory purposes |
4.2.14 |
|
Ensuring that the train is in running order |
4.2.2.7 |
Key management |
4.2.8 |
|
Parameters for the vehicle and train compatibility over the route intended for operation |
Appendix D1 |
Route compatibility checks before the use of authorised vehicles |
4.9 |
4.3.3. Interfaces with the rolling stock TSIs
4.3.3.1.
|
Reference this Regulation |
|
Reference LOC&PAS TSI |
|
|
Parameter |
Point |
Parameter |
Point |
|
Contingency arrangements |
4.2.3.6.3 |
Rescue coupling |
4.2.2.2.4 |
|
End coupling |
4.2.2.2.3 |
||
|
Route Compatibility and Train composition |
4.2.2.5 |
axle load parameter |
4.2.3.2.1 |
|
Train braking |
4.2.2.6 |
Braking performance |
4.2.4.5. |
|
Train visibility |
4.2.2.1 |
External lights |
4.2.7.1 |
|
Train audibility |
4.2.2.2 |
Horn (audible warning device) |
4.2.7.2 |
|
Requirements for lineside signal and marker sighting |
4.2.2.8 |
External visibility |
4.2.9.1.3 |
|
Optical characteristics of the windscreen |
4.2.9.2.2 |
||
|
Internal lighting |
4.2.9.1.8 |
||
|
Driver vigilance |
4.2.2.9 |
Driver's activity control function |
4.2.9.3.1 |
|
Recording of supervision data on-board the train |
4.2.3.5.2 |
Recording device |
4.2.9.6 |
|
Managing an emergency situation |
4.2.3.7 |
Lifting diagram and instructions |
4.2.12.5 |
|
Rescue related descriptions |
4.2.12.6 |
||
|
Route Compatibility and Train composition |
4.2.2.5 |
Operating documentation |
4.2.12.4 |
|
Minimum elements relevant to professional qualification for the tasks associated with ‘accompanying trains’ |
Appendix F |
||
|
Sanding |
Appendix B |
Rolling stock characteristics for compatibility with train detection system based on track circuits — Isolating emissions |
4.2.3.3.1.1 |
|
Parameters for the vehicle and train compatibility over the route intended for operation |
Appendix D1 |
Route compatibility checks before the use of authorised vehicles |
4.9 |
4.3.3.2.
|
Reference this Regulation |
|
Reference WAG TSI |
|
|
Parameter |
Point |
Parameter |
Point |
|
Rear end |
4.2.2.1.3 |
Attachment devices for rear-end signal |
4.2.6.3 |
|
Freight trains |
4.2.2.1.3.2 |
Rear-end signal |
Appendix E |
|
Route Compatibility and Train composition |
4.2.2.5 |
Gauging |
4.2.3.1 |
|
Route Compatibility and Train composition |
4.2.2.5 |
Compatibility with load carrying capacity of lines |
4.2.3. 2 |
|
Contingency arrangements |
4.2.3.6.3 |
Strength of unit — Lifting and jacking |
4.2.2.2 |
|
Train braking |
4.2.2.6 |
Brake |
4.2.4 |
|
Parameters for the vehicle and train compatibility over the route intended for operation |
Appendix D1 |
Route compatibility checks before the use of authorised vehicles |
4.9 |
4.3.4. Interfaces with the Energy TSI (ENE TSI)
|
Reference this Regulation |
|
Reference ENE TSI |
|
|
Parameter |
Point |
Parameter |
Point |
|
Route Compatibility and Train composition |
4.2.2.5 |
Maximum train current |
4.2.4.1 |
|
Preparation of the Route Book |
4.2.1.2.2.1 |
||
|
Route Compatibility and Train composition |
4.2.2.5 |
Separation sections: |
|
|
Preparation of the Route Book |
4.2.1.2.2.1 |
Phase |
4.2.15 |
|
System |
4.2.16 |
||
|
Parameters for the vehicle and train compatibility over the route intended for operation |
Appendix D1 |
Route compatibility checks before the use of authorised vehicles |
7.3.5 |
4.3.5. Interfaces with the Safety in Railway Tunnels TSI (SRT TSI)
|
Reference this Regulation |
|
Reference SRT TSI |
|
|
Parameter |
Point |
Parameter |
Point |
|
Ensuring that the train is in running order |
4.2.2.7 |
Emergency rule |
4.4.1 |
|
Train departure |
4.2.3.3 |
||
|
Degraded operation |
4.2.3.6 |
||
|
Managing an emergency situation |
4.2.3.7 |
Tunnels emergency plan |
4.4.2 |
|
Exercises |
4.4.3 |
||
|
Provision of on-train safety and emergency information to passengers |
4.4.5 |
||
|
Professional competence |
4.6.1 |
Tunnel specific competence of the train crew and other staff |
4.6.1 |
4.3.6. Interfaces with the Noise TSI (NOI TSI)
|
Reference this Regulation |
|
Reference NOI TSI |
|
|
Parameter |
Point |
Parameter |
Point |
|
Route compatibility and train composition |
4.2.2.5 |
Additional provisions for the application of this TSI to existing wagons |
7.2.2 |
|
Train planning |
4.2.3.1 |
Quieter routes |
Appendix D |
|
Contingency arrangements |
4.2.3.6.3 |
Specific rules for the operation of wagons on quieter routes in case of degraded operation |
4.4.1 |
4.3.7. Interfaces with the Regulation (EU) No 1300/2014 (12) , Person with Reduced Mobility TSI (PRM TSI)
|
Reference this Regulation |
|
Reference PRM TSI |
|
|
Parameter |
Point |
Parameter |
Point |
|
Professional Competence |
4.6.1 |
Infrastructure subsystem |
4.4.1 |
|
Minimum elements relevant to professional qualification for the tasks associated with ‘accompanying trains’ |
Appendix F |
||
|
Professional Competence |
4.6.1 |
Rolling stock subsystem |
4.4.2 |
|
Minimum elements relevant to professional qualification for the tasks associated with ‘accompanying trains’ |
Appendix F |
||
|
Route Compatibility and Train composition |
4.2.2.5 |
Rolling stock subsystem |
4.4.2 |
4.4. Operating rules
4.4.1. European Union railway system operational principles and rules
Operational principles and rules to be applied throughout the European Union railway system are specified in Appendices A (ERTMS operational principles and rules) and B (common operational principles and rules).
4.4.2. National rules
National rules are not compatible with this TSI, except for Appendix I which lists the areas where no common operational principles and rules exist and which may continue to be subject to national rules. In accordance with Decision (EU) 2017/1474 the Agency in cooperation with the Member State(s) concerned shall cooperate to assess the list of open points with a view to:
|
(a) |
further harmonise the requirements of this Regulation through detailed provisions or through acceptable means of compliance, or |
|
(b) |
facilitate the integration of such national rules into the safety management systems of the railway undertakings and the infrastructure managers, or |
|
(c) |
confirm the need for national rules. |
4.4.3. Acceptable Means of Compliance
The Agency may by means of technical opinion define acceptable means of compliance, which shall be presumed to ensure compliance with specific requirements of this Regulation, and ensure safety in accordance with Directive (EU) 2016/798.
The Commission, the Member States or the affected stakeholders may request the Agency to define acceptable means of compliance in accordance with Article 10 of Regulation (EU) 2016/796 of the European Parliament and of the Council of 11 May 2016 (13). The Agency shall consult Member States and affected stakeholders and present the technical opinion to the committee referred to in Article 51 of Directive (EU) 2016/797 before its adoption.
At the latest by 16 June 2021 the Agency shall deliver technical opinions defining acceptable means of compliance covering at least each of the following areas:
|
— |
Safety of load (see 4.2.2.4.1); |
|
— |
Safety of passengers (see 4.2.2.4.2); |
|
— |
Checks and tests before departure, including brakes and checks during operation (see 4.2.3.3.1) |
|
— |
Train departure (see 4.2.3.3) |
|
— |
Degraded operations (see 4.2.3.6). |
Before 15 October 2019, if Member States and affected stakeholders believe a specific national rule shall be considered in the context of defining an acceptable means of compliance in the above areas, they shall notify details thereof to the Agency which shall proceed in line with the procedures referred to in point 4.4.3.
4.4.4. Transition from application of national rules to implementation of this Regulation
During the transition from the application of national rules to the implementation of this Regulation, railway undertakings and infrastructure managers shall review their safety management systems to ensure the continuation of safe operations. If necessary, they shall update their safety management systems.
In situation of deficiency, the procedure of Article 6 of Directive (EU) 2016/797 shall apply.
4.5. Maintenance rules
Not applicable
4.6. Professional competences
4.6.1. Professional competence
Staff of the railway undertaking and the infrastructure manager shall have attained appropriate professional competence to undertake all necessary safety-critical tasks in normal, degraded and emergency situations. Such competence comprises professional knowledge and the ability to put this knowledge into practice.
Minimum elements relevant to professional qualification for individual tasks may be found in Appendices F and G.
4.6.2. Language competence
4.6.2.1.
The infrastructure manager and the railway undertaking are required to ensure that their relevant staff are competent in the use of the communication protocols and principles set out in Appendix C.
Where the operating language used by the infrastructure manager differs from that habitually used by the railway undertaking's staff, such linguistic and communications training shall form a critical part of the railway undertaking's overall competence management system.
Railway undertaking staff whose duties require them to communicate with staff of the infrastructure manager in connection with safety-critical matters, whether in normal, degraded or emergency situations, shall have a sufficient level of knowledge in the operating language of the infrastructure manager.
4.6.2.2.
The level of knowledge in the infrastructure manager's operating language shall be sufficient for safety purposes.
|
(a) |
As a minimum this shall comprise of the driver being able to:
|
|
(b) |
Other members of the train crew whose duties require them to communicate with the infrastructure manager on safety-critical matters, shall as a minimum, be able to send and understand information describing the train and its operational status. |
The level of knowledge for staff accompanying trains other than train drivers shall be at least level 2 as described in Appendix E.
4.6.3. Initial and ongoing assessment of staff
4.6.3.1.
Railway undertakings and infrastructure managers are required to define the assessment process for their staff in order to meet the requirements specified in Commission Delegated Regulation (EU) 2018/762 (14) or Commission Regulations (EU) No 1158/2010 (15) and (EU) No 1169/2010 (16).
4.6.3.2.
Railway undertakings and infrastructure managers shall undertake an analysis of training needs for their relevant staff and define a process for reviewing and updating their individual training needs in order to meet the requirements specified in Delegated Regulation (EU) 2018/762 or Regulations (EU) No 1158/2010 and (EU) No 1169/2010.
This analysis shall set out both scope and complexity and take into account the risks associated with the operation of trains, traction and rolling stock. The railway undertaking shall define the process by which knowledge of on board staff of the routes worked over is acquired and maintained. This process shall be:
|
— |
based upon the route information provided by the infrastructure manager; and |
|
— |
in accordance with the process described in point 4.2.1. |
For the tasks associated with ‘accompanying trains’ and ‘preparing trains’, the elements that shall be considered may be found in respectively the appendices F and G. As appropriate, these elements shall be put in place as part of the training for staff.
It is possible that due to the type of operation envisaged by a railway undertaking or the nature of the network being run by an infrastructure manager, some of the elements in the appendices F and G shall not be appropriate. The analysis of training needs shall document those not deemed appropriate and the reasons why.
4.6.4. Auxiliary staff
The railway undertaking shall make sure that the auxiliary staff (for example, catering and cleaning) not forming part of the train crew is, in addition to their basic instruction, trained to respond to the instructions of the fully trained members of the train crew.
4.7. Health and safety conditions
4.7.1. Introduction
Staff specified in point 4.2.1 as staff performing safety-critical tasks in accordance with point 2.1 shall have appropriate fitness to ensure that overall operational and safety standards are met.
Railway undertakings and infrastructure managers shall set up and document the process they put in place to meet the medical, psychological and health requirements for their staff within their safety management system.
Medical examinations as specified in point 4.7.2 and any associated decisions on the individual fitness of staff shall be conducted by a medical doctor.
Staff shall not perform safety-critical tasks whilst vigilance is impaired by substances such as alcohol, drugs or psychotropic medication. Therefore, the railway undertaking and the infrastructure manager shall have in place procedures to control the risk that staff attend for work under the influence of such substances, or consume such substances at work.
National rules of the Member State where a train service is operated apply with regard to defined limits of the above mentioned substances.
4.7.2. Medical examinations and psychological assessments
4.7.2.1.
4.7.2.1.1.
Medical examinations shall cover:
|
— |
General medical examination; |
|
— |
Examinations of sensory functions (vision, hearing, colour perception); |
|
— |
Urine or blood analysis for the detection of diabetes mellitus and other conditions as indicated by the clinical examination; |
|
— |
Screening for abuse of drugs. |
4.7.2.1.2.
The aim of the psychological assessment is to support the railway undertaking in the appointment and management of staff who have the cognitive, psychomotor, behavioural and personality capabilities to perform their roles safely.
In determining the content of the psychological assessment, as a minimum, the following criteria relevant to the requirements of each safety function shall be taken into account:
|
(a) |
Cognitive:
|
|
(b) |
Psychomotor:
|
|
(c) |
Behavioural and personality
|
If any of those elements is omitted, the respective decision shall be justified and documented by a psychologist.
Applicants shall demonstrate their psychological fitness by passing an examination conducted by, or under the supervision of — to be decided by the Member State — a psychologist or a medical doctor.
4.7.2.2.
4.7.2.2.1.
At least one systematic medical examination shall be performed:
|
— |
Every 5 years for staff aged up to 40; |
|
— |
Every 3 years for staff aged between 41 and 62; |
|
— |
Every year for staff aged over 62. |
Increased frequency of examination shall be set by the medical doctor if the state of health of the member of the staff requires so.
4.7.2.2.2.
If the worker complies with the criteria required at the examination, which is carried out before practising an occupation, the periodic specialised examinations shall include as a minimum:
|
— |
General medical examination; |
|
— |
Examination of sensory functions (vision, hearing, colour perception); |
|
— |
Urine or blood analysis for the detection of diabetes mellitus and other conditions as indicated by the clinical examination; |
|
— |
Screening for abuse of drugs where clinically indicated. |
4.7.2.2.3.
Besides the periodic medical examination, an additional specific medical examination and/or psychological assessment shall be performed where there is reasonable ground for doubting the medical or psychological fitness of a member of staff or reasonable suspicion of use of drugs or use of alcohol over the limits allowed. This would be the case especially after an incident or accident caused by human error on the part of the individual.
The railway undertaking and the infrastructure manager shall put systems in place to ensure that such additional examinations and assessments are undertaken as appropriate.
4.7.3. Medical requirements
4.7.3.1.
Staff shall not suffer from medical conditions or take medical treatment likely to cause:
|
— |
Sudden loss of consciousness; |
|
— |
Impairment of awareness or concentration; |
|
— |
Sudden incapacity; |
|
— |
Impairment of balance or coordination; |
|
— |
Significant limitation of mobility. |
The following vision and hearing requirements shall be met:
4.7.3.2.
|
— |
Aided or unaided distance visual acuity: 0,8 (right eye + left eye — measured separately); minimum of 0,3 for the worse eye; |
|
— |
Maximum corrective lenses: hypermetropia + 5/myopia – 8. The medical doctor may allow values outside this range in exceptional cases and after having sought the opinion of an eye specialist; |
|
— |
Intermediate and near vision: sufficient whether aided or unaided; |
|
— |
Contact lenses are allowed; |
|
— |
Normal colour vision: using a recognised test, such as the Ishihara, completed by another recognised test if required; |
|
— |
Vision field: normal (absence of any abnormality affecting the task to be performed); |
|
— |
Vision for both eyes: effective; |
|
— |
Binocular vision: effective; |
|
— |
Contrast sensitivity: good; |
|
— |
Absence of progressive eye disease; |
|
— |
Lens implants, keratotomies and keratectomies are allowed only on condition that they are checked on a yearly basis or according to a frequency set by the medical doctor. |
4.7.3.3.
Sufficient hearing confirmed with tone audiogram, that is:
|
— |
Hearing good enough to hold a phone conversation going and be able to hear alert tones and radio messages |
|
— |
The use of hearing aids is allowed. |
4.8. Additional information on infrastructure and vehicles
4.8.1. Infrastructure
The requirements for the rail infrastructure related data items with regard to the operation and traffic management subsystem, and which shall be made available to railway undertakings through RINF, are specified in Appendix D.
Until RINF is complete, the infrastructure manager shall provide this information through other means free of charge and as soon as reasonably possible and in any event within 15 days for the first submission unless the railway undertaking agrees a longer deadline.
The infrastructure manager shall inform the railway undertaking of the changes on the infrastructure related data through RINF whenever such information becomes available or through other means until RINF allows for such functionality. The infrastructure manager is responsible for the correctness of the data.
For emergency situations or real time information appropriate alternative means of communication of the infrastructure manager shall ensure immediate information to the railway undertaking.
4.8.2. Rolling stock
The following rolling stock related data items shall be available to infrastructure managers:
|
— |
whether the vehicle is constructed from materials which may be hazardous in case of accidents or fire (for example, asbestos); the keeper is responsible for the correctness of the data; |
|
— |
total length of the vehicle, including buffers if existing; the railway undertaking is responsible for the correctness of the data. |
5. INTEROPERABILITY CONSTITUENTS
5.1. Definition
Article 2.7 of Directive (EU) 2016/797 defines the ‘interoperability constituents’.
5.2. List of constituents
In respect to the operation and traffic management subsystem, there is no interoperability constituent.
6. ASSESSMENT OF CONFORMITY AND/OR SUITABILITY FOR USE OF THE CONSTITUENTS AND VERIFICATION OF THE SUBSYSTEM
6.1. Interoperability constituents
As this Regulation does not yet specify any interoperability constituents, no assessment arrangements are discussed.
6.2. Operation and traffic management subsystem
6.2.1. Principles
The operation and traffic management subsystem is a functional subsystem according to Annex II to Directive (EU) 2016/797.
In accordance with Articles 9 and 10 of Directive (EU) 2016/798, railway undertakings and infrastructure managers shall demonstrate compliance with the requirements of this Regulation within their safety management system when applying for any new or amended safety certificate or safety authorisation.
The common safety methods on conformity assessment and the common safety methods on safety management system require national safety authorities to set up an inspection regime to supervise and monitor the compliance with the safety management system including all TSIs. It should be noted that none of the elements contained within this Regulation require separate assessment by a Notified Body.
Requirements in this Regulation that refer to structural subsystems and listed in the interfaces (point 4.3) are assessed under the relevant structural TSIs.
7. IMPLEMENTATION
7.1. Principles
In accordance with Article 9 of Directive (EU) 2016/798, railway undertakings and infrastructure managers shall ensure compliance with this Regulation under their SMS.
7.2. Specific cases
7.2.1. Introduction
The following special provisions are permitted in the specific cases below.
These specific cases belong to two categories:
|
(a) |
the provisions apply either permanently (case ‘P’), or temporarily (case ‘T’). |
|
(b) |
In temporary cases Member States shall conform with the relevant subsystem by 2024 (case ‘T1’). |
7.2.2. List of specific cases
7.2.2.1.
For the implementation of point 4.2.2.1.3.2, trains which are operated solely on the 1 520 mm gauge network of Estonia, Latvia, Lithuania, Poland, Hungary and Slovakia may use the following train rear end signal.
The reflective disc shall have a diameter of 185 mm with a red circle diameter of 140 mm.
7.2.2.2.
For the implementation of point 4.2.2.1.3.2, trains which are operated solely on the 1 600 mm track gauge system network of Ireland and Northern Ireland shall use 2 steady red lights as train rear end signal.
7.2.2.3.
For the implementation of point 4.2.3.2.1, Ireland and United Kingdom are using alphanumeric number in the existing systems. The MS set out the requirements and time schedule for the transition from alphanumeric train running numbers to numeric train running numbers in the target system.
7.2.2.4.
For the implementation of point 4.2.2.1.3.2 and the implementation of common operational rule 5 of Appendix B, Finland is not using any rear end signal device for freight trains. The means to indicate the train rear end signal for freight trains as stated in point 4.2.2.1.3.2 are also accepted in Finland.
(1) Directive 2007/59/EC of the European Parliament and of the Council of 23 October 2007 on the certification of train drivers operating locomotives and trains on the railway system in the Community (OJ L 315, 3.12.2007, p. 51).
(2) Directive 2012/34/EU of the European Parliament and of the Council of 21 November 2012 establishing a single European railway area (OJ L 343, 14.12.2012, p. 32).
(3) Commission Implementing Regulation (EU) 2019/777 of 16 May 2019 on the common specifications for the register of railway infrastructure and repealing Implementing Decision 2014/880/EU (See page 312 of this Official Journal).
(4) Commission Regulation (EU) No 1302/2014 of 18 November 2014 concerning a technical specification for interoperability relating to the ‘rolling stock — locomotives and passenger rolling stock’ subsystem of the rail system in the European Union (OJ L 356, 12.12.2014, p. 228).
(5) Regulation (EU) No 913/2010 of the European Parliament and of the Council of 22 September 2010 concerning a European rail network for competitive freight (OJ L 276, 20.10.2010, p. 22).
(6) Commission Implementing Regulation (EU) 2018/545 of 4 April 2018 establishing practical arrangements for the railway vehicle authorisation and railway vehicle type authorisation process pursuant to Directive (EU) 2016/797 of the European Parliament and of the Council (OJ L 90, 6.4.2018, p. 66).
(7) Commission Regulation (EU) 2016/919 of 27 May 2016 on the technical specification for interoperability relating to the ‘control-command and signalling’ subsystems of the rail system in the European Union (OJ L 158, 15.6.2016, p. 1).
(8) Commission Regulation (EU) No 1305/2014 of 11 December 2014 on the technical specification for interoperability relating to the telematics applications for freight subsystem of the rail system in the European Union and repealing the Regulation (EC) No 62/2006 (OJ L 356, 12.12.2014, p. 438).
(9) Commission Regulation (EU) No 454/2011 of 5 May 2011 on the technical specification for interoperability relating to the subsystem ‘telematics applications for passenger services’ of the trans-European rail system (OJ L 123, 12.5.2011, p. 11).
(10) Directive 2008/68/EC of the European Parliament and of the Council of 24 September 2008 on the inland transport of dangerous goods (OJ L 260, 30.9.2008, p. 13).
(11) Directive 2010/35/EU of the European Parliament and of the Council of 16 June 2010 on transportable pressure equipment and repealing Council Directives 76/767/EEC, 84/525/EEC, 84/526/EEC, 84/527/EEC and 1999/36/EC (OJ L 165, 30.6.2010, p. 1).
(12) Commission Regulation (EU) No 1300/2014 of 18 November 2014 on the technical specifications for interoperability relating to accessibility of the Union's rail system for persons with disabilities and persons with reduced mobility (OJ L 356, 12.12.2014, p. 110).
(13) Regulation (EU) 2016/796 of the European Parliament and of the Council of 11 May 2016 on the European Union Agency for Railways and repealing Regulation (EC) No 881/2004 (OJ L 138, 26.5.2016, p. 1).
(14) Commission Delegated Regulation (EU) 2018/762 of 8 March 2018 establishing common safety methods on safety management system requirements pursuant to Directive (EU) 2016/798 of the European Parliament and of the Council and repealing Commission Regulations (EU) No 1158/2010 and (EU) No 1169/2010 (OJ L 129, 25.5.2018, p. 26).
(15) Commission Regulation (EU) No 1158/2010 of 9 December 2010 on a common safety method for assessing conformity with the requirements for obtaining railway safety certificates (OJ L 326, 10.12.2010, p. 11).
(16) Commission Regulation (EU) No 1169/2010 of 10 December 2010 on a common safety method for assessing conformity with the requirements for obtaining a railway safety authorization (OJ L 327, 11.12.2010, p. 13).
Appendix B
Common operational principles and rules
B1. Fundamental operational principles
1. The method of authorising a train movement shall maintain a safe interval between trains.
2. A train shall only operate over a portion of line if the train composition is compatible with the infrastructure.
3. Before a train begins or continues its journey, it shall be ensured that passengers, staff and goods are carried safely.
4. Before a train is allowed to start or continue its movement, it shall have an authority to move and all necessary information to define the conditions of that authority.
5. A train shall be prevented from proceeding onto a portion of line if it is known or suspected that it would not be safe for the train to pass until measures have been taken to allow the train to continue safely.
6. A train shall not continue to operate after it has been found to be unsafe in any respect, until measures have been taken to allow the train to continue safely.
B2. Common operational rules
In case of degraded operation, the contingency arrangements set out in point 4.2.3.6.3 shall also be considered.
1. SANDING
If the train is equipped with manually activated sanding equipment, the driver shall always be allowed to apply sand but shall avoid it wherever possible:
|
— |
in the area of points and crossings, |
|
— |
during braking at speeds less than 20 km/h, |
|
— |
when at standstill. |
The exceptions to this are:
|
— |
if there is a risk of SPAD (Signal Passed At Danger), or other serious incident and the application of sand would assist adhesion, |
|
— |
when starting away, |
|
— |
when required to test the sanding equipment on the traction unit. |
2. DEPARTURE OF THE TRAIN
At the initial station or after a scheduled stop the driver is allowed to depart when the following conditions are fulfilled:
|
— |
after the driver has received an authorisation for train movement; |
|
— |
after train service conditions are fulfilled; |
|
— |
when it is time to depart, except when allowed to start before the scheduled time. |
3. NO AUTHORISATION FOR TRAIN MOVEMENT AT THE EXPECTED TIME
If the driver has not received an authorisation for train movement at the expected time, and has no information as to the reason, the driver shall inform the signaller.
4. COMPLETE FAILURE OF FRONT END LIGHTS
If the driver is not able to display any front end light:
4.1. During good visibility
The driver shall inform the signaller about the failure. The train shall proceed at the maximum permitted speed to the nearest location where the front end light may be repaired/replaced or the affected vehicle replaced. When proceeding, the driver shall use the train audible warning device as necessary or as instructed by the signaller.
4.2. During darkness or poor visibility
The driver shall inform the signaller about the failure. As long as a portable front end light displaying a white light is fitted on the front of the train, the train shall proceed at the maximum allowable speed for that failure to the nearest location where the front end light may be repaired/replaced or the affected vehicle replaced.
If a portable front end light is not available, the train shall not proceed, unless formal instructions are given by the signaller to continue to the nearest suitable location to where the line may be cleared.
When proceeding, the driver shall use the train audible warning device as necessary or as instructed by the signaller.
5. COMPLETE FAILURE OF A REAR END SIGNAL
|
(1) |
If the signaller becomes aware of the complete failure of the train rear end signal, the signaller shall make arrangements to stop the train in an appropriate location and inform the driver. |
|
(2) |
The driver shall then check the completeness of the train and if necessary repair/replace the train rear end signal. |
|
(3) |
The driver shall report to the signaller that the train is ready to proceed. Otherwise, if the repair is not possible, the train may not proceed, unless special arrangements are made between signaller and driver. |
6. FAILURE OF THE AUDIBLE WARNING DEVICE OF A TRAIN
If the audible warning device fails, the driver shall inform the signaller about the failure. The train shall not exceed the permitted speed in the event of the failure of an audible warning device, and shall proceed to the nearest location where the audible warning device may be repaired or the affected vehicle replaced. The driver shall be prepared to stop before passing over any level crossing where the audible warning device is required to be sounded and then proceed over the level crossing only when it is safe to do so. If a multi-tone audible warning device is defective but at least one tone is functioning, the train may proceed normally.
7. FAILURE OF LEVEL CROSSING
7.1. Stopping trains passing over a defective level crossing
When a technical failure affecting safety of running trains over a level crossing has been detected and as long as the safe operation has not been restored, the normal passing of trains over the level crossing shall be prevented.
7.2. Passing trains over the defective level crossing (if authorised)
|
(1) |
Where the nature of the failure permits train movements to continue, the driver of each train shall be authorised to continue and to pass over the level crossing. |
|
(2) |
After being instructed to pass over the level crossing with a failure, the driver shall pass the level crossing as instructed. If the level crossing becomes obstructed the driver shall take all possible measures necessary to stop. |
|
(3) |
When approaching the level crossing, the driver shall use the audible warning device when necessary or when formal instructions have been given by the signaller. If the level crossing is clear, the driver shall proceed and accelerate the train as soon as the front of the train has passed clear the level crossing. |
8. FAILURE OF VOICE RADIO COMMUNICATION
8.1. Failure of train radio detected during train preparation
In case of on board radio failure a train shall not be permitted to start a service on lines where a radio is required.
8.2. Failure of voice radio communication when the train has entered service
All failure types
If the driver becomes aware that the primary voice radio communication is failed, the driver shall inform the signaller as soon as practicable using any available means.
The driver shall then apply the instructions by the signaller concerning the further movement of the train.
On-board Failure
A train with a failed voice radio communication may:
|
— |
continue its service if another means of communication is provided between the train driver and the signaller; or |
|
— |
proceed to the nearest location where the radio may be repaired or the affected vehicle replaced if another means of voice communication is not provided between the driver and the signaller. |
9. RUNNING ON SIGHT
When a driver has to run on sight, the driver shall:
|
— |
Proceed with caution, controlling the speed having regard to the visibility of the line ahead, so that it is possible within the free visible part to stop short of any vehicle, stop aspect or obstacle on the infrastructure; and |
|
— |
Not exceed the maximum speed for running on sight. |
This does not apply to unexpected obstacle entering the track zone within the stopping distance.
10. ASSISTANCE TO A FAILED TRAIN
|
(1) |
If a train is stopped by failure, the driver shall immediately inform the signaller about the failure and the circumstances of the failure. |
|
(2) |
When an assisting train is needed, the driver and signaller shall agree at least all of the following:
After the driver has asked for assistance, the train shall not be moved even if the defect is rectified until:
|
|
(3) |
The signaller shall not allow the assisting train to enter the section occupied by the failed train unless confirmation has been received that the failed train shall not be moved. When the assisting train is ready to enter the section occupied by the failed train, the signaller shall inform the driver of the assisting train at least the following:
|
|
(4) |
The driver of the combined train shall make sure that:
|
|
(5) |
When the combined train is ready to continue, the driver in control shall contact the signaller and inform the signaller of any restrictions and move the train in accordance with any instructions given by the signaller. |
11. AUTHORISATION TO PASS A SIGNAL SHOWING A STOP ASPECT/INDICATION
The driver of the train concerned shall have authorisation to pass a signal showing stop aspect/indication.
When giving authorisation, the signaller shall give the driver any instructions concerning the movement.
The driver shall apply the instructions and shall not exceed any speed restriction, where one is imposed, until reaching the location where the normal operation may be resumed.
12. ANOMALIES IN LINESIDE SIGNALLING
If any of the following anomalies are observed:
|
— |
no signal aspect is shown where there should be one; |
|
— |
an irregular aspect is shown at the signal; |
|
— |
an irregular signal aspect sequence is received on the approach to the signal; |
|
— |
the aspect of the signal is not clearly visible. |
The driver shall act according to the most restrictive aspect that could be presented by the signal.
In all cases the driver shall report to the signaller the abnormal signalling aspect when observed.
13. EMERGENCY CALL
When receiving an emergency call the driver shall assume that there is a dangerous situation and perform all actions necessary in order to avoid or reduce the effect of this situation.
In addition, the driver shall:
|
— |
immediately reduce the speed of the train to the appropriate speed for running on sight; and |
|
— |
run on sight unless otherwise instructed by the signaller; and |
|
— |
obey the instructions given by the signaller. |
Drivers that have been ordered to stop shall not restart without authorisation from the signaller. Other drivers shall continue running on sight until the signaller informs them that running on sight is no longer necessary.
14. IMMEDIATE ACTIONS TO PREVENT DANGER TO TRAINS
|
(1) |
Any railway undertaking/infrastructure manager staff who become aware of a danger to trains shall take immediate action to stop any trains which may be affected and take any other action as necessary to avoid harm or loss. |
|
(2) |
Any driver made aware of a danger to their train shall stop and alert the signaller immediately to the danger. |
15. FAILURE OF ON-BOARD EQUIPMENT
The railway undertaking shall determine the cases in which a failure of an on-board equipment affects the running of the train.
The railway undertaking shall give the necessary information to the driver and/or train crew of what action to take in the case of on-board failures that affect the running of the train.
If the driver becomes aware of a failure of any on-board equipment that affects the running of the train, the driver shall:
|
— |
Inform the signaller of the situation and the restrictions on the train should the train be allowed to continue its mission, |
|
— |
The driver shall not commence or recommence the mission until permission to do so has been granted by the signaller, |
|
— |
If the signaller gives permission for the train to start or continue its mission then the driver shall proceed in accordance with the restrictions placed upon the train, |
If the signaller does not give permission for the train to commence or recommence its mission then the driver shall follow the instructions given by the signaller.
16. END OF AUTHORITY PASSED WITHOUT PERMISSION
|
— |
If the driver becomes aware that the train has passed an end of authority without permission, the driver shall stop the train immediately. |
|
— |
If the train is stopped by ATP/TPS, the driver shall take action to support the emergency brake. |
|
— |
The driver shall inform the signaller. |
|
— |
If the signaller becomes aware that a train has passed an end of authority without permission, then the signaller shall take any necessary action to stop the train immediately. |
|
— |
The driver and signaller shall take any necessary action to protect all movements. |
When the train is able to continue, the driver shall inform the signaller. The signaller shall set or check the route for the train to continue its journey and issue all necessary instructions
17. FAILURE OF TRACKSIDE EQUIPMENT INCLUDING CATENARY
|
— |
The infrastructure manager shall determine whether the failure of trackside equipment (including catenary) affects the safe and/or effective operation of trains. |
|
— |
The infrastructure manager shall provide the necessary instructions to the driver of what action to take in the case of such a failure as referenced in this Regulation in point 4.2.1.2.2.3. |
|
— |
If the driver becomes aware of a failure of any trackside equipment (including catenary) that affects the safe and/or effective operation of trains, the driver shall inform the signaller of the situation as soon as possible and follow the instructions given by the signaller. |
Appendix C
Safety related communications methodology
C1. Oral communication
1. Scope and Purpose
This Appendix sets out the rules for safety-related communications, between train crew, mainly the train driver, and signaller, in particular to define its structure, methodology and content. Safety related communication has priority over all other communication.
2. Safety related communications
2.1. Communication structure
The transmission of safety-related messages shall be short and clear and, as far as possible, without abbreviation. In order to ensure a message is understood and the necessary action may be undertaken, whoever is giving the message shall cover at least the following points:
|
— |
indicate their exact location. |
|
— |
state the function they are carrying out and information on the action that is needed. |
Drivers shall identify themselves by the train running number and the location.
Signallers shall identify themselves by the control area or the location of the signal box.
2.2. Communication methodology
Whoever is giving the message shall:
|
— |
check that the message is received and repeated back as required. As emergency messages are intended to give urgent operational instructions that are directly linked with the safety of the railway, the repetition of these messages may be omitted. |
|
— |
if necessary, correct a mistake that has been made in the message. |
|
— |
if necessary, let the person know how they may be contacted. |
For communication between signallers and drivers it is the signallers' responsibility to ensure that they are talking to the driver within their control area. This is critical when communication is taking place in areas where communications boundaries overlap. This principle shall apply even after an interruption during transmission.
2.3. Communication content
The following messages shall be used for identification by the different parties:
|
— |
by the signaller:
|
|
— |
by the driver: this is train … [running number] at … [location]
|
Terminology shall be used in the communication procedure by all the parties:
|
Situation |
Terminology |
|
Term transferring the opportunity to speak to the opposite party |
‘Over’ |
|
Term confirming that the sent message has been received |
‘Received’ |
|
Term used to have the message repeated in the event of poor reception or misunderstanding |
‘Say again’ |
|
Term used to ascertain whether a read-back message exactly matches the sent message |
‘Correct’ |
|
Term used to indicate that a read-back message does not match the sent message |
‘Error (+ I say again)’ |
|
Term used to keep the other party waiting when there is a temporary break in the communication and the connection is not broken |
‘Wait’ |
|
Term used to tell the other party that the communication might be broken but should be resumed later on |
‘I call again’ |
|
Term used to indicate that the message has ended |
‘Out’ |
Standard terminology shall be used in the communication procedure by all the parties without translation:
|
Situation |
Standard terminology |
|
Term used to indicate that there is an emergency situation |
‘Mayday, mayday, mayday’ |
This term shall not be translated and does not have to be used in case emergency call functionality is available on the train (e.g. GSM-R).
3. Communication rules
In order that safety related communication is correctly understood, whatever the communication mean is used, the following rules shall be used:
3.1. International Phonetic Alphabet
The International Phonetic Alphabet shall be used:
|
— |
to identify letters of the alphabet; |
|
— |
to spell words and location names that are difficult to say, or may be misunderstood; |
|
— |
when quoting the identity of signals or points. |
|
|
|
|
|
3.2. Numbers
The Numbers shall be spoken digit by digit:
|
C2. Operational instructions
1. Introduction
Railway undertakings and infrastructure managers shall use European instructions in the communication procedure in the following cases:
|
(1) |
Permission to pass an End of Authority — signal showing a stop aspect/stop indication; |
|
(2) |
Permission to proceed after a trip (ETCS); |
|
(3) |
Obligation to remain at standstill, obligation to carry out end of mission (ETCS); |
|
(4) |
Revocation of an operational instruction; |
|
(5) |
Obligation to run under restrictions; |
|
(6) |
Obligation to run on sight; |
|
(7) |
Permission to start in Staff Responsible (ETCS) after preparing a movement; |
|
(8) |
Permission to pass a defective level crossing; |
|
(9) |
Obligation to run with power supply restrictions; |
|
(10-20) |
RESERVED |
The numbers 1 to 20 are reserved for European instructions, numbers 1-5 and 7 are mandatory for ETCS. If an operational instruction related to class B system requires more information than the European instructions, the national instruction may be used instead. In such case, the infrastructure manager may define these requirements in its national instructions. If numbered, the national instructions defined by the individual infrastructure managers shall start from 21 onwards. The national instructions shall contain at least the same content of that for a European instruction.
2. Content
An operational instruction shall state the following as a minimum:
|
— |
from where it was issued (location of signaller), |
|
— |
at what date it was issued (not for verbal instruction), |
|
— |
to which train/shunting movement it refers, |
|
— |
clear, precise, unambiguous instructions, |
|
— |
unique identification provided by the signaller. |
In addition, depending on the circumstances, an operational instruction might also state:
|
— |
at what time it was issued, |
|
— |
where that train/shunting movement is located, at which location it applies, |
|
— |
ID of train driver; |
|
— |
ID of issuer; |
|
— |
verification (signature or electronic confirmation) that the instruction has been received. |
Any operational instruction that has been issued to be written down may only be revoked by a European instruction no4 explicitly referring to the unique identification of the instruction to be revoked.
3. Delivery of the operational instruction
A European instruction includes information delivered electronically, verbally, physically on paper or as verbal instructions to be written down by the train driver or by other safe methods of communication with the same level of information.
In principle when it is necessary for an operational instruction to be written down by the train driver, the train shall be at standstill. The railway undertaking and the concerned infrastructure manager may jointly undertake a risk assessment which could, as a result, define the conditions under which it is safe to deviate from this principle.
An operational instruction shall be delivered as close as practicable to the affected area.
An operational instruction takes precedence over the related indications provided by trackside signals and/or the DMI. When a permitted speed or a release speed lower than the maximum speed prescribed in the operational instruction is applicable, the lowest speed shall be applied.
An operational instruction shall only be issued by the signaller when the train running number has been identified and, if necessary, the location of the train/shunting movement. Before applying the operational instruction, the train driver shall check that this operational instruction refers to her/his train/shunting movement and her/his current or identified location.
4. Awareness of the operational instruction
The railway undertaking has to define a procedure to ensure that the train driver is aware of an operational instruction until the train has reached the location where it has to be processed.
When the operational instruction does not need to be performed immediately after its delivery, it shall be possible for the train driver to retrieve the operational instruction.
5. Monitoring of processed operational instruction
As part of the compliance with Regulation (EU) 2018/762 and Directive (EU) 2016/798, the infrastructure manager and railway undertaking shall monitor the processes of delivery and use of the operational instructions.
6. European instructions
Each field of information contained in a European instruction shall be given its own identifier.
While the content and the identifiers shall be used, the format itself is indicative.
If a specific field is not to be used in a Member State or on the network of an infrastructure manager, there is no obligation to display this field in the European instruction and no field shall be added.
7. Communication of an operational instruction
Terminology shall be used in the communication procedure by all the parties:
|
Situation |
Terminology |
|
Cancelling an operational instruction |
‘Cancel procedure’ |
|
If the message is then subsequently to be resumed, the procedure shall be repeated from the start |
‘Error during transmission’ |
|
When a transmission error is discovered by the sender, the sender shall request cancellation |
‘Error (+ prepare new form)’ Or ‘Error (+ I say again)’ |
|
Error during read back |
‘Error (+ I say again)’ |
|
Misunderstanding: if one of the parties does not fully understand a message, the message shall be repeated |
‘Say again (+ speak slowly)’ |
8. Book of Forms
The infrastructure manager is responsible for drawing up the Book of Forms and the forms themselves in its operating language.
All the forms to be used shall be assembled in a document or a computer medium called the Book of Forms.
This Book of Forms shall be used by both the driver and the staff authorising the movement of trains. The Book used by the driver and the Book used by the staff authorising the movement of trains shall be structured and numbered in the same way.
The Book of Forms shall comprise two parts.
The first part contains at least the following items:
|
— |
an index of operational instruction Forms; |
|
— |
a list of situations to which each form applies; |
|
— |
the table containing the international phonetic alphabet. |
The second part contains the forms themselves. These shall be collected by the railway undertaking and given to the driver.
9. Glossary of Railway Terminology
The railway undertaking shall produce a glossary of railway terminology for each network over which its trains operate. It shall supply the terms in regular use in the language chosen by the railway undertaking and in the ‘operating’ language of the infrastructure manager(s) whose infrastructure the railway undertaking operates on.
Appendix D
Route compatibility and Route Book
D1 Parameters for the vehicle and train compatibility over the route intended for operation
Note:
|
1. |
Following the requirements of 4.2.2.5.1, the railway undertaking may cover route compatibility checks of certain parameters during earlier stages. |
|
2. |
All parameters must be checked at vehicle level: this is indicated by a ‘X’ in the column ‘Vehicle level’. Some parameters needs to be checked when the train composition changes, as defined in the section 4.2.2.5; those parameters are indicated with a ‘X’ under the column ‘Train level’. |
|
3. |
With a view to avoid duplication of testing, in relation to parameters ‘Traffic loads and load carrying capacity of infrastructure’ and ‘Train detection systems’, the infrastructure managers shall provide through RINF the list of vehicle types or vehicles compatible with the route for which they have already verified route compatibility, where such information is available. |
|
Route compatibility check interface |
Vehicle information (either from ERATV, the technical file, or any other appropriate means of information) |
Route information available in Register of Infrastructure (RINF) or provided by Infrastructure manager until RINF is complete |
Vehicle level |
Train level |
Procedure to check the vehicle and train compatibility over the route intended for operation |
||||||||||||||||||||||||
|
Traffic loads and load carrying capacity of infrastructure |
Static axle loads and design and operational masses in the following load cases:
Maximum design speed; Vehicle length; The position of the axles along the unit (axle spacing). Static compatibility check for Wagons: Permissible payload for different line categories according to WAG TSI. |
|
x |
x |
The static compatibility checks for vehicles and, when necessary in accordance with the information provided by the infrastructure manager, the dynamic compatibility checks for trains shall be performed according to the procedure(s) or relevant information provided by the infrastructure manager through RINF under the parameter 1.1.1.1.2.4.4. For freight wagons: The static compatibility check is performed according to the following sections of EN 15528:2015: 4 to 7, Annex A, Annex D or, for the United Kingdom of Great Britain and Northern Ireland networks, relevant national rules in accordance with 4.2.7.4 (4) of Commission Regulation (EU) No 1299/2014 (1). |
||||||||||||||||||||||||
|
Gauging |
Vehicle gauge:
|
|
X |
X |
Comparison of the declared reference profiles between Vehicle/Train and the intended route. For the specific cases referred to in TSI 1302/2014 section 7.3.2.2 and TSI 1299/2014 sections 7.7.17.2 and 7.7.17.9 a specific procedure for route compatibility check can be applied. For such purpose, the Infrastructure Manager shall make available the relevant information. The infrastructure manager shall identify particular points which deviate from the declared reference profile in RINF parameters: 1.1.1.1.3.1.1 and 1.2.1.0.3.4. For these cases, RINF shall be updated accordingly (parameters: 1.1.1.1.3.1.2, 1.1.1.1.3.1.3). Note: Additional discussion between Infrastructure Manager and Railway Undertaking might be needed for checking these specific points. |
||||||||||||||||||||||||
|
Vertical radius |
Minimum vertical:
|
|
X |
|
Comparison of the declared minimum radius of vertical curve between vehicle and the intended route. |
||||||||||||||||||||||||
|
Train detection systems |
Type of train detection systems for which the vehicle has been designed and assessed |
Specific to the French network:
|
X |
|
Comparison of the declared type of train detection system(s) between Vehicle and the intended route. Note: At vehicle authorisation, based on TSIs and national rules, the technical compatibility between the Vehicle and all train detection system(s) of the network(s) in the area of use is verified. In duly-justified cases (e.g. problems of non-detection of the vehicle occurring during operation), tests and/or checks could be done after vehicle authorisation, involving Railway Undertaking and Infrastructure Manager. |
||||||||||||||||||||||||
|
Hot axle box detection |
Axle bearing condition monitoring (hot axles box detection) |
Specific to the French, Italian and Swedish networks:
|
X |
|
For existing non-TSI compliant vehicle: Comparison of the declared compliance to track side HABD between vehicle and the intended route, when the network(s) of the area of use is composed of more than one ‘type’ of track side HABD. If the network(s) of the area of use is composed by only one type of trackside hot axle box detector, no route compatibility check is needed. Note: For TSI compliant vehicle: Compatibility with tracksides for network(s) of an area of use is verified at authorisation phase. Any specificity of the network has to be covered by a specific case. |
||||||||||||||||||||||||
|
Running characteristics |
Combination(s) of maximum speed and maximum cant deficiency to which the vehicle was authorised (operational envelope that the vehicle has been assessed for); Rail inclination. |
|
X |
|
Comparison of the combination of maximum speed, maximum cant deficiency and rail inclination(s), to which the Vehicle is assessed, with the cant deficiency, speed and rail inclination(s) declared in RINF or information provided by Infrastructure Manager. In case vehicle characteristics don't match infrastructure characteristics and the compatibility between the vehicle and the route might be compromised, the Infrastructure Manager shall provide the exact combination of speed and cant deficiency for the specific points in which the compatibility might be compromised within one month, free of charge and in an electronic format. Note: The output of the check should be taken into account by the Railway Undertaking for the route book preparation. Operational conditions might be imposed as a result of this check (e.g. speed restriction for a section of line). |
||||||||||||||||||||||||
|
Wheelset |
Wheel set gauge |
|
X |
|
Comparison of the wheelset gauge with track gauge of the intended route. |
||||||||||||||||||||||||
|
Wheelset |
Minimum in-service wheel diameter |
|
X |
|
Comparison of the minimum wheel diameter between Vehicle and the intended route. |
||||||||||||||||||||||||
|
Wheelset |
Type of changeover facilities to which the vehicle is designed for |
|
X |
|
Comparison of the type(s) of changeover facilities to which the vehicle is designed for with the type(s) of track gauge changeover facilities of the intended route. |
||||||||||||||||||||||||
|
Minimum curve |
Minimum horizontal curve radius capability |
|
X |
X |
Comparison of the minimum horizontal curve radius between vehicle and the intended route. |
||||||||||||||||||||||||
|
Braking |
Emergency braking and maximum service brake: Stopping distance, Maximum deceleration, for the load condition ‘design mass under normal payload’ at the design maximum speed. For general operation (*1), in addition to the above data: brake weight percentage (lambda) |
If yes:
|
X |
X |
For pre-defined formation (as referred in section 2.2.1 of TSI 1302/2014): Comparison of the declared stopping distance and maximum train deceleration between Rolling Stock and the intended route for each load condition per design maximum speed. For general operation (*1) : No specific suggested procedure, to be covered by Railway Undertaking safety management system. |
||||||||||||||||||||||||
|
Braking |
Thermal capacity:
|
|
X |
|
Comparison of the vehicle reference case with the intended route characteristics. Note: RINF or information provided by Infrastructure Manager, indicates location of change in km, gradient length can be calculated by extracting data. |
||||||||||||||||||||||||
|
Braking |
Maximum gradient on which the unit is kept stationary by the parking brake alone (if the vehicle is fitted with it) |
|
X |
X |
Comparison of the declared maximum gradient profile between vehicle and the intended route. Note: The output of the comparison should be taken into account by the Safety Management System of the Railway Undertaking (e.g. use of additional means) |
||||||||||||||||||||||||
|
Magnetic track brake |
Possibility of preventing the use of the magnetic brake (only if fitted with magnetic brake) |
|
X |
|
Verification if the use of magnetic track brake is allowed in the intended route. Notes: Where magnetic brake is allowed, the infrastructure manager shall provide the conditions of its use. The output of the check should be taken into account by the Safety Management System of the Railway Undertaking (e.g. preventing the use of magnetic track brake in the section of line). |
||||||||||||||||||||||||
|
Eddy current track brake |
Possibility of preventing the use of the eddy current brake (only if fitted with eddy current brake) |
|
X |
|
Verification if the use of Eddy current track brake is allowed in the intended route. Notes: Where Eddy current track brake is allowed, the infrastructure manager shall provide the conditions of its use. The output of the check should be taken into account by the Safety Management System of the Railway Undertaking (e.g. preventing the use of eddy current track brake in the section of line). |
||||||||||||||||||||||||
|
Weather conditions |
Temperature range |
|
X |
|
Comparison of the declared temperature range between vehicle and the intended route. Note: The Safety Management System of the Railway Undertaking shall consider any possible restrictions when the compared temperature range diverge. |
||||||||||||||||||||||||
|
Weather conditions |
Snow, ice and hail condition |
|
X |
|
Comparison of the declared vehicle ‘Snow, ice and hail condition’ (e.g. S1) with and the ‘Existence of severe climatic conditions’ in the intended route. Note: The Safety Management System of the Railway Undertaking shall consider any possible restrictions. Discussion between Railway Undertaking and Infrastructure Manager to identify the possible restrictions. |
||||||||||||||||||||||||
|
Voltages and frequencies |
Energy supply system:
|
Specific cases defined in TSI ENE 1301/2014 section 7.4.2.2.1:
|
X |
|
Comparison of the declared voltage between vehicle and the intended route of the traction supply system (nominal voltage and frequency) and type of contact line system. |
||||||||||||||||||||||||
|
Regenerative brake |
Possibility of preventing the use of the regenerative brake (only if fitted with regenerative brake) |
|
X |
|
Verification if the use of the regenerative brake is allowed in the intended route or under specific conditions. Note: The output of the check should be taken into account by the Safety Management System of the Railway Undertaking (e.g. preventing the use of the regenerative brake in the section of line). |
||||||||||||||||||||||||
|
Current limitation |
Electric units equipped with power or current limitation function. |
|
X |
|
Verification if the intended route require that the vehicle is equipped with a current or power limitation. Note: TSI-compliant Rolling Stock with a maximum power higher than 2MW are equipped with current or power limitation. |
||||||||||||||||||||||||
|
Pantograph |
Maximum current at standstill per pantograph for each DC systems the vehicle is equipped for |
|
X |
|
Comparison of the declared maximum current at standstill per pantograph for each DC systems, between vehicle and the intended route. |
||||||||||||||||||||||||
|
Pantograph |
Height of interaction of pantograph with contact wires (over top of rail) for each energy supply system the vehicle is equipped for |
|
X |
|
Comparison of the height of interaction of pantograph with contact wires, for each energy supply system, between the vehicle and the intended route. |
||||||||||||||||||||||||
|
Pantograph |
Pantograph head for each energy supply system the vehicle is equipped for |
|
X |
|
Comparison of the pantograph head geometry (including insulated or nor not insulated horns for 1 950 mm), for each energy supply system, between the vehicle and the intended route. |
||||||||||||||||||||||||
|
Pantograph |
Material of pantograph contact strip the vehicle may be equipped with for each energy supply system the vehicle is equipped for |
|
X |
|
Comparison of material of pantograph contact strip, for each energy supply system, between the vehicle and the intended route. |
||||||||||||||||||||||||
|
Pantograph |
Mean contact force curve |
|
X |
|
Comparison of mean contact force between the vehicle and the intended route:
Note: A TSI-compliant vehicle is authorised with a mean contact force within limits values defined in EN 50367:2012 Table 6. |
||||||||||||||||||||||||
|
Pantograph |
Number of pantographs in contact with the overhead contact line (OCL) (for each energy supply system the vehicle is equipped for); Shortest distance between two pantographs in contact with the OCL (for each energy supply system the vehicle is equipped for; for single and, if applicable, multiple operation) (only if number of raised pantographs is more than 1); Type of OCL used for the test of current collection performance (for each energy supply system the vehicle is equipped for) (only if number of raised pantographs is more than 1). |
|
X |
X |
For pre-defined formation (as referred in section 2.2.1 of TSI 1302/2014): For each energy supply system:
For general operation (*1) : Covered by Railway Undertaking safety management system, considering the conditions imposed by the Infrastructure Manager, as in RINF or information provided by Infrastructure Manager. Note: The output of the comparison, concerning a minimum distance between two raised pantographs, might result in operational constraint on the vehicle to be considered by the safety management system of the Railway Undertaking (e.g. a two pantographs raised Electrical Multiple Units is forced to lower one pantograph). |
||||||||||||||||||||||||
|
Pantograph |
Automatic dropping device (ADD) fitted (for each energy supply system the vehicle is equipped for) |
|
X |
|
Verification if the intended route(s) require that the vehicle is equipped with an automatic dropping device. |
||||||||||||||||||||||||
|
Specific to the French network: Phase separation |
Distance between cab and pantograph for reverse or multiple unit |
|
|
x |
Verification if the positioning of signboards identifying the place where driver is allowed to raise pantographs or close circuit breakers again on the intended route(s) is compatible with the distance between cab and pantograph for reverse or multiple unit. Where there is incompatibility, the signboard is to be moved and be settled far enough to ensure drivers do not raise pantographs too early. |
||||||||||||||||||||||||
|
Tunnel |
Fire safety category |
|
X |
|
Comparison between fire safety category of vehicle and intended route. |
||||||||||||||||||||||||
|
train length |
Train length |
|
X |
X |
For fixed and pre-defined formation (as referred in section 2.2.1 of TSI 1302/2014): Comparison of unit(s) length (single or multiple operation) with the ‘siding and platform’ length(s) of the intended route. For general operation (*1) : Verification of the composed train length with the ‘siding and platform’ length(s) of the intended route. Note: The output of the check should be taken into account by the Railway Undertaking in its Safety Management System. Operational conditions might be imposed as a result of this check. |
||||||||||||||||||||||||
|
Platform height and access and egress |
Platform heights for which the vehicle is designed |
|
X |
|
Comparison of platform heights between the vehicle and the intended route. Note: The output of the check should be taken into account by the Railway Undertaking in its Safety Management System. Operational conditions might be imposed as a result of this check. |
||||||||||||||||||||||||
|
ETCS |
ETCS System Compatibility |
|
X |
|
Comparison ETCS System Compatibility value in RINF is included in the vehicle authorisation. |
||||||||||||||||||||||||
|
ETCS |
Train Integrity |
|
X |
X |
Comparison that vehicle/train is able to confirm the train integrity if required by trackside. |
||||||||||||||||||||||||
|
GSM-R |
Radio System Compatibility Voice |
|
X |
|
Comparison Radio System Compatibility voice value in RINF is included in the vehicle authorisation. |
||||||||||||||||||||||||
|
GSM-R |
Radio System Compatibility Data |
|
X |
|
Comparison Radio System Compatibility data value in RINF is included in the vehicle authorisation. |
||||||||||||||||||||||||
|
GSM-R |
SIM Card GSM-R Home Network |
|
X |
|
Comparison that the SIM Card GSM-R Home Network is in the list of GSM-R networks with roaming agreement for all sections in the route. This has to be performed for all SIM Cards in the vehicle (Voice and Data). |
||||||||||||||||||||||||
|
GSM-R |
Sim card support of group ID 555 |
|
X |
|
Check that the Group ID 555 is used trackside. If this is not configured on-board, alternative operational procedures should be prior established with the Infrastructure Manager. |
||||||||||||||||||||||||
|
Class B |
Class B train protection legacy system |
|
X |
|
Comparison of name and version of the Class B train protection legacy system. |
||||||||||||||||||||||||
|
Class B |
Class B radio legacy system |
|
X |
|
Comparison of name and version of the Class B radio legacy system. |
D2 Elements the infrastructure manager has to provide to the railway undertaking for the Route Book
|
Number |
Route Book |
|
1 |
Generic information regarding the infrastructure manager |
|
1.1 |
infrastructure manager's Name |
|
2 |
Maps and Diagrams |
|
2.1 |
Map: schematic overview including |
|
2.1.1 |
Line sections |
|
2.1.2 |
Principal locations (stations, yards, junctions, freight terminals) |
|
2.2 |
Line diagram |
|
2.2.1 |
Indication of running lines, loops catch/trap points and access to sidings |
|
2.2.2 |
Principal locations (stations, yards, junctions, freight terminals) and their position relative to the line |
|
2.2.3 |
Location, type and name of all fixed signals relevant for trains |
|
2.3 |
Station/Yard/Depot diagrams |
|
2.3.1 |
Name of location |
|
2.3.2 |
Type of location passenger terminal, freight terminal, yard, depot |
|
2.3.3 |
Location, type and identification of fixed signals that protect danger points |
|
2.3.4 |
Identification and plan of tracks, including switches |
|
2.3.5 |
Identification of platforms |
|
2.3.6 |
Length of platforms |
|
2.3.7 |
Height of platforms |
|
2.3.8 |
Curvature of platforms |
|
2.3.9 |
Identification of loops |
|
2.3.10 |
Other installations |
|
3 |
Specific Line Segment information |
|
3.1 |
General Characteristics |
|
3.1.1 |
Line segment extremity 1 |
|
3.1.2 |
Line segment extremity 2 |
|
3.1.3 |
Lineside indications of distance (frequency, appearance and positioning) |
|
3.1.4 |
Maximum permissible speed for each track, including, if necessary, differential speeds relating to certain types of train |
|
3.1.5 |
Any other information the driver shall be aware of |
|
3.1.6 |
Specific geographical information required on the local infrastructure |
|
3.1.7 |
Means of Communication with the traffic management/control centre in normal, degraded and emergency situation |
|
3.2 |
Specific Technical Characteristics |
|
3.2.1 |
Gradient percentage |
|
3.2.2 |
Gradient location |
|
3.2.3 |
Tunnels: location, name, length, specific information such as the existence of walkways and points of safe egress as well as the location of safe areas where evacuation of passengers may take place; fire safety categorisation |
|
3.2.4 |
Non-stopping areas: identification, location, type |
|
3.2.5 |
Industrial risks — locations where it is dangerous for the driver to step out |
|
3.2.6 |
Locations of areas designated for testing the sanding equipment (if existing) |
|
3.2.7 |
Type of signalling system and corresponding operational regime (double track, reversible working, left or right hand running, etc.) |
|
3.2.8 |
Type of track to train radio equipment. |
|
3.3 |
Energy subsystem |
|
3.3.1 |
Energy supply system (voltage and frequency) |
|
3.3.2 |
Maximum train current |
|
3.3.3 |
Restriction related to power consumption of specific electric traction unit(s) |
|
3.3.4 |
Restriction related to the position of Multiple Traction unit(s) to comply with contact line separation (position of pantograph) |
|
3.3.5 |
Location of neutral sections |
|
3.3.6 |
Location of areas that shall be passed with lowered pantographs. |
|
3.3.7 |
Conditions applying with regard to regenerative braking |
|
3.3.8 |
Maximum current at standstill per pantograph |
|
3.4 |
Control-Command and Signalling subsystem |
|
3.4.1 |
Need for more than one system active simultaneously |
|
3.4.2 |
Special conditions to switch over between different class B train protection, control and warning systems |
|
3.4.3 |
Special technical conditions required to switch over between ERTMS/ETCS and Class B systems |
|
3.4.4 |
Special instructions (location) to switch over between different radio systems |
|
3.4.5 |
Permissibility to use Eddy-current brake |
|
3.4.6 |
Permissibility to use magnetic brake |
|
3.5 |
Operation and Traffic Management subsystem |
|
3.5.1 |
Operating language |
(*1) General operation: A unit is designed for general operation when the unit is intended to be coupled with other unit(s) in a train formation which is not defined at design stage
(1) Commission Regulation (EU) No 1299/2014 of 18 November 2014 on the technical specifications for interoperability relating to the ‘infrastructure’ subsystem of the rail system in the European Union (OJ L 356, 12.12.2014, p. 1).
(2) Commission Regulation (EU) No 1301/2014 of 18 November 2014 on the technical specifications for interoperability relating to the ‘energy’ subsystem of the rail system in the Union (OJ L 356, 12.12.2014, p. 179).
Appendix E
Language and communication level
The oral qualification in a language may be subdivided into five levels:
|
Level |
Description |
||||||||||
|
5 |
|
||||||||||
|
4 |
|
||||||||||
|
3 |
|
||||||||||
|
2 |
|
||||||||||
|
1 |
|
Appendix F
Minimum elements relevant to professional qualification for the tasks associated with ‘accompanying trains’
1. General requirements
|
(a) |
This Appendix, which shall be read in conjunction with points 4.6 and 4.7 is a list of the elements that are deemed to be relevant to the tasks associated with accompanying a train on the network. |
|
(b) |
The expression ‘professional qualification’, when taken within the context of this Regulation, refers to those elements that are important to ensure that operational staff are trained and able to understand and discharge the tasks. |
|
(c) |
Rules and procedures apply to the tasks being performed and to the person carrying out the tasks. These tasks may be carried out by any authorised qualified person irrespective of any name, job title or grade used in rules or procedures or by the individual company. |
2. Professional knowledge
Any authorisation requires a successfully passed initial examination and provisions for ongoing assessment and training as described in point 4.6.
2.1. General professional knowledge
|
(a) |
Principles of organisation's safety management system, relevant to the tasks. |
|
(b) |
Roles and responsibilities of the key players involved in operations. |
|
(c) |
General conditions relevant to the safety of passengers or cargo and persons on or about the railway track. |
|
(d) |
Conditions of health and safety at work. |
|
(e) |
General principles of security of the railway system. |
|
(f) |
Personal safety including when leaving the train on the running line. |
2.2. Knowledge of operational procedures and safety systems relevant to the tasks
|
(a) |
Operational procedures and safety rules. |
|
(b) |
Relevant aspects of control command and signalling system. |
|
(c) |
Formalised messaging procedure including use of communication equipment. |
2.3. Knowledge of rolling stock
|
(a) |
Passenger vehicle interior equipment. |
|
(b) |
Appropriate knowledge of safety-critical tasks in respect to procedures and interfaces for rolling stock. |
2.4. Knowledge of the route
|
(a) |
Relevant operational arrangements (such as the method of train despatch) at individual locations (station equipment and signalling etc.). |
|
(b) |
Stations at which passengers may alight or board the train. |
|
(c) |
Local operating and emergency arrangements specific to the line(s) of route. |
2.5. Knowledge on passenger safety
The training on passenger safety shall cover at least the following:
|
(a) |
Principles to ensure the safety of passengers:
|
|
(b) |
Principles of communication:
|
|
(c) |
Behavioural skills:
|
3. Ability to put the knowledge into practice
The ability to apply this knowledge in normal, degraded and emergency situations shall require staff to be fully acquainted with:
|
— |
Methods and principles for applying the rules and procedures; |
|
— |
Process for the use of line-side equipment and rolling stock, as well as any specific safety-related equipment; |
In particular with:
|
(a) |
Checks before departure, including brake tests if necessary and correct closure of the doors. |
|
(b) |
Departure procedure. |
|
(c) |
Degraded operation. |
|
(d) |
Assess the potential of a defect within the passenger areas and react according to rules and procedures. |
|
(e) |
Protection and warning measures as required by the rules and regulations or in assistance to the driver. |
|
(f) |
Communicate with the infrastructure manager's staff when assisting the driver. |
|
(g) |
Report any unusual occurrences concerning the operation of the train, the condition of the rolling stock and the safety of passengers. If required these reports shall be made in writing, in the language chosen by the railway undertaking. |
Appendix G
Minimum elements relevant to professional qualification for the task of preparing trains
1. General requirements
|
(a) |
This Appendix, which shall be read in conjunction with point 4.6, gives a list of the elements that are deemed to be relevant to the task of preparing a train on the network. |
|
(b) |
The expression ‘professional qualification’, when taken within the context of this Regulation, refers to those elements that are important to ensure that operational staff are trained and able to understand and discharge the elements of the task. |
|
(c) |
Rules and procedures apply to the task being performed and to the person carrying out the task. These tasks may be carried out by any authorised qualified person irrespective of any name, job title or grade used in rules or procedures or by the individual company. |
2. Professional knowledge
Any authorisation requires a successfully passed initial examination and provisions for ongoing assessment and training as described in point 4.6.
2.1. General professional knowledge
|
(a) |
Principles of organisation's safety management system, relevant to the task. |
|
(b) |
Roles and responsibilities of the key players involved in operations. |
|
(c) |
General conditions relevant to the safety of passengers and/or cargo including the carriage of dangerous goods and exceptional loads. |
|
(d) |
Appreciation of hazards, especially in relation to the risks involving railway operation and electric traction supply. |
|
(e) |
Conditions of health and safety at work. |
|
(f) |
General principles of security of the railway system. |
|
(g) |
Personal safety when on or in the vicinity of rail lines. |
|
(h) |
Communications principles and formalised messaging procedure including use of communication equipment. |
2.2. Knowledge of operational procedures and safety systems relevant to the task
|
(a) |
Working of trains in normal, degraded and emergency situations. |
|
(b) |
Operational procedures at individual locations (signalling, station/depot/yard equipment) and safety rules. |
|
(c) |
Local operating arrangements. |
2.3. Knowledge of train equipment
|
(a) |
Purpose and use of wagon and vehicle equipment. |
|
(b) |
Identification of and arranging for technical inspections. |
|
(c) |
Appropriate knowledge of safety-critical tasks in respect to procedures and interfaces for rolling stock. |
3. Ability to put the knowledge into practice
The ability to apply this knowledge in normal, degraded and emergency situations shall require staff to be fully acquainted with:
|
— |
Methods and principles for applying the rules and procedures; |
|
— |
Process for the use of line-side equipment and rolling stock, as well as any specific safety-related equipment; |
In particular:
|
(a) |
Application of train composition rules, train braking rules, train loading rules etc. to ensure the train is in running order. |
|
(b) |
Understanding of marking and labels on vehicles. |
|
(c) |
Process for determining and making train data available. |
|
(d) |
Communication with train crew. |
|
(e) |
Communication with staff responsible for controlling the movement of trains. |
|
(f) |
Degraded operations especially as it affects the preparation of trains. |
|
(g) |
Protection and warning measures as required by the rules and regulations or local arrangements at the location in question. |
|
(h) |
Actions to be taken in respect to incidents involving the carriage of dangerous goods (where relevant). |
Appendix H
European Vehicle Number and linked alphabetical marking on the bodywork
1. GENERAL PROVISIONS ON THE EUROPEAN VEHICLE NUMBER
The European Vehicle Number (EVN) is assigned in accordance with Appendix 6 of Annex II to Commission Implementing Decision (EU) 2018/1614 (1).
The EVN shall be changed in accordance with point 3.2.2.8 of Annex II to Implementing Decision (EU) 2018/1614.
The EVN may be changed at the request of the keeper in accordance with point 3.2.2.9 of Annex II to Implementing Decision (EU) 2018/1614.
2. GENERAL ARRANGEMENTS FOR EXTERNAL MARKINGS
The capital letters and figures making up the marking inscriptions shall be at least 80 mm in height, in a sans serif font type of correspondence quality. A smaller height may only be used where there is no option but to place the marking on the sole bars.
The marking is put not higher than 2 metres above rail level.
The keeper may add, in letters of larger size than the European Vehicle Number, an own number marking (consisting generally of digits of the serial number supplemented by alphabetical coding) useful in operations. The place where the own number is marked is left to the choice of the keeper, however it shall be always be possible to distinguish easily the European Vehicle Number from the keeper's own number marking.
3. WAGONS
The marking shall be inscribed on the wagon bodywork in the following manner:
7369 553-4 Zcs |
0691 235-2 Tanoos |
4796 100-8 Slpss |
Where in the examples:
|
|
D and NL stand for the registering Member State as set out in Decision (EU) 2018/1614, Appendix 6, part 4. |
|
|
RFC, DB and ACTS stand for the keeper marking as set out in Decision (EU) 2018/1614, Appendix 6, part 1. |
For wagons whose bodywork does not offer a large enough area for this type of arrangement, particularly in the case of flat wagons, the marking shall be arranged as follows:
|
01 87 |
3320 644-7 |
|
|
TEN |
F-SNCF |
Ks |
When one or more index letters of national significance are inscribed on a wagon, this national marking shall be shown after the international letter marking and separated from it by a hyphen as follows:
|
01 87 |
3320 644-7 |
|
|
TEN |
F-SNCF |
Ks-xy |
4. COACHES AND HAULED PASSENGER STOCK
The number shall be applied to each sidewall of the vehicle in the following manner:
|
F-SNCF |
61 87 20 - 72 021 - 7 |
|
|
B10 tu |
The marking of the country in which the vehicle is registered and of the technical characteristics are printed directly in front of, behind or under the twelve digits of the vehicle number.
In case of coaches with driver's cabin, the European Vehicle Number is also written inside the cabin.
5. LOCOMOTIVES, POWER CARS AND SPECIAL VEHICLES
The European Vehicle Number shall be marked on each sidewall of the tractive stock in the following manner:
92 10 1108 062-6
The European Vehicle Number is also written inside each cabin of the tractive rolling stock.
6. ALPHABETICAL MARKING OF THE INTEROPERABILITY CAPABILITY
‘TEN’: Vehicle which is provided with an authorisation valid for an area of use covering all Member States.
‘PPV/PPW’: Vehicle which complies with PPV/PPW or PGW agreement (inside OSJD States). (original: PPV/PPW: ППВ (Правила пользования вагонами в международном сообщении); PGW: Правила Пользования Грузовыми Вагонами)
Vehicles which are provided with an authorisation valid for an area of use which does not cover all Member States need a marking indicating the Member States which are part of the area of use of the vehicle. This marking shall be according to one of the following drawings, where D stands for the Member State who has granted the first authorisation (in the given example, Germany) and F stands for the second authorising MS (in the given example, France). The MS are codified in accordance with Decision (EU) 2018/1614, Appendix 6, part 4.
(1) Commission Implementing Decision (EU) 2018/1614 of 25 October 2018 laying down specifications for the vehicle registers referred to in Article 47 of Directive (EU) 2016/797 of the European Parliament and of the Council and amending and repealing Commission Decision 2007/756/EC (OJ L 268, 26.10.2018, p. 53).
Appendix I
List of areas for which national rules may continue to apply according to Article 8 of Directive (EU) 2016/798
1. AREAS FOR NATIONAL RULES
|
|
Shunting |
|
|
Signalling rules Rules related to the operational use of the national signalling system |
|
|
Maximum speeds in degraded mode including running on sight |
|
|
Running at caution |
|
|
Local operational rule Relating to specific local conditions where additional information may be needed — this is limited to requirements not covered by this Regulation |
|
|
Operation during works |
|
|
Safe operation of test train |
|
|
Train visibility — Front end (see 4.2.2.1.2) Existing Non TSI conform vehicles |
|
|
Managing an emergency situation and emergency responses (see point 4.2.3.7) Role of local/national authorities and emergency services Notification of accidents and incidents: national instructions on modalities for notifications to authorities |
|
|
Safety-related communications terminology (see Appendix C) National operational instructions |
|
|
Requirements on route knowledge under the national transposition of Directive 2007/59/EC (Train Driver Directive) |
2. LIST OF OPEN POINTS
|
|
Exceptional transport |
|
|
Timetable (see 4.2.1.2.3) Additional information |
|
|
Recording of supervision data outside the train (see 4.2.3.5.1) Additional information |
|
|
Recording of supervision data on-board the train (see 4.2.3.5.2) Additional information |
|
|
Professional competences (see point 4.6)
|
|
|
Health and safety conditions (see point 4.7)
|
|
|
Common operational principles and rules (See 4.4 and Appendix B)
|
|
|
Safety-related communications terminology (see Appendix C) Additional terms |
|
|
Operations in long tunnels (see 4.3.5) Additional information |
Appendix J
Glossary
The definitions in this glossary refer to the use of terms in this Regulation.
For the purpose of this Regulation, the definition in Article 2 of Directive (EU) 2016/797 and in point 2.2 of Locomotives and passenger rolling stock TSI shall apply.
|
Term |
Definition |
||||||||||
|
Accident |
As defined in Article 3 of Directive (EU) 2016/798. |
||||||||||
|
Authorising train movements |
The operation of equipment in signalling centres, electric traction current supply control rooms and traffic control centres that permits train movement. This does not include those staff employed by a railway undertaking who are responsible for management of resources such as train crew or rolling stock. |
||||||||||
|
Competence |
The qualification and experience necessary to safely and reliably undertake the task being performed. Experience may be gained as part of the training process. |
||||||||||
|
Dangerous goods |
As covered by Directive 2008/68/EC of the European Parliament and of the Council on the inland transport of dangerous goods (1) |
||||||||||
|
Degraded operation |
Operation resulting from an unplanned event that prevents the normal delivery of train services. |
||||||||||
|
Despatch (= dispatch) |
See Train despatch |
||||||||||
|
Driver |
As defined in Article 3 of Directive 2007/59/EC. |
||||||||||
|
Emergency call |
Call set up in some dangerous situations to warn all trains/shunting movements in a defined area. |
||||||||||
|
End of authority passed without permission |
An end of authority passed without permission is any occasion when a train proceeds beyond the end of authority in the following circumstances:
This covers movement authority as described in ETCS and authority to move covered by instructions/signalling. Any case in which a vehicle without any traction unit attached or a train that is unattended runs away is not included. |
||||||||||
|
European instruction |
An harmonised operational instruction giving a similar content to train drivers across the European Union in order for them to answer in a similar manner to similar situation. |
||||||||||
|
Evacuation |
Evacuation of a train is when all passengers are instructed to leave the train and go on to the infrastructure under the supervision of on-board staff. On-board staff having agreed with the signaller or other responsible infrastructure manager staff, that it is safe to do so. |
||||||||||
|
Exceptional transport |
A vehicle and/or the load carried which because of construction/design, dimensions or weight does not meet the parameters of the route and requires special authority for the movement and may require special conditions over part or its entire journey. |
||||||||||
|
Health and Safety Conditions |
In the context of this Regulation, this refers only to the medical and psychological qualifications required to operate the relevant elements of the subsystem. |
||||||||||
|
Hot axle box |
An axle box and bearing that has exceeded its maximum designed operating temperature. |
||||||||||
|
Incident |
As defined in Article 3 of Directive (EU) 2016/798. |
||||||||||
|
Length of train |
Total length of all vehicles over buffers including locomotive(s) |
||||||||||
|
Loop |
Track, connected to the main track, used for passing, crossing and stabling. |
||||||||||
|
National instruction |
An instruction defined at national level or by an infrastructure manager which covers situations specific to a Class B system or the transition between class A and class B systems. |
||||||||||
|
Operating Language |
The language or languages used in daily operation an infrastructure manager and published in its Network Statement, for the communication of operational or safety related messages between the staff of the infrastructure manager and the railway undertaking. |
||||||||||
|
Operational instruction |
Formal information exchanged between signaller and train driver so as to ensure/continue railway operation in specific situations. The operational instruction exists at both national and European levels. |
||||||||||
|
Passenger |
Person (other than an employee with specific duties on the train) travelling by train or on railway property before or after a train journey. |
||||||||||
|
Performance monitoring |
The systematic observation and recording of the performance of the train service and the infrastructure for the purpose of bringing about improvements in the performance of both. |
||||||||||
|
Qualification |
The physical and psychological suitability for the task together with the required knowledge. |
||||||||||
|
Real time |
The ability to exchange or process information on specified events (such as arrival at a station, passing a station or departure from a station) on the trains journey as they occur. |
||||||||||
|
Reporting point |
A point on the trains schedule where reporting of the arrival, departure or passing time is required. |
||||||||||
|
Route |
The particular section or sections of line |
||||||||||
|
Safety-critical task |
Task performed by staff when they control or affect the movement of a train, which could affect railway safety. |
||||||||||
|
Scheduled stop |
Planned stop for commercial or operational reasons. |
||||||||||
|
Siding |
Any track(s) within an operational point which is not used for operational routing of a train. |
||||||||||
|
Signaller |
Performer in charge of the route setting of trains/shunting movements and of issuing instructions to drivers. |
||||||||||
|
Staff |
Employees working for a railway undertaking or an infrastructure manager, or their contractors, undertaking tasks as specified in this Regulation. |
||||||||||
|
Stop aspect |
Any signal aspect that does not allow the driver to pass the signal. |
||||||||||
|
Stopping point |
A location identified in the schedule of a train where the train is planned to stop, usually to carry out a specific activity such as allowing passengers to join and leave the train. |
||||||||||
|
Timetable |
Document or system that gives details of a train(s) schedule over a particular route. |
||||||||||
|
Timing point |
A location identified in the schedule of a train where a specific time is identified. This time may be an arrival time, departure time or in the case of a train not scheduled to stop at that location the passing time. |
||||||||||
|
Traction unit |
A powered vehicle able to move itself and other vehicles to which it may be coupled. |
||||||||||
|
Train |
A train is defined as (a) traction unit(s) with or without coupled railway vehicles with train data available operating between two or more defined points. |
||||||||||
|
Train despatch |
The indication to the person driving the train that all station or depot activities are completed and that, as far as the staff responsible are concerned, movement authority has been granted for the train. |
||||||||||
|
Train crew |
Members of the on-board staff of a train, who are certified as competent and appointed by a railway undertaking to carry out specific, designated safety related tasks on the train, for example the driver or the guard. |
||||||||||
|
Train preparation |
Ensuring that a train is in a fit condition to enter service, that the train equipment is correctly deployed and the train composition matches the train's designated route(s). Train preparation also includes technical inspections carried out prior to the train entering service. |
|
Abbreviation |
Explanation |
|
AC |
Alternating current |
|
ATP |
Automatic Train Protection |
|
CCS |
Control-Command and Signalling |
|
CEN |
European Committee for Standardisation (Comité Européen de Normalisation) |
|
COTIF |
Convention Concerning International Carriage by Rail (Convention relative aux Transports Internationaux Ferroviaires) |
|
dB |
Decibels |
|
DC |
Direct Current |
|
DMI |
Driver Machine Interface |
|
EC |
European Community |
|
ECG |
Electro Cardiogram |
|
EIRENE |
European Integrated Railway Radio Enhanced Network |
|
EN |
Euro-norm |
|
ENE |
Energy |
|
ERA |
European Union Agency for Railways |
|
ERATV |
European Register of Authorised Types of Vehicles |
|
ERTMS |
European Rail Traffic Management System |
|
ETCS |
European Train Control System |
|
EU |
European Union |
|
FRS |
Functional Requirement Specification |
|
GSM-R |
Global System for Mobile Communications — Rail |
|
IM |
Infrastructure Manager |
|
INF |
Infrastructure |
|
OPE |
Operation and Traffic Management |
|
OSJD |
Organisation for Cooperation between Railways |
|
PPV/PPW |
Russian abbreviation for Prawila Polzowaniia Wagonami w mejdunarodnom soobqenii = Rules for use of railway vehicles in international traffic |
|
RINF |
Register of Infrastructure |
|
RST |
Rolling Stock |
|
RU |
Railway Undertaking |
|
SMS |
Safety Management System |
|
SPAD |
Signal Passed at Danger |
|
SRS |
System Requirement Specification |
|
TAF |
Telematic Applications for Freight |
|
TEN |
Trans-European Network |
|
TPS |
Train Protection System |
|
TSI |
Technical Specification for Interoperability |
|
UIC |
International Union of Railways (Union Internationale des Chemins de fer) |
|
Locomotives and passenger rolling stock (LOC&PAS) TSI |
Commission Regulation (EU) No 1302/2014 of 18 November 2014 concerning a technical specification for interoperability relating to the ‘rolling stock — locomotives and passenger rolling stock’ subsystem of the rail system in the European Union |
|
Control-command and signalling (CCS) TSI |
Commission Regulation (EU) 2016/919 of 27 May 2016 on the technical specification for interoperability relating to the ‘control-command and signalling’ subsystems of the rail system in the European Union |
|
Noise (NOI) TSI |
Commission Regulation (EU) No 1304/2014 of 26 November 2014 on the technical specification for interoperability relating to the subsystem ‘rolling stock — noise’ amending Decision 2008/232/EC and repealing Decision 2011/229/EU |
|
Wagon (WAG) TSI |
Commission Regulation (EU) No 321/2013 of 13 March 2013 concerning the technical specification for interoperability relating to the subsystem ‘rolling stock — freight wagons’ of the rail system in the European Union and repealing Decision 2006/861/EC |
|
Persons with reduced mobility (PRM) TSI |
Commission Regulation (EU) No 1300/2014 of 18 November 2014 on the technical specifications for interoperability relating to accessibility of the Union's rail system for persons with disabilities and persons with reduced mobility |
|
Energy (ENE) TSI |
Commission Regulation (EU) No 1301/2014 of 18 November 2014 on the technical specifications for interoperability relating to the ‘energy’ subsystem of the rail system in the Union |
|
Infrastructure (INF) TSI |
Commission Regulation (EU) No 1299/2014 of 18 November 2014 on the technical specifications for interoperability relating to the ‘infrastructure’ subsystem of the rail system in the European Union |
|
Safety in Railway Tunnels (SRT) TSI |
Commission Regulation (EU) No 1303/2014 of 18 November 2014 concerning the technical specification for interoperability relating to ‘safety in railway tunnels’ of the rail system of the European Union |
(1) Directive 2008/68/EC of the European Parliament and of the Council of 24 September 2008 on the inland transport of dangerous goods (OJ L 260, 30.9.2008, p. 13).
|
27.5.2019 |
EN |
Official Journal of the European Union |
LI 139/89 |
COMMISSION IMPLEMENTING REGULATION (EU) 2019/774
of 16 May 2019
amending Regulation (EU) No 1304/2014 as regards application of the technical specification for interoperability relating to the subsystem ‘rolling stock — noise’ to the existing freight wagons
(Text with EEA relevance)
THE EUROPEAN COMMISSION,
Having regard to the Treaty on the Functioning of the European Union,
Having regard to Directive (EU) 2016/797 of the European Parliament and of the Council of 11 May 2016 on the interoperability of the rail system within the European Union (1), and in particular Article 5(11) thereof,
Whereas:
|
(1) |
Directive 2002/49/EC of the European Parliament and of the Council (2) (Environmental Noise Directive) provides a basis for developing and completing the existing set of Community measures concerning noise emitted by, inter alia, rail vehicles. |
|
(2) |
Environmental noise and in particular noise from railways remains a serious threat to human health, as results from the evaluation of the Environmental Noise Directive (3) and the implementation report of the Environmental Noise Directive (4). |
|
(3) |
While Environmental Noise Directive generally applies to routes having more than 30 000 trains, both freight and passenger, in developing the concept of ‘quieter routes’ it has been necessary to take into account those routes where there is a significant freight traffic during the night-time. |
|
(4) |
There is a risk that excessive levels of railway noise could lead to uncoordinated unilateral action by some Member States. Such measures could have adverse effects on European economies and result in a reverse modal shift from rail to road. Furthermore, such actions might undermine Union rail interoperability. As the majority of rail freight in the Union is international, a European-level solution to the problem is needed. |
|
(5) |
The application of the technical specification for interoperability relating to the ‘rolling stock — noise’ subsystem of the rail system in the Union (‘NOI TSI’) as set out in Commission Regulation (EU) No 1304/2014 (5) to existing wagons should therefore significantly reduce maximum noise emission levels. One of the most effective ways to mitigate rail noise is by retrofitting existing freight wagons with composite brake blocks. This technical solution reduces rail noise by up to 10 dB, which represents a 50 % reduction in audible noise for humans. |
|
(6) |
On 22 September 2017, the Commission requested the European Union Agency for Railways (‘the Agency’) to issue a recommendation, pursuant to Article 5(2) of Directive (EU) 2016/797, for a revision of the NOI TSI with a view to specifying the application of the NOI TSI to the existing freight wagons in the framework of the ‘quieter routes’ strategy and in order to align the NOI TSI with Directive (EU) 2016/797. |
|
(7) |
The issue of rail freight noise should be tackled where it is a serious nuisance and a health threat. For this reason and as freight trains operating in night are of particular nuisance, a definition of a quieter route should be formulated with reference to rail freight traffic intensity during night-time. |
|
(8) |
The date of application of the introduction of the quieter routes should be set taking into account several parameters, including the progress of retrofitting in different Member States, the rate of renewal of the rail freight fleet, the freight wagons maintenance cycle, the production capacity of manufacturers of composite brake blocks and workshop availability. The date should also be aligned with the recurrent change of working timetable in accordance with Annex VII to Directive 2012/34/EU of the European Parliament and of the Council (6). |
|
(9) |
As traffic intensity may be subject to fluctuations, the list of quieter routes should be updated at regular intervals to take into account such changes and, at the same time, guarantee a stable framework over a period of several years. Therefore, it would be appropriate that the Member States update the list of quieter routes at least every five years after 8 December 2024. Furthermore, before the first update, the Commission should evaluate the progress of retrofitting and the impact of the introduction of quieter routes on the rail freight industry. |
|
(10) |
Given the concerns raised by some stakeholders related to the operations of wagons equipped with composite brake blocks in Nordic winter conditions, the Commission, assisted by the Agency, should continue to analyse the issues and possible solutions. It should assess by June 2020 whether an amendment to this TSI is necessary, possibly in form of an exemption allowing the continued operation of limited numbers of wagons with cast iron brake blocks on quieter routes, to preserve cross border rail freight traffic to and from affected Nordic regions. According to the estimates of the Swedish authorities the number of wagons used in such a traffic does in total not exceed 17 500. |
|
(11) |
The introduction of quieter routes should complement other actions at Union level aimed at reducing rail freight noise, including the financing of retrofitting under the Connecting Europe Facility, (7) ESIF funds (8), noise-differentiated track access charges schemes (9) and the development of new technical solutions under the Shift2Rail initiative (10). |
|
(12) |
In order to ensure an efficient implementation of quieter routes the respective national competent authorities should closely cooperate. |
|
(13) |
As the amendments have a direct impact on the social environment of workers in the sector and on rail freight customers, the social partners and rail freight customers have been consulted, as required by Articles 6 and 7 of Regulation (EU) 2016/796 of the European Parliament and of the Council (11). |
|
(14) |
An impact assessment in accordance with Article 5 of Directive (EU) 2016/797 was conducted during the revision of this TSI by the Agency. |
|
(15) |
On 29 May 2018, the Agency issued a recommendation on the amendments to the NOI TSI regarding the application of its provisions to the existing wagons. |
|
(16) |
Furthermore, on 29 November 2018, the Agency issued a recommendation on the amendment to the NOI TSI in order to align this Regulation with Directive (EU) 2016/797. |
|
(17) |
Under Commission Delegated Decision (EU) 2017/1474 (12), TSI should indicate whether it is necessary to re-notify the conformity assessment bodies that were notified on the basis of a previous version of the TSI and whether a simplified notification process should be applied. This Regulation brings about limited changes and it should not be necessary to re-notify bodies notified on the basis of a previous version of the TSI. |
|
(18) |
This Regulation amends the NOI TSI to further achieve interoperability within the Union rail system, improve and develop international rail transport, contribute to the progressive creation of the internal market and complement the NOI TSI in view of covering essential requirements. It enables to achieve the objectives and to meet the essential requirements of both Directives 2008/57/EC of the European Parliament and of the Council (13) and (EU) 2016/797. Therefore, this Regulation should be directly applicable in all Member States including Member States which have notified the Agency and the Commission under Article 57(2) of Directive (EU) 2016/797 that they have extended the transposition period and thus continue to apply Directive 2008/57/EC until 15 June 2020 at the latest. Notified Bodies exercising under Directive 2008/57/EC in the Member States that have extended the transposition period should be able to issue ‘EC’ certificate of verification in accordance with this Regulation as long as Directive 2008/57/EC applies in the Member State where they are established. |
|
(19) |
Regulation (EU) No 1304/2014 should therefore be amended in order to align this Regulation with Directive (EU) 2016/797 and to apply it to existing freight wagons in the framework of the quieter routes strategy and to provide for a procedure for the assessment of acoustic performance of composite brake blocks. This procedure should become as set out by this amendment an open point within the meaning of Article 4(6) of Directive (EU) 2016/797. |
|
(20) |
The measures provided for in this Regulation are in accordance with the opinion of the Committee established under Article 51(1) of Directive (EU) 2016/797, |
HAS ADOPTED THIS REGULATION:
Article 1
Regulation (EU) No 1304/2014 is amended as follows:
|
(1) |
Article 5 is amended as follows:
|
|
(2) |
Article 7 is amended as follows:
|
|
(3) |
The following Articles 5a, 5b, 5c, 5d, 5e are inserted: ‘Article 5a From 8 December 2024, wagons within the scope of Regulation (EU) No 321/2013 which are not covered by point 7.2.2.2 of the Annex to this Regulation shall not be operated on the quieter routes. Article 5b A ‘quieter route’ means a part of the railway infrastructure with a minimum length of 20 km on which the average number of daily operated freight trains during the night-time as defined in national legislation transposing Directive 2002/49/EC of the European Parliament and of the Council (*1) was higher than 12. The freight traffic in the years 2015, 2016 and 2017 shall be the basis for the calculation of that average number. In case the freight traffic due to exceptional circumstances diverges in a given year from that average number by more than 25 %, the Member State concerned can calculate the average number on the basis of the remaining two years. Article 5c 1. Member States shall designate quieter routes in accordance with Article 5b and the procedure set out in Appendix D.1 of the Annex. They shall provide the European Union Agency for Railways (‘the Agency’) with a list of quieter routes six months after the date of publication of this Regulation at the latest. The Agency shall publish those lists on its website. 2. Member States shall update the list of quieter routes at least every five years after 8 December 2024, following the procedure set out in Appendix D.2 of the Annex. Article 5d By 31 December 2028, the Commission shall evaluate the implementation of the quieter routes, in particular regarding the progress of retrofitting of wagons and the impact of the introduction of quieter routes on the overall noise exposure of the population and competitiveness of the rail freight sector. Article 5e By 30 June 2020, the Commission shall issue a report regarding operations with wagons equipped with composite brake blocks in Nordic winter conditions, based on evidence gathered by the Agency, national safety authorities and rail companies. In particular, this report shall contain an assessment of the safety and braking performance of such wagons and existing or potential operational and technical measures applicable in Nordic winter conditions. The report shall be made public. If the report provides evidence that the use of such wagons in Nordic winter conditions poses safety issues that cannot be addressed by operational and technical measures without severe adverse impact on rail freight operations, the Commission shall propose amendments to this TSI to address those issues while preserving cross border freight traffic to and from affected Nordic regions. In particular, the proposal may if necessary include an exemption permitting the continued operation on quieter routes throughout the Union of a limited number of wagons used frequently in such cross border freight traffic, and any operational restrictions appropriate to limit the impact of the use of such wagons on quieter routes, which are compatible with the purpose of preserving the above-mentioned cross-border freight traffic. If the revision set out in the paragraph above takes place, the Commission shall report annually thereafter on the progress on technical and operational solutions for the operation of freight wagons in winter conditions. It shall provide an estimation of the number of wagons equipped with cast iron brake blocks necessary to ensure continued cross border traffic to and from such Nordic regions, with a view to ending the exemption in 2028 at the latest. (*1) Directive 2002/49/EC of the European Parliament and of the Council of 25 June 2002 relating to the assessment and management of environmental noise (OJ L 189, 18.7.2002, p. 12).’ " |
|
(4) |
The Annex to Regulation (EU) No 1304/2014 is amended in accordance with the Annex to this Implementing Regulation. |
Article 2
1. Notifications of conformity assessment bodies for the purposes of Regulation (EU) No 1304/2014 shall remain valid on the basis of that Regulation, as amended by the present Regulation.
2. Conformity assessment bodies notified in accordance with Directive 2008/57/EC may issue ‘EC’ certificate of verification in accordance with this Regulation as long as Directive 2008/57/EC applies in the Member State where they are established in accordance with Article 57(2) of Directive (EU) 2016/797 and until 15 June 2020 at the latest.
Article 3
This Regulation shall enter into force on the twentieth day following that of its publication in the Official Journal of the European Union.
This Regulation shall be binding in its entirety and directly applicable in all Member States.
Done at Brussels, 16 May 2019.
For the Commission
The President
Jean-Claude JUNCKER
(1) Directive (EU) 2016/797 of the European Parliament and of the Council of 11 May 2016 on the interoperability of the rail system within the European Union (OJ L 138, 26.5.2016, p. 44).
(2) Directive 2002/49/EC of the European Parliament and of the Council of 25 June 2002 relating to the assessment and management of environmental noise (OJ L 189, 18.7.2002, p. 12).
(3) Commission Staff Working Document Refit Evaluation of the Directive 2002/49/EC relating to the assessment and management of environmental noise (SWD(2016) 454 final)
(4) Report from the Commission to the European Parliament and the Council on the Implementation of the Environmental Noise Directive in accordance with Article 11 of Directive 2002/49/EC (COM(2017) 151 final).
(5) Commission Regulation (EU) No 1304/2014 of 26 November 2014 on the technical specification for interoperability relating to the subsystem ‘rolling stock — noise’ amending Decision 2008/232/EC and repealing Decision 2011/229/EU (OJ L 356, 12.12.2014, p. 421).
(6) Directive 2012/34/EU of the European Parliament and of the Council of 21 November 2012 establishing a single European railway area (OJ L 343, 14.12.2012, p. 32).
(7) Regulation (EU) No 1316/2013 of the European Parliament and of the Council of 11 December 2013 establishing the Connecting Europe Facility, amending Regulation (EU) No 913/2010 and repealing Regulations (EC) No 680/2007 and (EC) No 67/2010 (OJ L 348, 20.12.2013, p. 129).
(8) Regulation (EU) No 1300/2013 of the European Parliament and of the Council of 17 December 2013 on the Cohesion Fund and repealing Council Regulation (EC) No 1084/2006 (OJ L 347, 20.12.2013, p. 281) and Regulation (EU) No 1301/2013 of the European Parliament and of the Council of 17 December 2013 on the European Regional Development Fund and on specific provisions concerning the Investment for growth and jobs goal and repealing Regulation (EC) No 1080/2006 (OJ L 347, 20.12.2013, p. 289).
(9) Commission Implementing Regulation (EU) 2015/429 of 13 March 2015 setting out the modalities to be followed for the application of the charging for the cost of noise effects (OJ L 70, 14.3.2015, p. 36).
(10) Council Regulation (EU) No 642/2014 of 16 June 2014 establishing the Shift2Rail Joint Undertaking (OJ L 177, 17.6.2014, p. 9).
(11) Regulation (EU) 2016/796 of the European Parliament and of the Council of 11 May 2016 on the European Union Agency for Railways and repealing Regulation (EC) No 881/2004 (OJ L 138, 26.5.2016, p. 1).
(12) Commission Delegated Decision (EU) 2017/1474 of 8 June 2017 supplementing Directive (EU) 2016/797 of the European Parliament and of the Council with regard to specific objectives for the drafting, adoption and review of technical specifications for interoperability (OJ L 210, 15.8.2017, p. 5).
(13) Directive 2008/57/EC of the European Parliament and of the Council of 17 June 2008 on the interoperability of the rail system within the Community (OJ L 191, 18.7.2008, p. 1)
ANNEX
The Annex to Regulation (EU) No 1304/2014 is amended as follows:
|
1. |
In Chapter 1 the text ‘Directive 2008/57/EC’ is replaced by the text ‘Directive (EU) 2016/797’; |
|
2. |
In chapter 1 section 1.1 is replaced by the following: ‘1.1 Technical scope 1.1.1 Scope related to rolling stock This TSI applies to all rolling stock within the scope of Regulation (EU) No 1302/2014 (LOC&PAS TSI) and Regulation (EU) No 321/2013 (WAG TSI); 1.1.2. Scope related to operational aspects Alongside with Commission Decision 2012/757/EU (*1) (OPE TSI), this TSI applies to the operation of freight wagons which are used on railway infrastructure designated as ‘quieter routes’. (*1) Commission Decision 2012/757/EU of 14 November 2012 concerning the technical specification for interoperability relating to the operation and traffic management subsystem of the rail system in the European Union and amending Decision 2007/756/EC (OJ L 345, 15.12.2012, p. 1).’." |
|
3. |
Chapter 2 is replaced by the following: ‘2. DEFINITION OF THE SUBSYSTEM A ‘unit’ means the rolling stock which is subject to the application of this TSI, and therefore subject to the ‘EC’ verification procedure. Chapter 2 in the annex to Regulation (EU) No 1302/2014 and chapter 2 in the annex to Regulation (EU) No 321/2013 describe what a unit can consist of. The requirements of this TSI apply to the following categories of rolling stock set out in section 2 in Annex I of Directive (EU) 2016/797:
|
|
4. |
Chapter 3 is replaced by the following: ‘3. ESSENTIAL REQUIREMENTS All basic parameters set out in this TSI shall be linked to at least one of the essential requirements as set out in Annex III of Directive (EU) 2016/797. Table 1 indicates the allocation. Table 1 Basic parameters and their link to the essential requirements
|
||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
|
5. |
Chapter 4 is amended as follows:
|
|
6. |
In chapter 6 ‘Conformity assessment and EC verification’, in point 6.2.2.3.2.1 ‘EMU, DMUs, locomotives and coaches’ and in point 6.2.2.3.2.2 ‘Wagons’, the text ‘Vtest’ is replaced by ‘vtest’ (four replacements). |
|
7. |
Chapter 7 is amended as follows:
|
|
8. |
In Appendix A ‘Open points’, the text ‘This TSI does not contain any open points’, is replaced by the following table:
|
|
9. |
The following Appendices D, E and F are added: ‘Appendix D Quieter routes D.1 Identification of quieter routes In accordance with Article 5c(1) of this Regulation the Member States shall provide the European Union Agency for Railways (‘the Agency’) with a list of quieter routes in a format allowing further processing by the users with IT-tools. The list shall contain at least the following information:
The list shall be provided using the template below:
In addition, the Member States may provide maps illustrating the quieter routes on a voluntary basis. All lists and maps shall be published on the Agency website (http://www.era.europa.eu) no later than 9 months after 27.5.2019. By the same date the Agency shall inform the Commission of the lists and maps of quieter routes. The Commission shall inform the Member States accordingly through the committee referred to in Article 51 of Directive (EU) 2016/797. D.2 Update of quieter routes The freight traffic data used for the update of quieter routes in accordance with Article 5c(2) of this Regulation shall refer to the last three years preceding the update for which the data is available. In case the freight traffic due to exceptional circumstances diverges in a given year from that average number by more than 25 %, the Member State concerned can calculate the average number on the basis of the remaining two years. Member States shall provide the Agency with the updated quieter routes. The routes designated as quieter routes shall remain as such following the update unless during the period concerned the volume of traffic has decreased by more than 50 % and the average number of daily operated freight trains during the night-time is lower than 12. In case of new and upgraded lines, the expected volume of traffic shall be used for the designation of those lines as quieter routes. The Agency shall publish the updated quieter routes on its website (http://www.era.europa.eu) no later than 3 months after their reception and they shall apply from the next December timetable change following one year after their publication. The Agency shall inform the Commission of any changes to the quieter routes. The Commission shall inform the Member States of these changes through the committee referred to in Article 51 of Directive (EU) 2016/797. Appendix E Historic composite brake blocks E.1 Historic composite brake blocks for international use Existing wagons equipped with the brake blocks listed below are allowed to be used on the quieter routes within their area of use, until the relevant date set out in Appendix N of UIC 541-4.
Wagons equipped with historic composite brake blocks not listed in the table above but already authorised for international traffic in conformity with the provisions of Decision 2004/446/EC or Decision 2006/861/EC can still be used without any deadline within the area of use covered by their authorisation. E.2 Historic composite brake blocks for national use Existing wagons equipped with the brake blocks listed below are only allowed to be used on the railway networks, including quieter routes, of the corresponding Member States within their area of use.
Appendix F Assessment of acoustic performance of a brake block The purpose of this procedure is to demonstrate the acoustic performance of a composite brake block at interoperability constituent level. This procedure shall be an open point in accordance with Article 4(6) of Directive (EU) 2016/797. (*2) Commission Implementing Decision 2014/880/EU of 26 November 2014 on the common specifications of the register of railway infrastructure and repealing Implementing Decision 2011/633/EU (OJ L 356, 12.12.2014, p. 489)." |
(*1) Commission Decision 2012/757/EU of 14 November 2012 concerning the technical specification for interoperability relating to the operation and traffic management subsystem of the rail system in the European Union and amending Decision 2007/756/EC (OJ L 345, 15.12.2012, p. 1).’.
(*2) Commission Implementing Decision 2014/880/EU of 26 November 2014 on the common specifications of the register of railway infrastructure and repealing Implementing Decision 2011/633/EU (OJ L 356, 12.12.2014, p. 489).’
|
27.5.2019 |
EN |
Official Journal of the European Union |
LI 139/103 |
COMMISSION IMPLEMENTING REGULATION (EU) 2019/775
of 16 May 2019
amending Regulation (EU) No 454/2011 as regards Change Control Management
(Text with EEA relevance)
THE EUROPEAN COMMISSION,
Having regard to the Treaty on the Functioning of the European Union,
Having regard to Directive (EU) 2016/797 of the European Parliament and of the Council of 11 May 2016 on the interoperability of the rail system within the European Union (1), and in particular Article 5(11) thereof,
Whereas:
|
(1) |
Article 19 of Regulation (EU) 2016/796 of the European Parliament and of the Council (2) requires the European Union Agency for Railways (‘the Agency’) to address recommendations to the Commission on the technical specifications for interoperability (‘TSIs’) and their revision, in accordance with Article 5 of Directive (EU) 2016/797, and to ensure that TSIs are adapted to technical progress, market trends and social requirements. |
|
(2) |
Article 14 of Commission Delegated Decision (EU) 2017/1474 (3) requires Section 7.5 of Annex I to Commission Regulation (EU) No 454/2011 (4) (TAP TSI) to be amended for specifying the modified change control procedure for the TAP TSI. |
|
(3) |
In accordance with Article 5 of Regulation (EU) 2016/796, a working party has been established for making a proposal for a recommendation as regards the changes of the Section 7.5 of the TAP TSI. |
|
(4) |
On 20 April 2018, the Agency addressed a recommendation to the Commission on the revision of Section 7.5 of Regulation (EU) No 454/2011 (TAP TSI) |
|
(5) |
Section 7.5 of Annex I to Regulation (EU) No 454/2011 related to TAP TSI should be amended accordingly. |
|
(6) |
The list of the relevant technical documents referenced in TAP TSI should be updated. |
|
(7) |
The measures provided for in this Regulation are in accordance with the opinion of the Committee established in accordance with Article 51(1) of Directive (EU) 2016/797, |
HAS ADOPTED THIS REGULATION:
Article 1
Section 7.5 of Annex I to Commission Regulation (EU) No 454/2011 (TAP TSI) is replaced by the text in Annex I to this Regulation.
Article 2
Annex III to Commission Regulation (EU) No 454/2011 is replaced by the text in Annex II to this Regulation.
Article 3
This Regulation shall enter into force on the twentieth day following that of its publication in the Official Journal of the European Union.
This Regulation shall be binding in its entirety and directly applicable in all Member States.
Done at Brussels, 16 May 2019.
For the Commission
The President
Jean-Claude JUNCKER
(1) OJ L 138, 26.5.2016, p. 44.
(2) Regulation (EU) 2016/796 of the European Parliament and of the Council of 11 May 2016 on the European Union Agency for Railways and repealing Regulation (EC) No 881/2004 (OJ L 138, 26.5.2016, p. 1).
(3) Commission Delegated Decision (EU) 2017/1474 of 8 June 2017 supplementing Directive (EU) 2016/797 of the European Parliament and of the Council with regard to specific objectives for the drafting, adoption and review of technical specifications for interoperability (OJ L 210, 15.8.2017, p. 5).
(4) Commission Regulation (EU) No 454/2011 of 5 May 2011 on the technical specification for interoperability relating to the subsystem ‘telematics applications for passenger services’ of the trans-European rail system (OJ L 123, 12.5.2011, p. 11).
ANNEX I
Section 7.5 of Annex I to Commission Regulation (EU) No 454/2011 is replaced by the following:
‘7.5. Change Management
7.5.1. Change Management Process
Change management procedures shall be designed to ensure that the costs and benefits of change are properly analysed and that changes are implemented in a controlled way. These procedures shall be defined, put in place, supported and managed by the Agency and shall include:
|
— |
the identification of the technical constraints underpinning the change, |
|
— |
a statement of who takes responsibility for the change implementation procedures, |
|
— |
the procedure for validating the changes to be implemented, |
|
— |
the policy for change management, release, migration and roll-out, |
|
— |
the definition of the responsibilities for the management of the detailed specifications and for both its quality assurance and configuration management. |
The Change Control Board (CCB) shall be composed of the Agency, rail sector representative bodies, a ticket vendor representative body, a passenger representative body and Member States. Such an affiliation of the parties shall ensure a perspective on the changes that are to be made and an overall assessment of their implications. The CCB ultimately shall be brought under the aegis of the Agency.
7.5.2. Specific Change Management Process for documents listed in Annex III to this Regulation
The change control management for the documents listed in Annex III to this Regulation shall be established by the Agency in accordance with the following criteria:
|
1. |
The change requests affecting the documents are submitted either via the Member States or via the representative bodies from the railway sector acting on a European level as defined in Article 38(4) of Regulation (EU) 2016/796 of the European Parliament and of the Council (*1), or the ticket vendors' representative or via the International Union of Railways (UIC) for error corrections in relation to specifications originally developed by UIC or via the TAP TSI Steering Committee. |
|
2. |
The Agency shall gather and store the change requests. |
|
3. |
The Agency shall present the change requests to the dedicated ERA working party, which will evaluate them and prepare a proposal accompanied by an economic evaluation, where appropriate. |
|
4. |
Afterwards the Agency shall present each change request and the associated proposal to the change control board that will or will not validate or postpone the change request. |
|
5. |
If the change request is not validated, the Agency shall send back to the requester either the reason for the rejection or a request for additional information about the draft change request. |
|
6. |
If the change request is validated, the technical document shall be amended. |
|
7. |
If no consensus about the validation of a change request can be reached, the Agency shall submit to the Commission a recommendation to update the documents listed in Annex III together with the draft new version of the document, the change requests and their economic evaluation and shall make these documents available on their web site. |
|
8. |
The new version of the technical document with the validated change requests shall be made available at the site of the Agency. The Agency will keep the Member States informed via the Committee established in accordance with Article 29(1) of Directive 2008/57/EC. |
|
9. |
If a change request would require a change of the legal text of the TAP TSI, the Agency shall send a request to the European commission to request a revision of the TAP TSI and/or request the technical opinion from the Agency. |
Where change control management affects elements which are in common use within the TAF TSI, the changes shall be made so as to remain compliant to the implemented TAF TSI in order to achieve optimum synergies.
(*1) Regulation (EU) 2016/796 of the European Parliament and of the Council of 11 May 2016 on the European Union Agency for Railways and repealing Regulation (EC) No 881/2004 (OJ L 138, 26.5.2016, p. 1).’ ’
ANNEX II
Annex III to Regulation (EU) No 454/2011 is replaced by the following:
‘ANNEX III
List of technical documents
|
No |
Reference |
Title |
|
1 |
B.1 |
Computer generation and exchange of tariff data meant for international or foreign sales — NRT tickets |
|
2 |
B.2 |
Computer generation and exchange of tariff data meant for international and foreign sales — Integrated Reservation Tickets (IRT) |
|
3 |
B.3 |
Computer generation and exchange of data meant for international or foreign sales — Special offers |
|
4 |
B.4 |
Implementation guide for EDIFACT messages covering timetable data exchange |
|
5 |
B.5 |
Electronic reservation of seats/berths and electronic production of travel documents — Exchange of messages |
|
6 |
B.6 |
Electronic seat/berth reservation and electronic production of transport documents (RCT2 standards) |
|
7 |
B.7 |
International Rail ticket for Home Printing |
|
8 |
B.8 |
Standard numerical coding for railway undertakings, infrastructure managers and other companies involved in rail-transport chains |
|
9 |
B.9 |
Standard numerical coding of locations |
|
10 |
B.10 |
Electronic reservation of assistance for persons with reduced mobility — Exchange of messages |
|
12 |
B.30 |
Schema — messages/datasets catalogue needed for the RU/IM communication of TAP TSI |
|
27.5.2019 |
EN |
Official Journal of the European Union |
LI 139/108 |
COMMISSION IMPLEMENTING REGULATION (EU) 2019/776
of 16 May 2019
amending Commission Regulations (EU) No 321/2013, (EU) No 1299/2014, (EU) No 1301/2014, (EU) No 1302/2014, (EU) No 1303/2014 and (EU) 2016/919 and Commission Implementing Decision 2011/665/EU as regards the alignment with Directive (EU) 2016/797 of the European Parliament and of the Council and the implementation of specific objectives set out in Commission Delegated Decision (EU) 2017/1474
(Text with EEA relevance)
THE EUROPEAN COMMISSION,
Having regard to the Treaty on the Functioning of the European Union,
Having regard to Directive (EU) 2016/797 of the European Parliament and of the Council of 11 May 2016 on the interoperability of the rail system within the European Union (1), and in particular Articles 5(11) and 48(2) thereof,
Whereas:
|
(1) |
In accordance with Article 19 of Regulation (EU) 2016/796 of the European Parliament and of the Council (2) the European Union Agency for Railways (the ‘Agency’) is required to address recommendations to the Commission on the technical specifications for interoperability (TSIs) and their revision and to ensure that TSIs are adapted to technical progress, market trends and social requirements. |
|
(2) |
TSIs should be amended in order to indicate provisions applicable to existing subsystems and vehicles, in particular in the event of their upgrading and renewal as well as to indicate the parameters of the vehicles and fixed subsystems to be checked by the railway undertaking to ensure compatibility between vehicles and the routes on which they are to be operated and the procedures to be applied to check those parameters after the vehicle authorisation for placing on the market and before the first use of the vehicle. |
|
(3) |
Commission Delegated Decision (EU) 2017/1474 (3) sets out specific objectives for the drafting, adoption and review of TSIs. On 22 September 2017, the Commission asked the Agency to prepare recommendations implementing a number of those objectives. |
|
(4) |
Under Decision (EU) 2017/1474, TSIs should be reviewed in order to take into account developments of the Union railway system relating to research and innovation activities, and update references to standards. |
|
(5) |
Furthermore TSIs should be reviewed in order to close the remaining open points. In particular, open points as regards specifications on the design of track to be compatible with the use of eddy current brake and the minimum factor for traffic codes should be closed in Commission Regulation (EU) No 1299/2014 (4). Open points as regards specifications on aerodynamic effects, passive safety and variable gauge systems and braking systems should be closed in Commission Regulation (EU) No 1302/2014 (5). Open points as regards specifications on test conditions for on-track tests and variable gauge systems should be closed in Commission Regulation (EU) No 321/2013 (6). |
|
(6) |
Decision (EU) 2017/1474 also sets out specific objectives applicable to the TSI relating to the subsystem ‘rolling stock — locomotives and passenger rolling stock’ and the TSI relating to the subsystem ‘rolling stock — freight wagons’. In particular the provisions on automatic variable gauge systems should be reviewed and access to passenger coaches, the authorisation of passenger vehicles in large areas of use and the composition of passenger trains should be facilitated. |
|
(7) |
Certain components for which a single failure has potential to lead directly to a serious accident are critical for the safety of the rail system and should be labelled as ‘safety-critical’ on a case-by-case basis. The manufacturer should identify safety-critical components in the vehicle maintenance file. |
|
(8) |
Trackside and on-board investments should be protected by guaranteeing compatibility and stability of the specifications of the European rail traffic management system (ERTMS), giving legal and technical certainty that a compliant Baseline 3 ERTMS on-board unit can safely run on compliant ERTMS line with an acceptable level of performance. In order to keep pace with technological progress and encourage modernisation such as ERTMS game changers, as specified in the Agency's report on ERTMS longer-term perspective (ERA-REP-150), their implementation should, under certain conditions, be allowed. Where the Agency issues draft released specifications of ERTMS game changers before the planned legal release in 2022, suppliers and early implementers should use the specifications in their pilot phase, provided that any Baseline 3 on-board unit can safely run on any infrastructure implementing a game changer. |
|
(9) |
On the basis of the system architecture research and innovation work of the Shift2Rail Joint Undertaking, the Agency work on the game changer related to the evolution of the radio communication system aims at proposing solutions that would allow independent life cycle management for the radio communication system and the train protection system, while facilitating the integration of the new radio communication system with the European Train Control system (ETCS) on-boards that follow the set#3 of specifications listed in Table 2.3 of Annex A to Commission Regulation (EU) 2016/919 (7). |
|
(10) |
Even a successful certification process cannot always exclude that, when an on-board CCS subsystem interacts with a trackside CCS subsystem, one of the subsystems repeatedly fails to function or perform as intended under certain conditions. This may be due to variance in national control-command and signalling equipment (e.g. interlockings), engineering and operational rules, deficiencies in the specifications, different interpretations, design errors or equipment being installed incorrectly. Therefore, checks might need to be carried out to demonstrate the technical compatibility of the control-command and signalling subsystems in the area of use for a vehicle. The necessity of these checks should be considered as a temporary measure to increase the confidence on the technical compatibility between the subsystems. In addition, Regulation (EU) 2016/919 should specify the procedure for those checks. In particular, the principles applicable to those checks should be transparent and prepare the ground for further harmonisation. The possibility of executing those checks in a laboratory representing the trackside configuration to be made available by the Infrastructure Manager should be prioritised. |
|
(11) |
To limit to a minimum the checks each Member State should promote harmonisation within its infrastructure. Following this principle, only one single set of compatibility checks for radio (one for voice transmission and another one for data transmission), if at all needed, should be requested per Member State. |
|
(12) |
Consideration should be given on the necessary steps in the shortest possible time to increase the confidence on the technical compatibility and to reduce and eliminate the tests or checks to prove technical compatibility of on-board units with different European rail traffic management system trackside implementations. Therefore, the Agency should assess the underlying technical divergences and define the necessary steps to eliminate the tests or checks to prove technical compatibility of on-board units with different trackside implementations. |
|
(13) |
Certain TSIs may provide transitional measures in order to keep the railway sector competitive and to prevent undue costs triggered by too frequent changes in the legal framework. Such transitional measures apply to contracts in course of performance and to projects at an advanced stage of development on the date of application of the relevant TSI. As long as these transitional measures apply, requests for application of Article 7(1) of Directive 2016/797/EC should not be needed. Once these transitional measures expire, applicants requesting non-application of TSIs or part of them should do so pursuant to Article 7(1) of Directive (EU) 2016/797. Such requests should however only in duly justified cases be based on Article 7(1)(a) of Directive 2016/797/EC. |
|
(14) |
Directive (EU) 2016/797 and Commission Implementing Regulation (EU) 2018/545 (8) set out the Agency's role as authorising entity. In addition, Implementing Regulation (EU) 2018/545 sets out the procedure applicable in the event of a change to existing vehicle types, in particular for the creation of versions of a vehicle type and versions of a vehicle type variant. The Agency's role in registering data in the European register of authorised types of railway vehicles (ERATV) and the tasks of authorising entities as regards versions of a vehicle type and versions of a vehicle type variant should be adapted accordingly. |
|
(15) |
Regulations (EU) No 321/2013, (EU) No 1302/2014, and (EU) 2016/919 should take into account changes in the procedure for placing mobile subsystems on the market, as provided for in Articles 20 to 26 of Directive (EU) 2016/797. Those TSIs should therefore list the basic design characteristics used to identify the vehicle type and set out requirements regarding changes that impact them. The list of ERATV parameters should be amended accordingly. |
|
(16) |
Under Decision (EU) 2017/1474, TSIs should indicate whether it is necessary to re-notify the conformity assessment bodies that were notified on the basis of a previous version of the TSI and whether a simplified notification process should be applied. This Regulation brings about limited changes and it should not be necessary to re-notify bodies notified on the basis of a previous version of the TSIs. |
|
(17) |
This Regulation amends TSIs so as to further achieve interoperability within the Union rail system, improve and develop international rail transport, contribute to the progressive creation of the internal market and complement TSIs in view of covering essential requirements. It enables to achieve the objectives and to meet the essential requirements of Directive 2008/57/EC of the European Parliament and of the Council (9) and Directive (EU) 2016/797. Therefore this Regulation should be directly applicable in all Member States including Member States which have notified the Agency and the Commission under Article 57(2) of Directive (EU) 2016/797 that they have extended the transposition period and thus continue to apply Directive 2008/57/EC until 15 June 2020 at the latest. Notified Bodies exercising under Directive 2008/57/EC in the Member States that have extended the transposition period should be able to issue ‘EC’ certificate in accordance with this Regulation as long as Directive 2008/57/EC applies in the Member State where they are established. |
|
(18) |
On 17 December 2015, 6 January 2016 and 14 November 2017, the Agency issued three recommendations to amend Regulation (EU) No 1302/2014 covering the conditions for having an authorisation for placing on the market not limited to particular national networks, the closing of open-points, requirements regarding safety critical components and the revision of provisions on automatic variable gauge systems. |
|
(19) |
On 11 April 2016, the Agency issued a recommendation on the amendment to Regulation (EU) No 321/2013 covering the closing of open-points. |
|
(20) |
On 4 October 2017, the Agency issued a recommendation on the amendment to Regulation (EU) No 1299/2014 covering the closing of open-points. |
|
(21) |
On 19 July 2018, the Agency issued a recommendation on the amendment to Regulations (EU) No 321/2013 and (EU) No 1302/2014 and Commission Implementing Decision 2011/665/EU (10) covering the changes in the procedure for placing mobile subsystems on the market, including the checking of vehicle-route compatibility after the vehicle authorisation and before the first use of authorised vehicles and provisions applicable to existing subsystems and vehicles, in particular in the event of their upgrading and renewal. |
|
(22) |
On 19 October 2018, the Agency issued a recommendation on the amendment to Regulation (EU) 2016/919 covering the changes in the procedure for placing mobile subsystems on the market, including the checking of vehicle-route compatibility before the first use of authorised vehicles and provisions applicable to existing subsystems and vehicles, in particular in the event of their upgrading and renewal. |
|
(23) |
On 15 November 2018, the Agency issued a recommendation on the amendment to Regulation (EU) No 1303/2014 covering the changes to align that Regulation with Directive (EU) 2016/797. |
|
(24) |
On 29 November 2018, the Agency issued a recommendation on the amendment to Regulations (EU) No 1299/2014 and (EU) No 1301/2014 covering the changes to align those Regulations with Directive (EU) 2016/797. |
|
(25) |
Regulation (EU) No 321/2013, Regulation (EU) No 1299/2014, Regulation (EU) No 1301/2014, Regulation (EU) No 1302/2014, Regulation (EU) No 1303/2014, Regulation (EU) 2016/919 and Implementing Decision 2011/665/EU should therefore be amended accordingly. |
|
(26) |
The measures provided for in this Regulation are in accordance with the opinion of the Committee established in accordance with Article 51(1) of Directive (EU) 2016/797, |
HAS ADOPTED THIS REGULATION:
Article 1
Regulation (EU) No 321/2013 is amended as follows:
|
(1) |
in Article 2(1), the reference to ‘point 2.7 of Annex II to Directive 2008/57/EC’ is replaced by a reference to ‘point 2.7 of Annex II to Directive (EU) 2016/797 of the European Parliament and of the Council (*)
|
|
(2) |
in Article 3, the second subparagraph is amended as follows:
|
|
(3) |
Article 4 is amended as follows:
|
|
(4) |
Article 5 is amended as follows:
|
|
(5) |
Article 8 is amended as follows:
|
|
(6) |
Article 8a is amended as follows:
|
|
(7) |
Article 8 c is amended as follows:
|
|
(8) |
Article 9 is amended as follows: ‘The declaration of verification and/or conformity to type of a new vehicle established in accordance with Decision 2006/861/EC shall be considered valid until the end of a transition period ending on 1 January 2017.’; |
|
(9) |
Article 10a is amended as follows:
|
|
(10) |
the Annex is amended in accordance with Annex I to this Regulation. |
Article 2
Regulation (EU) No 1299/2014 is amended as follows:
|
(1) |
Article 2 is amended as follows:
|
|
(2) |
Article 3 is amended as follows:
|
|
(3) |
in Article 4, paragraph 1 is replaced by the following: ‘1. With regard to specific cases listed in Section 7.7 of the Annex, the conditions to be met for the verification of the essential requirements set out in Annex III to Directive (EU) 2016/797 shall be those laid down in Section 7.7 of the Annex or by national rules in force in the Member State which authorises the placing in service of the subsystem covered by this Regulation’; |
|
(4) |
point (c) of paragraph 2 of Article 4 is replaced by the following:
|
|
(5) |
Article 7(3) is amended as follows;
|
|
(6) |
in Article 9, paragraph 2 is deleted; |
|
(7) |
Article 10 is amended as follows:
|
|
(8) |
the Annex is amended in accordance with Annex II to this Regulation. |
Article 3
Regulation (EU) No 1301/2014 is amended as follows:
|
(1) |
Article 2 is amended as follows:
|
|
(2) |
Article 4 is amended as follows:
|
|
(3) |
Article 7(3) is amended as follows:
|
|
(4) |
in Article 9, paragraph 2 is deleted; |
|
(5) |
Article 10 is amended as follows:
|
|
(6) |
the Annex is amended in accordance with Annex III to this Regulation. |
Article 4
Regulation (EU) No 1302/2014 is amended as follows:
|
(1) |
in Article 2(1), the reference to ‘point 2.7 of Annex II to Directive 2008/57/EC’ is replaced by a reference to ‘point 2.7 of Annex II to Directive (EU) 2016/797 of the European Parliament and of the Council (*)
|
|
(2) |
in Article 3, paragraph 2 is replaced by the following: ‘2. The TSI shall not apply to existing rolling stock of the rail system in the Union which is already placed in service on all or part of the network of any Member State on 1 January 2015, except when it is subject to renewal or upgrading in accordance with Section 7.1.2 of the Annex.’; |
|
(3) |
Article 4 is amended as follows:
|
|
(4) |
in Article 5, paragraph 1 is replaced by the following: ‘1. With regard to specific cases listed in Section 7.3 of the Annex, the conditions to be met for the verification of the essential requirements set out in Annex III to Directive (EU) 2016/797 shall be those laid down in Section 7.3 of the Annex or by national rules in force in the Member States which are part of the area of use of the vehicles covered by this Regulation’; |
|
(5) |
point (c) of paragraph 2 of Article 5 is replaced by the following:
|
|
(6) |
Article 8(3) is amended as follows:
|
|
(7) |
in Article 9, the references to ‘Articles 16 to 18 of Directive 2008/57/EC’ and ‘Article 26 of Directive 2008/57/EC’ are replaced by references to ‘Articles 13 to 15 of Directive (EU) 2016/797’ and ‘Article 24 of Directive (EU) 2016/797’ respectively; |
|
(8) |
Article 10 is amended as follows:
|
|
(9) |
the following paragraph 3 is added in Article 11: ‘3. Section 7.1.3.1 of the Annex to this Regulation shall not apply for vehicles placed on the market after 31 December 2028. Vehicles placed on the market after that date shall be conform to chapters 4, 5 and 6 of the Annex to the present Regulation.’; |
|
(10) |
the following paragraph 4 is added in Article 11: ‘4. Member States may only in duly justified cases permit applicants not to apply this Regulation or parts of it pursuant to Article 7(1)(a) of Directive 2016/797/EC for projects for which the possibility to apply sections 7.1.1.2 or 7.1.3.1 of the Annex exists or has expired. The application of sections 7.1.1.2 or 7.1.3.1 of the Annex does not require the application of Article 7(1)(a) of Directive 2016/797/EC.’; |
|
(11) |
the Annex is amended in accordance with Annex IV to this Regulation. |
Article 5
Regulation (EU) No 1303/2014 is amended as follows:
|
(1) |
in Article 2, the reference to ‘Annex II to Directive 2008/57/EC’ is replaced by a reference to ‘Annex II to Directive (EU) 2016/797 (*)
|
|
(2) |
Article 4 is amended as follows:
|
|
(3) |
Article 8 is amended as follows:
|
|
(4) |
the Annex is amended in accordance with Annex V to this Regulation. |
Article 6
Regulation (EU) 2016/919 is amended as follows:
|
(1) |
Article 2 is amended as follows:
|
|
(2) |
in Article 3(1), the reference to ‘Article 17(3) of Directive 2008/57/EC’ is replaced by a reference to ‘Article 14 of Directive (EU) 2016/797’; |
|
(3) |
Article 5 is deleted; |
|
(4) |
Article 6 is amended as follows:
|
|
(5) |
Article 9 is amended as follows:
|
|
(6) |
Articles 10 and 11 are replaced by the following: ‘Article 10 Error corrections If errors that do not allow the system to provide a normal service are detected, the Agency shall of its own motion or at the request of the Commission identify as soon as possible solutions to correct them and an evaluation of their impact on the compatibility and stability of the existing ERTMS deployment. In such cases, the Agency shall send to the Commission an opinion on such solutions and the evaluation. The Commission shall analyse the Agency's opinion, assisted by the committee referred to in Article 51(1) of Directive (EU) 2016/797, and may recommend that the solutions specified in the Agency's opinion apply until the next revision of the TSI. Article 11 ERTMS game changers 1. By June 2021, taking into consideration the input from Shift2Rail and the Agency, the Commission shall issue a report on the definition of the next generation communication system. The report shall include the conditions and possible strategies for the migration to that system with due considerations for the coexistence of the system and spectrum requirements. 2. Where the Agency has issued an opinion with the draft release specifications relating to an ERTMS game changer as identified within ERA-REP-150, suppliers and early implementers shall use those specifications in their pilots and shall inform the Agency.’; |
|
(7) |
the following Article 11a is inserted: ‘Article 11a ERTMS compatibility and future revision 1. By 1 June 2020, the Agency shall send a report to the Commission on the implementation of ETCS system compatibility (ESC) and radio system compatibility (RSC). The report shall include an assessment of the differing types of ESC and RSC, and the potential for reducing the underlying technical divergences of ESC and RSC types. Member States shall provide the Agency with the necessary information to complete the analysis. 2. By 1 December 2021, the Commission shall, based on input from the Agency, define the necessary steps to eliminate the tests or checks to prove technical compatibility of on-board units with different ERTMS trackside implementations, in particular to achieve harmonisation of engineering and operational rules at Member State level and between Member States. Member States shall provide the Commission and the Agency with the necessary information to complete the analysis. 3. By 1 December 2020, the Agency shall send a report to the Commission on the potential for including further elements of trackside and vehicle control-command and signalling system architecture, in particular to achieve a future proof design, facilitating the use of state of the art technology and ensuring backward compatibility.’; |
|
(8) |
the following paragraphs 2 and 3 are added in Article 13: ‘2. Member States may only in duly justified cases permit applicants not to apply Section 7.4.2.1 of the Annex pursuant to Article 7(1)(a) of Directive 2016/797/EC for projects for which the possibility to apply section 7.4.2.3 of the Annex exists or has expired. The application of section 7.4.2.3 of the Annex does not require the application of Article 7(1)(a) of Directive 2016/797/EC. 3. Without prejudice to sections 6.1.2.4 and 6.1.2.5 of the Annex, applicants may continue to apply the provisions of the original version of Regulation (EU) 2016/919 (and relevant Agency opinions) when applying for authorisation of:
|
|
(9) |
the Annex is amended in accordance with Annex VII to this Regulation.’. |
Article 7
Implementing Decision 2011/665/EU is amended as follows:
|
(1) |
the following Article 2a is inserted: ‘Article 2a Information to be inserted by the Agency The Agency shall insert in the European register of authorised types of vehicles information on the vehicle type authorisations or vehicle type variants it has granted and on new versions of a vehicle type or of a vehicle type variant in accordance with Article 50 of Commission Implementing Regulation (EU) 2018/545 (*2), as set out in Annex II to this Decision. (*2) Commission Implementing Regulation (EU) 2018/545 of 4 April 2018 establishing practical arrangements for the railway vehicle authorisation and railway vehicle type authorisation process pursuant to Directive (EU) 2016/797 of the European Parliament and of the Council (OJ L 90, 6.4.2018, p. 66).’;" |
|
(2) |
in Article 3, paragraph 1 is replaced by the following: ‘1. Member States shall ensure that the national safety authorities provide the information on the vehicle type authorisations or vehicle type variants they have granted and on the new version of a vehicle type or of a vehicle type variant in accordance with Article 50 of Regulation (EU) 2018/545, as set out in Annex II to this Decision.’; |
|
(3) |
Article 4 is replaced by the following: ‘Article 4 Restriction codes Harmonised restriction codes shall be applicable in all Member States. The list of harmonised restriction codes shall be the list referred to in Commission Implementing Decision (EU) 2018/1614 (*3). (*3) Commission Implementing Decision (EU) 2018/1614 of 25 October 2018 laying down specifications for the vehicle registers referred to in Article 47 of Directive (EU) 2016/797 of the European Parliament and of the Council and amending and repealing Commission Decision 2007/756/EC (OJ L 268, 26.10.2018, p. 53).’;" |
|
(4) |
Annex I is amended in accordance with Annex VIII to this Regulation; |
|
(5) |
Annex II is replaced by Annex IX to this Regulation. |
Article 8
In accordance with Regulations (EU) No 1299/2014 and (EU) No 1303/2014, each Member State shall update its national implementation plan for the INF TSI and SRT TSI. Each Member State shall forward its updated implementation plan to the other Member States and the Commission by 1 January 2020.
Article 9
1. Notifications of conformity assessment bodies for the purposes of Regulations (EU) No 321/2013, (EU) No 1299/2014, (EU) No 1301/2014, (EU) No 1302/2014, (EU) No 1303/2014 and (EU) 2016/919 shall remain valid on the basis of those Regulations, as amended by the present Regulation.
2. Conformity assessment bodies notified in accordance with Directive 2008/57/EC may issue ‘EC’ certificate of verification and ‘EC’ certificate of conformity or suitability for use of interoperability constituents in accordance with this Regulation as long as Directive 2008/57/EC applies in the Member State where they are established in accordance with Article 57(2) of Directive (EU) 2016/797 and until 15 June 2020 at the latest.
Article 10
This Regulation shall enter into force on the twentieth day following that of its publication in the Official Journal of the European Union.
It shall apply from 16 June 2019.
This Regulation shall be binding in its entirety and directly applicable in all Member States.
Done at Brussels, 16 May 2019.
For the Commission
The President
Jean-Claude JUNCKER
(1) OJ L 138, 26.5.2016, p. 44.
(2) Regulation (EU) 2016/796 of the European Parliament and of the Council of 11 May 2016 on the European Union Agency for Railways and repealing Regulation (EC) No 881/2004 (OJ L 138, 26.5.2016, p. 1).
(3) Commission Delegated Decision (EU) 2017/1474 of 8 June 2017 supplementing Directive (EU) 2016/797 of the European Parliament and of the Council with regard to specific objectives for the drafting, adoption and review of technical specifications for interoperability (OJ L 210, 15.8.2017, p. 5).
(4) Commission Regulation (EU) No 1299/2014 of 18 November 2014 on the technical specifications for interoperability relating to the ‘infrastructure’ subsystem of the rail system in the European Union (OJ L 356, 12.12.2014, p. 1).
(5) Commission Regulation (EU) No 1302/2014 of 18 November 2014 concerning a technical specification for interoperability relating to the ‘rolling stock — locomotives and passenger rolling stock’ subsystem of the rail system in the European Union (OJ L 356, 12.12.2014, p. 228).
(6) Commission Regulation (EU) No 321/2013 of 13 March 2013 concerning the technical specification relating to the subsystem ‘rolling stock — freight wagons’ of the rail system in the European Union and repealing Decision 2006/861/EC (OJ L 104, 12.4.2013, p. 1).
(7) Commission Regulation (EU) 2016/919 of 27 May 2016 on the technical specification for interoperability relating to the ‘control-command and signalling’ subsystems of the rail system in the European Union (OJ L 158, 15.6.2016, p. 1).
(8) Commission Implementing Regulation (EU) 2018/545 of 4 April 2018 establishing practical arrangements for the railway vehicle authorisation and railway vehicle type authorisation process pursuant to Directive (EU) 2016/797 of the European Parliament and of the Council (OJ L 90, 6.4.2018, p. 66).
(9) Directive 2008/57/EC of the European Parliament and of the Council of 17 June 2008 on the interoperability of the rail system within the Community (OJ L 191, 18.7.2008, p. 1).
(10) Commission Implementing Decision 2011/665/EU of 4 October 2011 on the European register of authorised types of railway vehicles (OJ L 264, 8.10.2011, p. 32).
ANNEX I
The Annex to Regulation (EU) No 321/2013 is amended as follows:
|
(1) |
in sections 1, 1.3, 3, 4.1, 4.2.1, 4.7, 5.1, 6.1.2.3, the references to ‘Directive 2008/57/EC’ are replaced by references to ‘Directive (EU) 2016/797’; |
|
(2) |
section 1.2 is replaced by the following: ‘1.2. Geographical scope The geographical scope of this TSI is the entire European Union's rail system as set out in the section 1 of Annex I to Directive (EU) 2016/797, taking into account the limitations concerning the track gauge set out in Article 2.’; |
|
(3) |
Section 2 is replaced as follows: ‘2. SCOPE AND DEFINITION OF SUBSYSTEM 2.1. Scope This TSI is applicable to “freight wagons including vehicles designed to carry lorries” as referred to in Annex I Section 2 to Directive (EU) 2016/797 taking into account the limitations as set out in Article 2. In the following this part of the subsystem rolling stock is called “freight wagon” and belongs to the subsystem “rolling stock” as set out in Annex II to Directive 2016/797/EC. The other vehicles listed in Section 2 of Annex I to Directive (EU) 2016/797 are excluded from the scope of this TSI; this is especially the case for:
Note: See also section 7.1 for particular cases. 2.2. Definitions In the present TSI the following definitions are used:
|
|
(4) |
Section 3, row 4.2.3.6.6 of Table 1 is replaced as follows:
|
|
(5) |
Section 4.2.2.2 is replaced as follows:
|
|
(6) |
in the second and third paragraph of section 4.2.3.1, the text ‘EN 15273-2:2009’ is replaced by ‘EN 15273-2:2013+A1:2016’; |
|
(7) |
in section 4.2.3.1, the text ‘GIC1 and GIC2’ is replaced by ‘GI1 and GI2’; |
|
(8) |
in section 4.2.3.2, the text ‘EN 15528:2008’ is replaced by ‘EN 15528:2015’; |
|
(9) |
in section 4.2.3.3, the text ‘Commission Decision 2012/88/EU (1)’ is replaced by ‘ERA/ERTMS/033281 rev. 4.0’; |
|
(10) |
in point 4.2.3.3 the footnote ‘(1) OJ L 51, 23.2.2012, p. 1.’ is deleted; |
|
(11) |
in section 4.2.3.4, the text ‘The specifications of the design and the conformity assessment of on-board equipment is an open point in this TSI.’ is replaced as follows: ‘If the unit is intended to be capable of being monitored by on-board equipment, the following requirements shall apply:
|
|
(12) |
in section 4.2.3.5.2 the text ‘Chapter 5 of EN 14363:2005’ is replaced by ‘chapters 4, 5 and 7 of EN 14363:2016’; |
|
(13) |
section 4.2.3.6.6 is replaced as follows: ‘4.2.3.6.6. Automatic variable gauge systems This requirement is applicable to units equipped with an automatic variable gauge system with changeover mechanism of the axial position of the wheels allowing the unit to be compatible with 1 435 mm track gauge and other track gauge(s) within the scope of this TSI by means of passage through a track gauge changeover facility. The changeover mechanism shall ensure the locking in the correct intended axial position of the wheel. After passage through the track gauge changeover facility, the verification of the state of the locking system (locked or unlocked) and of the position of the wheels shall be performed by one or more of the following means: visual control, on-board control system or infrastructure/facility control system. In case of on-board control system, a continuous monitoring shall be possible. If a running gear is equipped with brake equipment subject to a change in position during the gauge change operation, the automatic variable gauge system shall ensure the position and safe locking in the correct position of this equipment simultaneously to those of the wheels. The failure of the locking of the position of the wheels and braking equipment (if relevant) during operation has typical credible potential to lead directly to a catastrophic accident (resulting in multiple fatalities); considering this severity of the failure consequence, it shall be demonstrated that the risk is controlled to an acceptable level. The automatic variable gauge system is defined as an interoperability constituent (point 5.3.4b) and is part of the interoperability constituent wheelset (point 5.3.2). The conformity assessment procedure is specified in point 6.1.2.6 (interoperability constituent level), point 6.1.2.2 (safety requirement) and in point 6.2.2.4a (subsystem level) of this TSI. The track gauges the unit is compatible with shall be recorded in the technical documentation. A description of the changeover operation in normal mode, including the type(s) of track gauge changeover facility(ies) the unit is compatible with, shall be part of the technical documentation (see also section 4.4 of this TSI). The requirements and conformity assessments required in other sections of this TSI apply independently for each wheel position corresponding to one track gauge and have to be documented accordingly.’; |
|
(14) |
in section 4.2.4.2 the text ‘Commission Regulation (EC) No 352/2009 (1)’ is replaced by the text ‘Commission Implementing Regulation (EU) No 402/20131 (1)’; |
|
(15) |
in section 4.2.4.2 the footnote ‘(1) OJ L 108, 29.4.2009, p. 4.’ is replaced by the footnote ‘(1) OJ L 121, 3.5.2013, p. 8.’; |
|
(16) |
in section 4.2.4.3.2.1, the text ‘UIC leaflet 544-1:2013’ and ‘UIC 544-1:2013’ is replaced by the text ‘UIC 544-1:2014’; |
|
(17) |
in section 4.2.4.3.2.2, the text ‘the minimum parking brake performance’ is replaced by the text ‘the minimum parking brake force’ |
|
(18) |
in section 4.2.4.3.2.2, the text ‘the minimum performance of the parking brake shall be marked on the unit. The marking shall comply with clause 4.5.25 of EN 15877- 1:2012.’ is deleted; |
|
(19) |
in section 4.2.5, the text ‘EN 50125-1:1999’ is replaced by ‘EN 50125-1:2014’; |
|
(20) |
in section 4.2.6.2.1, the text ‘EN 50153:2002’ is replaced by ‘EN 50153:2014’; |
|
(21) |
in section 6.2.2.8.4, the text ‘TS 45545-7:2009’ is replaced by ‘EN 45545-7:2013’; |
|
(22) |
in section 4.2.6.2.2, the text ‘EN 50153:2002’ is replaced by ‘EN 50153:2014’; |
|
(23) |
in section 4.2.6.3, the text ‘chapter 1 of ERA technical document ERA/TD/2012-04/INT version 1.2 of 18.1.2013 published on the ERA website (http://www.era.europa.eu)’ is replaced by ‘Figure 11 of EN 16116-2:2013’; |
|
(24) |
in Table 7 of section 4.3.3, the text ‘Reference Commission Decision 2012/88/EU Annex A, Table A2, index 77’ is replaced by ‘Reference ERA/ERTMS/033281 rev. 4.0’; |
|
(25) |
Section 4.4 is replaced as follows: ‘4.4 Operating rules Operating rules are developed within the procedures described in the railway undertaking safety management system. These rules take into account the documentation related to operation which forms a part of the technical file as required in Article 15(4) of and as set out in Annex IV to Directive (EU) 2016/797. For the safety critical components (see also 4.5), the specific operational and operational traceability requirements are developed by the designers/manufacturers at design phase and through a collaboration between designers/manufacturers and the concerned railway undertakings or the concerned wagon keeper after vehicles have entered into operation. The documentation related to operation describes the characteristics of the unit in relation to the design operating state to be considered in order to define the operating rules in normal and in various reasonably foreseeable degraded modes. The documentation related to operation is composed of:
The applicant shall provide the initial version of the documentation related to operating rules. This documentation might be modified later in accordance with the corresponding Union legislation, taking into account the existing operating and maintenance conditions of the unit. The Notified Body shall verify only that the documentation on operation is provided.’; |
|
(26) |
Section 4.5 is replaced as follows: ‘4.5 Maintenance rules Maintenance is a set of activities intended to keep a functional unit in, or to restore it to a state in which it can perform its required function. The following documents being part of the technical file as required in Article 15(4) of and as set out in Annex IV to Directive (EU) 2016/797 are necessary to undertake maintenance activities on the units:
The applicant shall provide the three documents described in 4.5.1, 4.5.2. and 4.5.3. This documentation might be modified later in accordance with the corresponding EU legislation, taking into account the existing operating and maintenance conditions of the unit. The Notified Body shall verify only that the documentation on maintenance is provided. The applicant or any entity authorised by the applicant (e.g. a keeper) shall provide this documentation to the entity in charge of maintenance as soon as it is assigned for the maintenance of the unit. On the basis of these three documents, the entity in charge of maintenance shall define a maintenance plan and appropriate maintenance requirements at maintenance operational level under its sole responsibility (not in the scope of the assessment against this TSI). The documentation includes a list of safety critical components. Safety critical components are components for which a single failure has a credible potential to lead directly to a serious accident as defined in Article 3(12) of Directive (EU) 2016/798. The safety critical components and their specific servicing, maintenance and maintenance traceability requirements are identified by the designers/manufacturers at design phase and through a collaboration between designers/manufacturers and the concerned entities in charge of maintenance after vehicles have entered into operation. 4.5.1 General documentation The general documentation comprises of:
4.5.2 Maintenance design justification file The maintenance design justification file explains how maintenance activities are defined and designed in order to ensure that the rolling stock characteristics will be kept within permissible limits of use during its lifetime. The file shall give input data in order to determine the criteria for inspection and the periodicity of maintenance activities. The maintenance design justification file consists of:
4.5.3 Maintenance description file The maintenance description file describes how maintenance activities can be conducted. Maintenance activities include, among others, inspections, monitoring, tests, measurements, replacements, adjustments and repairs. Maintenance activities are split into:
The maintenance description file includes the following:
(*1) The maintenance plan shall take into accounts the findings of the ERA Task force on Freight Maintenance (see “Final report on the activities of the Task Force Freight Wagon Maintenance” published on the ERA website http://www.era.europa.eu).’;" |
|
(27) |
in section 4.8, the text ‘GIC1 and GIC2’ is replaced by ‘GI1 and GI2’; |
|
(28) |
a new section 4.9 is added as follows: ‘4.9 Route compatibility checks before the use of authorised vehicles The parameters of the subsystem “rolling stock — freight wagons” to be used by the railway undertaking, for the purpose of route compatibility check, are described in Appendix D1 of Commission Implementing Regulation (EU) 2019/773 (*2) (*2) Commission Implementing Regulation (EU) 2019/773 of 16 May 2019 on the technical specification for interoperability relating to the operation and traffic management subsystem of the rail system within the European Union and repealing Decision 2012/757/EU (OJ L 139 I, 27.5.2019, p. 5).’;" |
|
(29) |
in section 5.3.1, the text ‘The running gear shall be designed for an application range, the area of use, as defined by the following parameters:’ is replaced as follows: ‘The running gear shall be designed for all application ranges, the areas of use, as defined by the following parameters:
|
|
(30) |
in section 5.3.2, the text ‘The wheelset shall be assessed and designed for the area of use as defined by’ is replaced as follows: ‘For the purpose of this TSI, wheelsets include the main parts ensuring the mechanical interface with the track (wheels and connecting elements: e.g. transverse axle, independent wheel axle). Accessories parts (axle bearings, axle boxes and brake discs) are assessed at subsystem level. The wheelset shall be assessed and designed for the area of use as defined by:
|
|
(31) |
in section 5.3.3, the text: ‘— maximum speed and service life, and’ is replaced as follows:
|
|
(32) |
a new section 5.3.4b is added below section 5.3.4a: ‘5.3.4b. Automatic variable gauge system An IC “automatic variable gauge system” shall be designed and assessed for an area of use defined by:
An automatic variable gauge system shall comply with the requirements set out in point 4.2.3.6.6; these requirements shall be assessed at IC level as set out in point 6.1.2.6.’ |
|
(33) |
in section 6.1.2, Table 9, a new row 4.2.3.6.6 is added below the row ‘4.2.3.6.4 Axle’
|
|
(34) |
in section 6.1.2, the following text is added after the last paragraph: ‘In case of a specific case applicable to a component defined as interoperability constituent in section 5.3 of this TSI, the corresponding requirement can be part of the verification at interoperability constituent level only in the case where the component remains compliant to the chapters 4 and 5 of this TSI and where the specific case does not refer to a national rule (i.e. additional requirement compatible with the core TSI and fully specified in the TSI). In other cases, the verification shall be made at subsystem level; when a national rule applies to a component, the concerned Member State may define relevant applicable conformity assessment procedures.’; |
|
(35) |
the section 6.1.2.1 is replaced as follows: ‘6.1.2.1. The demonstration of conformity for running dynamic behaviour is set out in EN 16235:2013. Units equipped with an established running gear as described in chapter 6 of EN 16235:2013 are presumed to be in conformity with the relevant requirement provided that the running gears are operated within their established area of use. The assessment of the bogie frame strength shall be based on clause 6.2 of EN 13749:2011.’; |
|
(36) |
in section 6.1.2.2, the last paragraph is replaced as follows: ‘A verification procedure shall exist to ensure at the assembly phase that no defects may detrimentally affect safety due to any change in the mechanical characteristics of the fitted parts of the axle. This procedure shall contain the determination of the interference values and, in case of press-fitted wheelsets, the corresponding press-fitting diagram.’; |
|
(37) |
in section 6.1.2.5, four instances of text ‘ERA/TD/2013-02/INT version 2.0 of XX.XX.2014’ are replaced by the text ‘ERA/TD/2013-02/INT version 3.0 of 27.11.2015’; |
|
(38) |
a new section 6.1.2.6 is added below the section 6.1.2.5: ‘6.1.2.6. The assessment procedure shall be based on a validation plan covering all aspects mentioned in points 4.2.3.6.6 and 5.3.4b. The validation plan shall be consistent with the safety analysis required in clause 4.2.3.6.6 and shall define the assessment needed in all the following different phases:
Regarding the demonstration of compliance to the safety level required in point 4.2.3.6.6, the assumptions considered for the safety analysis related to the unit the system is intended to be integrated in, and related to the mission profile of that unit, shall be clearly documented. The automatic variable gauge system may be subject to an assessment of suitability for use (module CV). Before commencing in-service tests, a suitable module (CB or CH1) shall be used to certify the design of the interoperability constituent. The in-service tests shall be organised on request from the manufacturer, who must obtain an agreement from a railway undertaking for its contribution to such assessment. The certificate delivered by the notified body in charge of the conformity assessment shall include both the conditions for use as per clause 5.3.4b and the type(s) and operating conditions of the track gauge changeover facility(ies) the automatic variable gauge system has been assessed for.’; |
|
(39) |
In section 6.2.2.1, the text ‘The demonstration of conformity shall be in accordance with Chapters 6 and 7 of EN 12663-2:2010.’ is replaced by ‘The demonstration of conformity shall be in accordance with chapters 6 and 7 of EN 12663-2:2010, or alternatively with chapter 9.2 of EN 12663-1:2010+A1:2014.’; |
|
(40) |
section 6.2.2.2 is replaced as follows: ‘6.2.2.2. The demonstration of conformity shall be carried out in accordance with chapters 4, 5 and 6.1 of EN 14363:2016.’; |
|
(41) |
section 6.2.2.3 is replaced as follows: ‘6.2.2.3.
The demonstration of conformity shall be carried out in accordance with chapters 4, 5 and 7 of EN 14363:2016. For units operated on the 1 668 mm track gauge network, the evaluation of the estimated value for the guiding force normalized to the radius Rm = 350 m according to EN 14363:2016, clause 7.6.3.2.6 (2), shall be calculated according to the following formula: Ya,nf,qst = Ya,f,qst – (11 550 m/Rm – 33) kN. The limit value of the quasi-static guiding force Yj,a,qst shall be 66 kN. Values of cant deficiency can be adapted to 1 668 mm track gauge by multiplying the corresponding 1 435 mm parameter values by the following conversion factor: 1 733/1 500. The combination of the highest equivalent conicity and speed for which the unit meets the stability criterion in chapters 4, 5 and 7 of EN 14363:2016 shall be recorded in the report.’; |
|
(42) |
in section 6.2.2.4, following text is added below the text: ‘It is permitted to use other standards for the above demonstration of conformity where the EN standards do not cover the proposed technical solution; in that case the notified body shall verify that the alternative standards form part of a technically consistent set of standards applicable to the design, construction and testing of the bearings. Only standards that are publicly available can be referred to in the demonstration required above. In the case of bearings manufactured according to a design developed and already used to place products on the market before the entry into force of relevant TSIs applicable to those products, the applicant is allowed to deviate from the demonstration of conformity above and refer to design review and type examination performed for previous applications under comparable conditions instead; this demonstration shall be documented and is considered as providing the same level of proof as type examination according to module SB or design examination according to module SH1.’; |
|
(43) |
a new section 6.2.2.4a is added below section 6.2.2.4: ‘6.2.2.4a. The safety analysis required in point 4.2.3.6.6, and performed at IC level, shall be consolidated at the level of the unit; in particular, the assumptions made in accordance with point 6.1.2.6 may need to be reviewed to take into account the unit and its mission profile.’; |
|
(44) |
in section 6.2.2.5, the text ‘for bogie units: Figure 18 of Annex H of Annex I of UIC leaflet 430-1:2012.’ is replaced by ‘for bogie units: Figure 18 of Annex H and Figures 19 and 20 of Annex I of UIC leaflet 430-1:2012.’; |
|
(45) |
in section 6.2.2.8.1, the text ‘EN 1363-1:1999’ is replaced by ‘EN 1363-1:2012’; |
|
(46) |
in section 6.2.2.8.2, the text: ‘Testing of the materials ignitability and flame spread properties shall be performed in accordance with ISO 5658-2:2006/Am1:2011 for which the limit value shall be CFE ≥ 18 kW/m2. For the following materials and components the fire safety requirements are deemed to comply with the required ignitability and flame spread properties:’ is replaced by ‘Testing of the materials ignitability and flame spread properties shall be performed in accordance with ISO 5658-2:2006/Am1:2011 for which the limit value shall be CFE ≥ 18 kW/m2. For rubber parts of bogies, the testing shall be performed in accordance with ISO 5660-1:2015 for which the limit value shall be MARHE ≤ 90 kW/m2 under the test conditions specified in reference T03.02 of Table 6 of EN 45545-2:2013+A1:2015. For the following materials and components the fire safety requirements are deemed to comply with the required ignitability and flame spread properties:
|
|
(47) |
in section 6.2.2.8.3, the text ‘EN 50355:2003’ is replaced by ‘EN 50355:2013’; |
|
(48) |
in section 6.2.2.8.3, the text ‘EN 50343:2003’ is replaced by ‘EN 50343:2014’; |
|
(49) |
the section 7.1 is replaced as follows: ‘7.1. Authorisation for placing on the market This TSI is applicable to the subsystem “rolling stock — freight wagons” within the scope set out in its Sections 1.1, 1.2 and 2.1, which are placed on the market after the date of application of this TSI. This TSI is also applicable on a voluntary basis to:
In case the applicant chooses to apply this TSI, the corresponding EC declaration of verification shall be recognised as such by Member States.’ |
|
(50) |
the section 7.1.2 is replaced as follows: ‘7.1.2 Mutual recognition of the first authorisation of placing on the market In accordance with Article 21(3)(b) of Directive (EU) 2016/797 the authorisation for placing of the market of a vehicle (as defined in this TSI) is granted on the basis of:
Points (b) and (c) of Article 21(3) of Directive (EU) 2016/797 do not represent any additional requirement. The technical compatibility of the vehicle with the network being covered by rules (TSIs or national rules), this aspect is also considered at the level of the “EC” verification. Therefore, the conditions for having an area of use not limited to particular national networks are specified below as additional requirements to be covered in the EC verification of the subsystem rolling stock. These conditions shall be seen as complementary to the requirements in Section 4.2 and must be fulfilled in their entirety:
|
|
(51) |
section 7.2 is replaced as follows: ‘7.2 General rules for implementation 7.2.1 Substitution of constituents This section deals with substitutions of constituents as referred to in Article 2 of Directive (EU) 2016/797. The following categories have to be considered:
Table 11 shows the possible permutations. Table 11 Substitution permutation table
The word “check” in Table 11 means that the entity in charge of maintenance (ECM) may under its responsibility substitute a component by another one utilising the same function and at least the same performance in accordance with the relevant TSI requirements considering that these components are:
7.2.2 Changes to an existing unit or to an existing unit type 7.2.2.1 This point 7.2.2 defines the principles to be applied by the entities managing the change and authorising entities in line with the EC verification procedure described in Article 15(9), Article 21(12) and Annex IV of Directive (EU) 2016/797. This procedure is further developed in Article 13, 15 and 16 of Commission Implementing Regulation (EU) 2018/545 (*3) and in Commission Decision 2010/713/EC (*4). This point 7.2.2 applies in case of any change(s) to an existing unit or unit type, including renewal or upgrade. It does not apply in case of changes:
The holder of the vehicle type authorisation shall provide, under reasonable conditions, the information necessary for assessing the changes to the entity managing the change. 7.2.2.2 Parts and basic parameters of the unit that are not affected by the change(s) are exempt from conformity assessment against the provisions in this TSI. Without prejudice to clause 7.2.2.3, compliance with the requirements of this TSI or the TSI Noise (Commission Regulation (EU) No 1304/2014 (*5), see clause 7.2 of that TSI) shall only be needed for the basic parameters in this TSI which may be affected by the change(s). In accordance with Articles 15 and 16 of Commission Implementing Regulation (EU) 2018/545 and Decision 2010/713/EU and by application of modules SB, SD/SF or SH1 for the EC verification, and if relevant in accordance with Article 15(5) of Directive (EU) 2016/797, the entity managing the change shall inform a notified body of all changes affecting the conformity of the subsystem with requirements of the relevant TSI(s) requiring new checks by a notified body. This information shall be provided by the entity managing the change with corresponding references to the technical documentation relating to the existing EC type or design examination certificate. Without prejudice of the general safety judgement mandated in article 21(12)(b) of Directive (EU) 2016/797, in case of changes requiring reassessment of the safety requirements set out in clauses 4.2.4.2 for the brake system, a new authorization for placing on the market will be required unless one of the following conditions are met:
National migration strategies related to the implementation of other TSIs (e.g. TSIs covering fixed installations) shall be taken into account when defining to what extent the TSIs covering rolling stock needs to be applied. The basic design characteristics of the rolling stock are defined in Table 11a. Based on these tables and on the safety judgement mandated in Article 21(12)(b) of Directive (EU) 2016/797, the changes shall be categorised as follows:
The determination whether the changes are beyond or above the thresholds mentioned above shall be done in reference to the values of the parameters at the time of the last authorisation of the rolling stock or rolling stock type. Changes not referred to in the paragraph above are deemed not to have any impact on the basic design characteristics and will be categorised as 15(1)(a) or 15(1)(b) of Commission Implementing Regulation (EU) 2018/545, unless the safety judgement mandated in Article 21(12)(b) of Directive (EU) 2016/797 requires to categorise them as 15(1)(d). The safety judgement mandated in Article 21(12)(b) of Directive (EU) 2016/797 shall cover all changes concerning basic parameters of table 1, related to all the essential requirements, in particular the requirements “Safety” and “Technical compatibility”. Without prejudice to clause 7.2.2.3, all changes shall remain compliant with the applicable TSIs regardless their classification. The replacement of a whole element within a rake of permanently connected elements after a severe damage does not require a conformity assessment against this TSI, as long as the element is identical to the one it replaces. Such element must be traceable and certified in accordance with any national or international rule, or any code of practice widely acknowledged in the railway domain. Table 11a Basic design characteristics related to basic parameters set out in the WAG TSI
In order to establish the EC type or design examination certificate, the notified body selected by the entity managing the change is permitted to refer to:
In any case, the entity managing the change shall ensure that the technical documentation which is relating to the EC type or design examination certificate is updated accordingly. The updated technical documentation, related to the EC type or design examination certificate is referred to in the technical file accompanying the EC declaration of verification issued by the entity managing the change for rolling stock declared as conformant to the modified type. 7.2.2.3 The following rules apply, in addition to clause 7.1.2.2, to existing units with a first authorisation for placing in service before 1 January 2015, where the scope of the change has an impact on basic parameters not covered by the EC declaration The compliance with technical requirements of this TSI is deemed established when a basic parameter is improved in the direction of the TSI defined performance and the entity managing the change demonstrates that the corresponding essential requirements are met and the safety level is maintained and, where reasonably practicable, improved. The entity managing the change shall in this case justify the reasons for which the TSI defined performance was not met, taking into account migration strategies of other TSIs as stated in section 7.2.2.2. This justification shall be in the technical file, if any, or in the original technical documentation of the unit. The particular rule set out in the above paragraph is not applicable in changes impacting the basic design characteristics and classified as 21(12)a set out in table 11b. For those changes, compliance with the TSI requirements is mandatory. Table 11b Changes to basic parameters for which compliance with TSI requirements is mandatory for rolling stock not holding an EC type or design examination certificate
7.2.3 Rules related to the EC type or design examination certificates 7.2.3.1 This point concerns a rolling stock type (unit type in the context of this TSI), as defined in Article 2(26) of Directive (EU) 2016/797, which is subject to an EC type or design verification procedure in accordance with section 6.2 of this TSI. It also applies to the EC type or design verification procedure in accordance with the TSI Noise, which refers to this TSI for its scope of application to freight units. The TSI assessment basis for an EC type or design examination is defined in columns “Design review” and “Type test” of Appendix F of this TSI and of Appendix C of the TSI Noise. 7.2.3.1.1 Phase A starts once a notified body, which is responsible for EC verification, is appointed by the applicant and ends when the EC type or design examination certificate is issued. The TSI assessment basis for a type is defined for a phase A period, with a duration of maximum four years. During the phase A period the assessment basis for EC verification to be used by the notified body will not change. When a revision of this TSI or of the TSI Noise comes into force during the phase A period, it is permissible (but not mandatory) to use the revised version(s), either totally or for particular sections, unless explicitly otherwise specified in the revision of these TSIs. In case of application limited to particular sections, the applicant has to justify and document that applicable requirements remain consistent, and this has to be approved by the notified body. 7.2.3.1.2 The phase B period defines the period of validity of the EC type or design examination certificate once it is issued by the notified body. During this time, units may be EC certified on the basis of conformity to type. The EC type or design examination certificate of EC verification for the subsystem is valid for a ten-year phase B period after its issue date, even if a revision of this TSI or of the TSI Noise come into force, unless explicitly otherwise specified in the revision of these TSIs. During this period of validity, new rolling stock of the same type is permitted to be placed on the market on the basis of an EC declaration of verification referring to the type certificate of verification. The updated technical documentation related to the EC type or design examination certificate is referred to in the technical file accompanying the EC declaration of verification issued by the applicant for rolling stock declared as conformant to the modified type. 7.2.3.2 This point concerns interoperability constituents which are subject to EC type examination (module CB), design examination (module CH1) or to suitability for use (module CV) in accordance with section 6.1 of this TSI. The EC type or design examination or suitability for use certificate is valid for a ten-year period. During this time, new constituents of the same type are permitted to be placed on the market without a new type assessment, unless explicitly otherwise specified in the revision of this TSI. Before the end of the ten-year period, the constituent shall be assessed according to the latest revision of this TSI in force at that time, for those requirements that have changed or are new in comparison to the certification basis. (*3) Commission Implementing Regulation (EU) 2018/545 of 4 April 2018 establishing practical arrangements for the railway vehicle authorisation and railway vehicle type authorisation process pursuant to Directive (EU) 2016/797 of the European Parliament and of the Council (OJ L 90, 6.4.2018, p. 66)." (*4) Commission Decision 2010/713/EU of 9 November 2010 on modules for the procedures for assessment of conformity, suitability for use and EC verification to be used in the technical specifications for interoperability adopted under Directive 2008/57/EC of the European Parliament and of the Council (OJ L 319, 4.12.2010, p. 1)." (*5) Commission Regulation (EU) No 1304/2014 of 26 November 2014 on the technical specification for interoperability relating to the subsystem ‘rolling stock — noise’ amending Decision 2008/232/EC and repealing Decision 2011/229/EU (OJ L 356, 12.12.2014, p. 421).’;" |
||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
|
(52) |
in section 7.2.2.2, a new footnote ‘(1) OJ L 356, 12.12.2014, p. 421.’ is added in the same page as text ‘Commission Regulation (EU) No 1304/2014 (1)’; |
|
(53) |
section 7.3.1 is replaced as follows: ‘The specific cases, as listed in point 7.3.2, are classified as:
All specific cases and their relevant dates shall be re-examined in the course of future revisions of the TSI with a view to limiting their technical and geographical scope based on an assessment of their impact on safety, interoperability, cross border services, TEN-T corridors, and the practical and economic impacts of retaining or eliminating them. Special account shall be given to availability of EU funding. Specific cases shall be limited to the route or network where they are strictly necessary and taken account of through route compatibility procedures. In case of a specific case applicable to a component defined as interoperability constituent in section 5.3 of this TSI, the conformity assessment has to be performed according to point 6.1.2.’; |
|
(54) |
section 7.3.2.1a. is added: ‘7.3.2.1a
(“P”) It is permissible for the reference profile of the upper and the lower part of the unit to be established in accordance with the national technical rules notified for this purpose. This specific case does not prevent access of any TSI compliant rolling stock as long as it is also compatible with an IRL gauge (track gauge system 1 600 mm).’; |
|
(55) |
in section 7.3.2.2, the following text is deleted: ‘(b) (“P”) Units intended to operate on the Portuguese railway network shall be compliant with the target and prohibitive zones as set out in table 13. Table 13 Target and prohibitive zone for units intended to be operated in Portugal
|
|
(56) |
in section 7.3.2.3, the text ‘EN 14363:2005 point 4.1.3.4.1’ is replaced by ‘EN 14363:2016 clause 6.1.5.3.1’; |
|
(57) |
in section 7.3.2.3, the following text is added below the text: ‘This specific case does not prevent the access of TSI compliant rolling stock to the national network.’; |
|
(58) |
section 7.3.2.4, ‘’ is replaced by: ‘ (“P”) Base condition for use of simplified measuring method specified in EN 14363:2016 clause 7.2.2 should be extended to nominal static vertical wheelset forces (PF0) up to 250 kN. For technical compatibility with the existing network it is permissible to use national technical rules amending EN 14363:2016 and notified for the purpose of running dynamic behaviour. This specific case does not prevent the access of TSI compliant rolling stock to the national network.
(“P”) For technical compatibility with the existing 1 600 mm track gauge network it is permissible to use notified national technical rules for the purpose of assessing running dynamic behaviour. This specific case does not prevent the access of TSI compliant rolling stock to the national network.’; |
|
(59) |
section 7.3.2.5, ‘’ is replaced by: ‘7.3.2.5
(“P”) For units intended to operate solely on the railway network of Great Britain the characteristics of the wheelsets, wheels and axles may be in accordance with the national technical rules notified for this purpose. This specific case does not prevent the access of TSI compliant rolling stock to the national network.’; |
|
(60) |
section 7.3.2.6, ‘Characteristics of wheels (point 4.2.3.6.3)’ is deleted; |
|
(61) |
section 7.3.2.7 is re-numbered 7.3.2.6. The text of the section is replaced by:
(“P”) The attachment devices for rear-end signals on units intended to be operated only in traffic on networks with 1 600 mm track gauge shall conform with the national rules notified for the purpose. This specific case does not prevent the access of TSI compliant rolling stock to the national network.’ |
|
(62) |
section 7.3.2.7 is added: ‘7.3.2.7.
(“P”) Any change to a vehicle swept envelope as defined in the national technical rules notified for the gauging process (for example as described in RIS-2773-RST) will be categorised as 15(1)(c) of Implementing Regulation (EU) 2018/545, and will not be classified as 21(12)(a) of Directive (EU) 2016/797.’ |
|
(63) |
A new section 7.6 is added as follows: ‘7.6. Aspects that have to be considered in the revision process or in other activities of the Agency Further to the analysis performed during the drafting process of this TSI, particular aspects have been identified as of interest for the future development of the EU railway system. These aspects are identified below. 7.6.1. Rules for extension of area of use for existing rolling stock not covered by an EC declaration of verification Pursuant to Article 54(2) and (3) of Directive (EU) 2016/797, vehicles authorised for placing in service prior to 15 June 2016 shall receive an authorization for placing on the market according to Article 21 of Directive (EU) 2016/797 in order to operate on one or more networks which are not yet covered by their authorisation. Such vehicles shall thus be conform to this TSI or benefit from a non-application of this TSI pursuant to Article 7(1) of Directive 2016/797/EC. In order to facilitate the free movement of vehicles, provisions shall be developed to set out which level of flexibility could be granted to such vehicles as well as to vehicles which were not subject to authorization, as regards compliance with the TSI requirements while fulfilling the essential requirements, maintaining the appropriate safety level, and where reasonably practicable, improving it.’; |
|
(64) |
In Appendix A, the complete text is replaced by ‘Not used’; |
|
(65) |
In Appendix C, condition C.1 ‘Manual coupling system’, the text ‘The clearance for the draw hook shall be in accordance with chapter 2 of ERA technical document ERA/TD/2012-04/INT version 1.2 of 18.1.2013 published on the Agency website (http://www.era.europa.eu).’ is replaced by ‘The clearance for the draw hook shall be in accordance with clause 6.3.2 of EN 16116-2:2013.’; |
|
(66) |
In Appendix C, condition C.1 ‘Manual coupling system’, the text ‘The space for shunting staff operation shall be in accordance with chapter 3 of ERA technical document ERA/TD/2012-04/INT version 1.2 of 18.1.2013 published on the Agency website (http://www.era.europa.eu).’ is replaced by ‘The space for shunting staff operation shall be in accordance with clause 6.2.1 of EN 16116- 2:2013. For manual coupling systems equipped with 550 mm wide buffers the calculation of the free space may be done considering that the coupling gear components are lateral centrally positioned (D = 0 mm as defined in Annex A of EN 16116-2:2013).’; |
|
(67) |
In Appendix C, condition C.2 ‘UIC footsteps and handrails’ is replaced as follows: ‘2. UIC footsteps and handrails The unit shall be equipped with footsteps and handrails in accordance with chapters 4 and 5 of EN 16116-2:2013 and with clearances in accordance with clause 6.2.2 of EN 16116-2:2013.’; |
|
(68) |
In Appendix C, condition C.5 ‘Marking of units’, the following text is deleted: ‘Markings of EN 15877-1:2012 are required where applicable. The following are always applicable:
|
|
(69) |
In Appendix C, condition C.6 ‘G1 gauge’, the text ‘GIC1’ is replaced by ‘GI1’; |
|
(70) |
In Appendix C, condition C.8 ‘Tests concerning longitudinal compressive forces’, the text ‘EN 15839:2012’ is replaced by ‘EN 15839:2012+A1:2015’; |
|
(71) |
In Appendix C, condition C.9 ‘UIC brake’, the text ‘UIC 540:2006’ is replaced by the text ‘UIC 540:2014’ in points (c) and (e); |
|
(72) |
In Appendix C, condition C.9 ‘UIC brake’, the text ‘(i) The pneumatic half coupling’ is replaced by ‘(i) The pneumatic half coupling and its hose’; |
|
(73) |
In Appendix C, condition C.9 ‘UIC brake’, the text ‘(k) Brake block holders shall be in accordance with UIC leaflet 542:2010’ is replaced by ‘(k) Brake block holders shall be in accordance with UIC 542:2015’; |
|
(74) |
In Appendix C, condition C.9 ‘UIC brake’, the point (m) is replaced as follows:
|
|
(75) |
In Appendix C, condition C.9 ‘UIC brake’, the text ‘UIC 544-1:2013’ in row ‘Braking mode ‘G’’ of Table C.3 is replaced by the text ‘UIC 544-1:2014’; |
|
(76) |
In Appendix C, condition C.9 ‘UIC brake’, the text ‘EN 14531-1:2005 section 5.11’ of the footnote (1) of Table C.3 is replaced by the text ‘EN 14531-1:2015 section 4’; |
|
(77) |
In Appendix C, condition C.11 ‘Temperature ranges for air reservoirs, hoses and grease’ is replaced as follows condition: ‘11. Temperature ranges for air reservoirs, hoses and grease The following requirements are deemed to comply with any temperature range indicated in point 4.2.5:
The following requirement is deemed to comply with the range T1 indicated in point 4.2.5:
|
|
(78) |
In Appendix C, condition C.12 ‘Welding’ is replaced as follows condition: ‘Welding shall be carried out in accordance with EN 15085-1:2007+A1:2013, EN 15085-2:2007, EN 15085- 3:2007, EN 15085-4:2007 and EN 15085-5:2007.’; |
|
(79) |
In Appendix C, the following text is added below the text in condition C.16 ‘Tow hooks’: ‘Alternative technical solutions are allowed as far as conditions 1.4.2 to 1.4.9 of UIC 535-2:2006 are respected. If the alternative solution is a cable eye bracket, it shall in addition have a minimum diameter of 85 mm.’; |
|
(80) |
In Appendix C, the following condition C.19 is added: ‘19. Axle bearing condition monitoring It shall be possible to monitor the axle bearing condition of the unit by means of line side detection equipment.’; |
|
(81) |
Appendix D is replaced as follows: ‘Appendix D Mandatory standards or normative documents referred to in this TSI
Standards or documents referred to in the additional optional conditions set out in Appendix C:
|
||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
|
(82) |
In Appendix E, the text ‘The lamp shall display a luminous area of at least 170 mm diameter. The lamp shall display a luminous area of at least 170 mm diameter. The reflector system shall be designed to display a lighting strength of at least 15 candela of red light along the axis of the lighting surface for an angle of opening of 15° horizontally and 5° vertically. The intensity must be at least 7.5 candela of red light.’ is replaced by ‘The tail lamp shall be designed to display a lighting intensity in accordance with table 8 of EN 15153-1:2013+A1:2016’; |
|
(83) |
In Appendix E, the text ‘EN 15153-1:2013’ is replaced by ‘EN 15153-1:2013+A1:2016’; |
|
(84) |
In Appendix F, the row ‘Variable gauge wheelsets’ of Table F.1 is replaced by:
|
(*1) The maintenance plan shall take into accounts the findings of the ERA Task force on Freight Maintenance (see “Final report on the activities of the Task Force Freight Wagon Maintenance” published on the ERA website http://www.era.europa.eu).’;
(*2) Commission Implementing Regulation (EU) 2019/773 of 16 May 2019 on the technical specification for interoperability relating to the operation and traffic management subsystem of the rail system within the European Union and repealing Decision 2012/757/EU (OJ L 139 I, 27.5.2019, p. 5).’;
(*3) Commission Implementing Regulation (EU) 2018/545 of 4 April 2018 establishing practical arrangements for the railway vehicle authorisation and railway vehicle type authorisation process pursuant to Directive (EU) 2016/797 of the European Parliament and of the Council (OJ L 90, 6.4.2018, p. 66).
(*4) Commission Decision 2010/713/EU of 9 November 2010 on modules for the procedures for assessment of conformity, suitability for use and EC verification to be used in the technical specifications for interoperability adopted under Directive 2008/57/EC of the European Parliament and of the Council (OJ L 319, 4.12.2010, p. 1).
(*5) Commission Regulation (EU) No 1304/2014 of 26 November 2014 on the technical specification for interoperability relating to the subsystem ‘rolling stock — noise’ amending Decision 2008/232/EC and repealing Decision 2011/229/EU (OJ L 356, 12.12.2014, p. 421).’;’
(1) Change of the loading characteristics is not to be re-assessed in operation (loading/unloading of the wagon)
(2) The rolling stock fulfilling one of the following conditions are deemed to be compatible with all rail inclinations:
|
— |
Rolling stock assessed according to EN 14363:2016 |
|
— |
Rolling stock assessed according to EN 14363:2005 (amended or not amended by ERA/TD/2012-17/INT) or UIC 518:2009 with the result, that there is no restriction to one rail inclination |
|
— |
vehicles assessed according to EN 14363:2005 (amended or not amended by ERA/TD/2012-17/INT) or UIC 518:2009 with the result, that there is a restriction to one rail inclination and a new assessment of the wheel-rail-contact test conditions based on real wheel- and rail profiles and measured track gauge show compliance with the requirements on wheel-rail-contact conditions of EN 14363:2016 |
ANNEX II
The Annex to Commission Regulation (EU) No 1299/2014 is amended as follows:
|
(1) |
section 1.1 is replaced by the following: ‘1.1. Technical Scope This TSI concerns the infrastructure subsystem and part of the maintenance subsystem of the Union rail system in accordance with Article 1 of Directive (EU) 2016/797. The infrastructure and the maintenance subsystems are defined respectively in points 2.1 and 2.8 of Annex II to Directive (EU) 2016/797. The technical scope of this TSI is further defined in Article 2(1), 2(5) and 2(6) of this Regulation.’; |
|
(2) |
point (1) of section 1.3 is replaced by the following:
|
|
(3) |
section 2.1 is replaced by the following: ‘2.1. Definition of the infrastructure subsystem This TSI covers:
The elements of the infrastructure subsystem are described in point 2.1 of Annex II to Directive (EU) 2016/797. The elements of the maintenance subsystem are described in point 2.8 of Annex II to Directive (EU) 2016/797. The scope of this TSI therefore includes the following aspects of the infrastructure subsystem:
Further details are set out in point 4.2.2 of this TSI.’; |
|
(4) |
in section 2.5, the reference to ‘Directive 2004/49/EC’ is replaced by the reference to ‘Directive (EU) 2016/798’; |
|
(5) |
in section 3, the reference to ‘Directive 2008/57/EC’ is replaced by the reference to ‘Directive (EU) 2016/797’; |
|
(6) |
Table 1 in section 3 is replaced by the following: ‘Table 1 Basic Parameters of the infrastructure subsystem corresponding to the essential requirements
|
|
(7) |
in point (1) of section 4.1, the reference to ‘Directive 2008/57/EC’ is replaced by the reference to ‘Directive (EU) 2016/797’; |
|
(8) |
point (3) of section 4.1 is replaced by the following:
|
|
(9) |
the title of section 4.2 is replaced by the following ‘4.2. Functional and technical specifications of the infrastructure subsystem’; |
|
(10) |
points (1) to (3) of section 4.2.1 are replaced by the following:
|
|
(11) |
in point (7) of section 4.2.1, note (*) of Table 3 is replaced by the following:
|
|
(12) |
point (10) of section 4.2.1 is replaced by the following:
|
|
(13) |
point (c) of point H in section 4.2.2.1 is replaced by the following:
|
|
(14) |
in point K of section 4.2.2.1 the following point is added:
|
|
(15) |
point (5) in section 4.2.4.2 is replaced by the following:
|
|
(16) |
point (4) in section 4.2.4.4 is replaced by the following:
|
|
(17) |
point (3) in section 4.2.4.5 is replaced by the following:
|
|
(18) |
figure 1 in section 4.2.4.6 is replaced by the following: ‘ Figure 1 Railhead profile 1:∞ to 1:16 1 crown of rail 2 tangent point 3 lateral slope 4 vertical axis of rail head 5 gauge corner ’ |
|
(19) |
point (2) in section 4.2.4.7.1 is replaced by the following:
|
|
(20) |
point (2) in section 4.2.6.2.2 is replaced by the following:
(*1) Commission Implementing Regulation (EU) 2019/777 of 16 May 2019 on the common specifications for the register of railway infrastructure and repealing Implementing Decision 2014/880/EU (OJ L 139 I, 27.5.2019, p. 312).’;" |
|
(21) |
Table 11 in section 4.2.7.1.1 is replaced by the following: ‘Table 11 Factor alpha (α) for the design of new structures
|
|
(22) |
section 4.2.10.3 is replaced by the following: ‘4.2.10.3
|
|
(23) |
section 4.2.12.2 is replaced by the following: ‘4.2.12.2 Fixed installations for toilet discharge shall be compatible with the characteristics of the retention toilet system specified in the LOC & PAS TSI.’; |
|
(24) |
point (1) in section 4.2.12.4 is replaced by the following:
|
|
(25) |
section 4.2.12.5 is replaced by the following: ‘4.2.12.5 Refuelling equipment shall be compatible with the characteristics of the fuel system specified in the LOC & PAS TSI.’; |
|
(26) |
section 4.2.12.6 is replaced by the following: ‘4.2.12.6 Where provided, electrical shore supply shall be by means of one or more of the power supply systems specified in the LOC & PAS TSI.’; |
|
(27) |
Table 15 in section 4.3.1 is replaced by the following: ‘Table 15 Interfaces with the rolling stock subsystem, “Locomotives and Passenger Rolling Stock TSI”
|
|
(28) |
Table 16 in section 4.3.1 is replaced by the following: ‘Table 16 Interfaces with the rolling stock subsystem, “Freight Wagons TSI”
|
|
(29) |
Table 19 in section 4.3.4 is replaced by the following: ‘Table 19 Interfaces with the operation and traffic management subsystem
|
|
(30) |
in point (1) of section 4.4, the terms ‘Article 18(3) and set out in Annex VI (point I.2.4) of Directive 2008/57/EC’ are replaced by the terms ‘Article 15(4) and set out in Annex IV (point 2.4) of Directive (EU) 2016/797’; |
|
(31) |
section 4.5.2 is replaced by the following: ‘4.5.2. Maintenance plan The infrastructure manager shall have a maintenance plan containing the items listed in point 4.5.1 together with at least the following:
|
|
(32) |
point (1) in section 4.7 is replaced by the following:
|
|
(33) |
point (b) of point (2) in section 5.3.2 is replaced by the following:
|
|
(34) |
section 6.1.4.1 is replaced by the following: ‘6.1.4.1.
(*2) Commission Implementing Regulation (EU) 2019/250 of 12 February 2019 on the templates for “EC” declarations and certificates for railway interoperability constituents and subsystems, on the model of declaration of conformity to an authorised railway vehicle type and on the “EC” verification procedures for subsystems in accordance with Directive (EU) 2016/797 of the European Parliament and of the Council and repealing Commission Regulation (EU) No 201/2011 (OJ L 42, 13.2.2019, p. 9).’;" |
|
(35) |
in point (1) of section 6.2.1, the reference to ‘Article 18 of Directive 2008/57/EC’ is replaced by the reference to ‘Article 15 of Directive (EU) 2016/797’; |
|
(36) |
point (6) of section 6.2.1 is replaced by the following:
|
|
(37) |
in section 6.2.4 the following point is added after point 6.2.4.14: ‘6.2.4.15. The assessment of the requirements laid down in point 4.2.6.2.2(2) is not required.’; |
|
(38) |
point (3) of section 6.4 is replaced by the following:
|
|
(39) |
in point (2) of section 6.5.2, the reference to ‘Article 17 of Directive 2008/57/EC’ is replaced by the reference to ‘Article 14 of Directive (EU) 2016/797’; |
|
(40) |
the first paragraph in section 7 above section 7.1 is replaced by the following: ‘Member States shall develop a national plan for the implementation of this TSI, considering the coherence of the entire rail system of the European Union. This plan shall include all projects regarding new, renewal and upgrading of infrastructure subsystem, in line with the details mentioned in points 7.1 to 7.7 here below.’; |
|
(41) |
section 7.3.1 is replaced by the following: ‘7.3.1. Upgrading or renewal of a line
|
|
(42) |
section 7.3.2 is deleted; |
|
(43) |
point (4) in section 7.3.3 is replaced by the following:
|
|
(44) |
section 7.6 is replaced by the following: ‘7.6. Route compatibility checks before the use of authorised vehicles The procedure to be applied and the parameters of the infrastructure subsystem to be used by the railway undertaking, for the purpose of route compatibility check are described in point 4.2.2.5 and appendix D1 of the Annex to Commission Implementing Regulation (EU) 2019/773 (*3). (*3) Commission Implementing Regulation (EU) 2019/773 of 16 May 2019 on the technical specification for interoperability relating to the operation and traffic management subsystem of the rail system within the European Union and repealing Decision 2012/757/EU (OJ L 139 I, 27.5.2019, p. 5).’;" |
|
(45) |
in section 7.7, after point (b) and above section 7.7.1, the following paragraph is added: ‘All specific cases and their relevant dates shall be re-examined in the course of future revisions of the TSI with a view to limiting their technical and geographical scope based on an assessment of their impact on safety, interoperability, cross border services, TEN-T corridors, and the practical and economic impacts of retaining or eliminating them. Special account shall be given to availability of EU funding. Specific cases shall be limited to the route or network where they are strictly necessary and taken account of through route compatibility procedures.’; |
|
(46) |
in section 7.7.2.1 the second paragraph is replaced by the following: ‘For platform heights of 550 mm and 760 mm, the conventional value bq0 of platform offset shall be calculated according to the following formulas:’; |
|
(47) |
in section 7.7.8.1 the title ‘’ is replaced by ‘’; |
|
(48) |
point (2) of section 7.7.11.1 is deleted; |
|
(49) |
section 7.7.13.5 is replaced by the following: ‘7.7.13.5. P cases For the nominal track gauge of 1 668 mm, for upgraded or renewed platforms the nominal platform height of 685 mm (general use) or 900 mm (urban and suburban traffic) above the running surface for radii of more than 300 m or 350 m respectively shall be allowed.’; |
|
(50) |
Table 36 in Appendix A is replaced by the following: ‘Table 36 Assessment of interoperability constituents for the EC declaration of conformity
|
||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
|
(51) |
in Table 37 in Appendix B, the row concerning ‘Longitudinal track resistance’ is replaced by the following:
|
|
(52) |
point (c) in Appendix C2 is replaced by the following:
|
|
(53) |
Appendix E is amended as follows:
|
||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
|
(54) |
Appendix F is amended as follows:
|
||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
|
(55) |
the fourth paragraph in Appendix K, immediately above Table 45, is deleted; |
|
(56) |
Appendix L is deleted; |
|
(57) |
the second paragraph of point P3 in Appendix P is modified by the following (normal font): ‘The vertical curve radius Rv is limited to 500 m. Heights not exceeding 80 mm shall be considered as zero within a radius Rv between 500 m and 625 m.’; |
|
(58) |
Table 47 in Appendix Q is replaced by the following: ‘Table 47 Notified national technical rules for UK-GB Specific Cases
|
|
(59) |
Appendix R is replaced by the following: ‘Appendix R List of open points
|
|
(60) |
Table 48 in Appendix S is replaced by the following: ‘Table 48 Terms
|
|
(61) |
index number 4 of Table 49 in Appendix T is replaced by the following:
|
|
(62) |
index number 9 of Table 49 in Appendix T is replaced by the following:
|
(*1) Commission Implementing Regulation (EU) 2019/777 of 16 May 2019 on the common specifications for the register of railway infrastructure and repealing Implementing Decision 2014/880/EU (OJ L 139 I, 27.5.2019, p. 312).’;
(*2) Commission Implementing Regulation (EU) 2019/250 of 12 February 2019 on the templates for “EC” declarations and certificates for railway interoperability constituents and subsystems, on the model of declaration of conformity to an authorised railway vehicle type and on the “EC” verification procedures for subsystems in accordance with Directive (EU) 2016/797 of the European Parliament and of the Council and repealing Commission Regulation (EU) No 201/2011 (OJ L 42, 13.2.2019, p. 9).’;
(*3) Commission Implementing Regulation (EU) 2019/773 of 16 May 2019 on the technical specification for interoperability relating to the operation and traffic management subsystem of the rail system within the European Union and repealing Decision 2012/757/EU (OJ L 139 I, 27.5.2019, p. 5).’;’
ANNEX III
The Annex to Regulation (EU) No 1301/2014 is amended as follows:
|
(1) |
section 1.1 is replaced by the following: ‘1.1. Technical Scope This TSI concerns the energy subsystem and part of the maintenance subsystem of the Union rail system in accordance with Article 1 of Directive (EU) 2016/797. The energy and the maintenance subsystems are defined respectively in points 2.2 and 2.8 of Annex II to Directive (EU) 2016/797. The technical scope of this TSI is further defined in Article 2 of this Regulation.’; |
|
(2) |
points (1) and (2) of section 1.3 are replaced by the following:
|
|
(3) |
in point (3) of section 2.1, section 3 and point (1) of section 4.1, the references to ‘Directive 2008/57/EC’ are replaced by the references to ‘Directive (EU) 2016/797’; |
|
(4) |
section 4.2.11(4) is replaced by:
|
|
(5) |
section 4.4(1) is replaced by:
|
|
(6) |
in point (1) of section 5.1, the reference to ‘Directive 2008/57/EC’ are replaced by the reference to ‘Directive (EU) 2016/797’; |
|
(7) |
section 6.2.1 is modified as follows:
|
|
(8) |
point (c) of Section 6.3.2 is replaced by:
|
|
(9) |
the first paragraph of section 7 is replaced by: ‘Member States shall develop a national plan for the implementation of this TSI, considering the coherence of the entire rail system of the European Union. This plan shall include all projects regarding new, renewal and upgrading of energy subsystem, in line with the details mentioned in points 7.1 to 7.4 here below.’; |
|
(10) |
point (3) in Section 7.2.1 is deleted; |
|
(11) |
section 7.3.1 Introduction is modified as follows: ‘7.3.1 Introduction In case this TSI shall apply to existing lines and without prejudice to point 7.4 (specific cases), the following elements shall be considered:
|
|
(12) |
point (2) in Section 7.3.2 is deleted; |
|
(13) |
a new section 7.3.5 is added: ‘7.3.5. Route compatibility checks before the use of authorised vehicles The procedure to be applied and the parameters of the energy subsystem to be used by the railway undertaking, for the purpose of route compatibility check are described in point 4.2.2.5 and appendix D1 of the Annex to Commission Implementing Regulation (EU) 2019/773 (*1). (*1) Commission Implementing Regulation (EU) 2019/773 of 16 May 2019 on the technical specification for interoperability relating to the operation and traffic management subsystem of the rail system within the European Union and repealing Decision 2012/757/EU (OJ L 139 I, 27.5.2019, p. 5).’;" |
|
(14) |
section 7.4.1 is replaced by the following: ‘7.4.1. General
All specific cases and their relevant dates shall be re-examined in the course of future revisions of the TSI with a view to limiting their technical and geographical scope based on an assessment of their impact on safety, interoperability, cross border services, TEN-T corridors, and the practical and economic impacts of retaining or eliminating them. Special account shall be given to availability of EU funding. Specific cases shall be limited to the route or network where they are strictly necessary and taken account of through route compatibility procedures.’. |
(*1) Commission Implementing Regulation (EU) 2019/773 of 16 May 2019 on the technical specification for interoperability relating to the operation and traffic management subsystem of the rail system within the European Union and repealing Decision 2012/757/EU (OJ L 139 I, 27.5.2019, p. 5).’;’
ANNEX IV
The Annex to Regulation (EU) No 1302/2014 is amended as follows:
|
(1) |
section 1.1 is amended as follows:
|
|
(2) |
sections 1.2 to 1.3 are replaced by the following: ‘1.2. Geographical Scope The geographical scope of this TSI is the Union rail system as set out in Annex I to Directive (EU) 2016/797 and excludes the cases referred to in Articles 1(3) and (4) of Directive (EU) 2016/797.; 1.3. Content of this TSI In accordance with Article 4(3) of Directive (EU) 2016/797, this TSI:
In accordance with Article 4(5) of the Directive (EU) 2016/797, provisions for specific cases are indicated in Chapter 7.’; |
|
(3) |
in section 2.1, the reference to ‘Directive 2008/57/EC’ is replaced by the reference to ‘Directive (EU) 2016/797’; |
|
(4) |
in section 2.2, the text ‘Directive 2008/57/EC, Article 2(c)’ is replaced by the text ‘point (3) of Article 2 of Directive (EU) 2016/797’; |
|
(5) |
in section 2.2.2, the text is replaced by the following: ‘2.2.2. Rolling stock Definitions below are classified in three groups as defined in the section 2 of Annex I to Directive (EU) 2016/797:
|
|
(6) |
section 2.3.1 is replaced by the following: ‘2.3.1 Types of rolling stock The scope of this TSI concerning rolling stock, classified in three groups as defined in the Annex I section 2 of Directive (EU) 2016/797, is detailed as follows:
|
|
(7) |
in chapter 3, the references to ‘Annex III to Directive 2008/57/EC’ are replaced by the reference to ‘Annex III to Directive (EU) 2016/797’; |
|
(8) |
section 3.1 is replaced as follows: ‘3.1 Elements of the rolling stock subsystem corresponding to the essential requirements The following table indicates the essential requirements, as set out and numbered in Annex III of Directive (EU) 2016/797, taken into account by the specifications set out in Chapter 4 of this TSI. Rolling stock elements corresponding to essential requirements Note: only points in section 4.2 which contain requirements are listed.
|
|
(9) |
in section 4.1, the text ‘Directive 2008/57/EC’ is replaced by the text ‘Directive (EU) 2016/797’; |
|
(10) |
in section 4.2.1.1, the text ‘Article 5(8) of Directive 2008/57/EC’ is replaced by the text ‘Article 4(8) of Directive (EU) 2016/797’; |
|
(11) |
section 4.2.1.2 is amended as follows:
|
|
(12) |
point (b-2) of section 4.2.2.2.3 is replaced as follows: ‘(b-2) Compatibility between units On units equipped with manual coupling system of UIC type (as described in clause 5.3.2) and pneumatic brake system compatible with UIC type (as described in clause 4.2.4.3), the following requirements apply:
|
|
(13) |
points (5) to (9) of section 4.2.2.5 are replaced by the following:
|
|
(14) |
in point (1) of section 4.2.2.10, the reference to ‘clause 2.1’ is replaced by ‘clause 4.5’; |
|
(15) |
a new point (2a) is added below point (2) of section 4.2.3.3.2.2 as follows:
|
|
(16) |
point (2) of section 4.2.3.3.2.2 is replaced by the following:
|
|
(17) |
point (3) of section 4.2.3.4.2 is replaced by the following:
|
|
(18) |
point (5) of section 4.2.3.4.2 is replaced by the following:
|
|
(19) |
point (1) of section 4.2.3.4.2.1 is replaced by the following:
|
|
(20) |
point (1) of section 4.2.3.4.2.2 is replaced by the following:
|
|
(21) |
section 4.2.3.5.2.3 is deleted; |
|
(22) |
section 4.2.3.5.3 is added after section 4.2.3.5.2.2 as follows: ‘4.2.3.5.3.
|
|
(23) |
section 4.2.4.8.2 is replaced by the following: ‘4.2.4.8.2.
|
|
(24) |
section 4.2.4.8.3 is replaced by the following: ‘4.2.4.8.3.
|
|
(25) |
point (1) of section 4.2.6.2 is replaced by the following:
|
|
(26) |
section 4.2.6.2.1 is replaced by the following: ‘4.2.6.2.1.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
|
(27) |
section 4.2.6.2.2 is amended as follows:
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
|
(28) |
section 4.2.6.2.5 is replaced by the following: ‘4.2.6.2.5 Aerodynamic effect on ballasted tracks
|
|
(29) |
point (2) of section 4.2.7.1 is replaced by the following:
|
|
(30) |
a new point (5) is added below point (4) of section 4.2.8.2.9.1.1 as follows:
|
|
(31) |
point (1) of section 4.2.8.2.9.2 is replaced by the following:
|
|
(32) |
a new point (2a) is added below point (2) of section 4.2.8.2.9.2 as follows:
|
|
(33) |
section 4.2.8.2.9.3 is re-numbered 4.2.8.2.9.3a; |
|
(34) |
section 4.2.8.2.9.3 is added after section 4.2.8.2.9.2.3 as follows: ‘4.2.8.2.9.3 Pantograph head geometry type 1 800 mm
|
|
(35) |
point (4) of section 4.2.11.6 is replaced by the following:
|
|
(36) |
in section 4.2.12.1, the reference to ‘clause 2.4 of Annex VI of Directive 2008/57/EC’ is replaced by the reference to ‘clause 2.4(a) of Annex IV of Directive (EU) 2016/797’; |
|
(37) |
in section 4.2.12.1, points (2) and (3) are replaced by:
|
|
(38) |
a new point (3) is added below point (2) of section 4.2.12.1 as follows:
(*1) Directive (EU) 2016/798 of the European Parliament and of the Council of 11 May 2016 on railway safety (OJ L 138, 26.5.2016, p. 102).’;" |
|
(39) |
point (4) of section 4.2.12.1 is replaced by the following:
|
|
(40) |
a new point (3a) is added below point (3) of section 4.2.12.2 as follows:
|
|
(41) |
a new point (9a) is added below point (9) of section 4.2.12.2 as follows:
|
|
(42) |
point (2) of section 4.2.12.3 is replaced by the following:
|
|
(43) |
point (3) of section 4.2.12.3 is replaced by the following:
|
|
(44) |
a new point (1a) is added below point (1) of section 4.2.12.3.1 as follows:
|
|
(45) |
a new point (6a) is added below point (6) of section 4.2.12.3.2 as follows:
|
|
(46) |
point (1) of section 4.2.12.4 is replaced by the following:
|
|
(47) |
a new point (3a) is added below point (3) of section 4.2.12.4 as follows:
|
|
(48) |
Table 7 in section 4.3.2 is replaced by the following: ‘Table 7 Interface with the Infrastructure subsystem
|
|
(49) |
a new point (3a) is added below point (3) of section 4.4 as follows:
|
|
(50) |
section 4.5 is replaced by the following: ‘4.5. Maintenance rules
|
|
(51) |
in section 4.7, the reference to ‘Directive 2008/57/EC’ is replaced by the reference to ‘Directive (EU) 2016/797’; |
|
(52) |
in section 4.8, the reference to ‘Article 34(2a) of Directive 2008/57/EC’ is replaced by the reference to ‘point (a) of Article 48(3) of Directive (EU) 2016/797’; |
|
(53) |
a new section 4.9 is added below point (3) of section 4.8 as follows: ‘4.9. Route compatibility checks before the use of authorised vehicles The parameters of the subsystem “rolling stock — locomotives and passenger rolling stock” to be used by the railway undertaking, for the purpose of route compatibility check, are described in Appendix D1 of Commission Implementing Regulation (EU) 2019/773 (*2). (*2) Commission Implementing Regulation (EU) 2019/773 of 16 May 2019 on the technical specification for interoperability relating to the operation and traffic management subsystem of the rail system within the European Union and repealing Decision 2012/757/EU (OJ L 139 I, 27.5.2019, p. 5).’;" |
|
(54) |
in section 5.1, the reference to ‘Article 2(f) of Directive 2008/57/EC’ is replaced by the reference to ‘Article 2(7) of Directive (EU) 2016/797’; |
|
(55) |
a new section 5.3.4a is added below section 5.3.4 as follows: ‘5.3.4a Automatic variable gauge systems
|
|
(56) |
in section 6.1.1, the text ‘Article 13(1) and Annex IV of Directive 2008/57/EC’ is replaced by the reference to ‘Article 10 of Directive (EU) 2016/797’; |
|
(57) |
a new point (3) is added below point (2) of section 6.1.1 as follows:
|
|
(58) |
in the second table of section 6.1.2, a new row is added below the row ‘5.3.4 wheel’ as follows:
|
|
(59) |
a new section 6.1.3.1a is added below point (8) of section 6.1.3.1 as follows: ‘6.1.3.1a.
|
|
(60) |
point (1) of section 6.1.6 is replaced by the following:
|
|
(61) |
in section 6.2.1, the text ‘Article 18 and Annex VI of Directive 2008/57/EC’ is replaced by the reference to ‘Article 15 and Annex IV of Directive (EU) 2016/797’; |
|
(62) |
point (1) of section 6.2.3.3 is replaced by the following:
|
|
(63) |
section 6.2.3.4 is replaced by the following: ‘6.2.3.4.
The parameters described in clauses 4.2.3.4.2.1 and 4.2.3.4.2.2 shall be assessed using criteria defined in the specification referenced in Appendix J-1, index 84.’; |
|
(64) |
point (3) of section 6.2.3.5 is replaced by the following:
(*3) Commission Implementing Regulation (EU) No 402/2013 of 30 April 2013 on the common safety method for risk evaluation and assessment and repealing Regulation (EC) No 352/2009 as referred to in Article 6(3)(a) of Directive 2004/49/EC of the European Parliament and of the Council (OJ L 121, 3.5.2013, p. 8).’;" |
|
(65) |
the second paragraph in point (1) of section 6.2.3.6 is replaced by the following: ‘The evaluation of the equivalent conicity is set out in the specification referenced in Appendix J-1, index 107.’; |
|
(66) |
a new section 6.2.3.7a is added after section 6.2.3.7 as follows: ‘6.2.3.7a
|
|
(67) |
section 6.2.3.13 is replaced by the following: ‘6.2.3.13.
|
|
(68) |
section 6.2.3.14 is replaced by the following: ‘6.2.3.14.
|
|
(69) |
in section 6.2.6, the text ‘Article 18(3) of Directive 2008/57/EC’ is replaced by the reference to ‘Article 15(4) of Directive (EU) 2016/797’; |
|
(70) |
a new section 6.2.7a is added after section 6.2.7 as follows: ‘6.2.7a Additional optional requirements for units intended to be used in general operation
|
|
(71) |
in section 6.3.2, the text ‘Article 17 of Directive 2008/57/EC’ is replaced by the reference to ‘Article 14 of Directive (EU) 2016/797’; |
|
(72) |
in point (1) of section 7.1.1.1, the text ‘OTMs’ is replaced by the text ‘special vehicles, such as on-track machines’; |
|
(73) |
in point (1) of section 7.1.1.2.1, the text ‘in accordance with point (f) of Article 5(3) of Directive 2008/57/EC’ is replaced by the text ‘in accordance with point (f) of Article 4(3) of Directive (EU) 2016/797’; |
|
(74) |
in section 7.1.1.2.1, point (3) is replaced by the following:
|
|
(75) |
in point (4) of section 7.1.1.2.1, the text ‘in service in accordance with Articles 22 to 25 of Directive 2008/57/EC’ is replaced by the text ‘on the market in accordance with Article 21 of Directive (EU) 2016/797’; |
|
(76) |
in point (1) of section 7.1.1.2.2, the text ‘Article 2(t) of the Directive 2008/57/EC’ is replaced by the text ‘point (23) of Article 2 of Directive (EU) 2016/797’; |
|
(77) |
in section 7.1.1.3, the title ‘’ is replaced by the title ‘’; |
|
(78) |
in point (3) of section 7.1.1.3, the text ‘in accordance with Article 24 or 25 of Directive 2008/57/EC’ is replaced by the text ‘in accordance with Article 21 of Directive (EU) 2016/797 against national rules as regards the basic parameters of this TSI’; |
|
(79) |
in point (3) of section 7.1.1.4, the text ‘in accordance with Article 24 or 25 of Directive 2008/57/EC’ is replaced by the text ‘in accordance with Article 21 of Directive (EU) 2016/797 against national rules as regards the basic parameters of this TSI’; |
|
(80) |
in section 7.1.1.4a, the reference to section ‘4.2.8.2.8’ is replaced by the reference to ‘4.2.8.2.8.4’; |
|
(81) |
in point (1) of section 7.1.1.5, the text ‘three years after the date of application of this TSI’ is replaced by the text ‘on 1 January 2018’; |
|
(82) |
in section 7.1.1, a new section 7.1.1.8 is added below section 7.1.1.7 as follows: ‘7.1.1.8 Requirements set out in 4.2.2.5(6) shall not be mandatory during a transition period ending on 1 January 2022 for locomotives with a single “central cab” which, on 27 May 2019, are projects at an advanced stage of development, contracts in course of performance and rolling stock of an existing design as set out in point 7.1.1.2 of this TSI. When the requirements set out in 4.2.2.5(6) are not applied, it is permitted as an alternative method, to demonstrate compliance against the requirement of scenario 3 of 4.2.2.5(5) by demonstrating compliance with following criteria:
|
|
(83) |
section 7.1.2 is replaced by the following: ‘7.1.2 Changes to an existing rolling stock or rolling stock type 7.1.2.1
7.1.2.2
7.1.2.2a
7.1.2.2b.
(*4) Commission Implementing Regulation (EU) 2018/545 of 4 April 2018 establishing practical arrangements for the railway vehicle authorisation and railway vehicle type authorisation process pursuant to Directive (EU) 2016/797 of the European Parliament and of the Council (OJ L 90, 6.4.2018, p. 66)." (*5) Commission Decision 2010/713/EU of 9 November 2010 on modules for the procedures for assessment of conformity, suitability for use and EC verification to be used in the technical specifications for interoperability adopted under Directive 2008/57/EC of the European Parliament and of the Council (OJ L 319, 4.12.2010, p. 1)." (*6) Commission Regulation (EU) No 1300/2014 of 18 November 2014 on the technical specifications for interoperability relating to accessibility of the Union's rail system for persons with disabilities and persons with reduced mobility (OJ L 356, 12.12.2014, p. 110).’;" |
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
|
(84) |
the title of section 7.1.3 ‘Rules related to the type or design examination certificates’ is replaced by ‘Rules related to the EC type or design examination certificates’; |
|
(85) |
section 7.1.3.1 is replaced by the following: ‘7.1.3.1.
Phase A
Phase B
(*9) Commission Regulation (EU) No 1304/2014 of 26 November 2014 on the technical specification for interoperability relating to the subsystem “rolling stock — noise” amending Decision 2008/232/EC and repealing Decision 2011/229/EU (OJ L 356, 12.12.2014, p. 421).’;" |
|
(86) |
Section 7.2 is amended as follows:
|
|
(87) |
Point (2) of section 7.3.1 is replaced by the following:
|
|
(88) |
a new point (6) is added below point (5) of section 7.3.1 as follows:
|
|
(89) |
in section 7.3.2.3, the following text is deleted: ‘ Specific case Portugal (“P”) For units intended to operate on Portuguese network (1 668 mm track gauge) and which depends on track side equipment for axle bearing condition monitoring, the target area that shall remain unobstructed to permit observation by a trackside HABD and its position related to centre line vehicle shall be the following:
Specific case Spain (“P”) For rolling stock intended to be used on the Spanish network (1 668 mm track gauge) and which depends on track side equipment for axle bearing condition monitoring, the zone visible to the trackside equipment on rolling stock shall be the area as defined in EN 15437-1:2009 clauses 5.1 and 5.2 considering the following values instead of the stated ones:
|
|
(90) |
in section 7.3.2.3, the text ‘Specific case Sweden (“T”)’ is replaced by the text ‘Specific case Sweden (“T1”)’; |
|
(91) |
section 7.3.2.4 is replaced by the following: ‘7.3.2.4. Specific case United Kingdom (Great Britain) (“P”) It is permissible for all units and cases to use Method 3 set out in EN14363:2016 clause 6.1.5.3.1. This specific case does not prevent the access of TSI compliant rolling stock to the national network.’; |
|
(92) |
section 7.3.2.5 is replaced by the following: ‘7.3.2.5. Specific case Finland (“P”) The following modifications to the running dynamic behaviour clauses of the TSI applies to vehicle to be operated solely on Finnish 1 524 mm network:
Specific case Ireland and UK for Northern Ireland (“P”) For technical compatibility with the existing network it is permissible to use notified national technical rules for the purpose of assessing running dynamic behaviour. Specific case Spain (“P”) For rolling stock intended to be used on 1 668 mm track gauge, the quasi-static guiding force Yqst limit value shall be evaluated for curve radii 250 m ≤ Rm < 400 m. The limit value shall be: (Yqst)lim = 66 kN. For the normalisation of the estimated value to the radius Rm = 350 m according to clause 7.6.3.2.6 (2) of EN 14363:2016, the formula “Ya,nf,qst = Ya,f,qst – (10 500 m/Rm – 30) kN” shall be replaced by “Ya,nf,qst = Ya,f,qst – (11 550 m/Rm – 33) kN”. Values of cant deficiency can be adapted to 1 668 mm track gauge by multiplying the corresponding 1 435 mm parameter values by the following conversion factor: 1733/1500. Specific case the United Kingdom (Great Britain) (“P”) For technical compatibility with the existing network it is permissible to use national technical rules amending EN 14363 requirements and notified for the purpose of running dynamic behaviour. This specific case does not prevent the access of TSI compliant rolling stock to the national network.’; |
|
(93) |
In section 7.3.2.6, table 21 is replaced by the following table:
|
|
(94) |
In section 7.3.2.6, table 22 is replaced by the following table:
|
|
(95) |
in section 7.3.2.6, below Table 22, the text ‘Specific case Spain (“P”)’ of clause 7.3.2.6 is replaced by ‘Specific case Spain for 1 668 mm track gauge (“P”)’; |
|
(96) |
a new section 7.3.2.6a is added after section 7.3.2.6: ‘7.3.2.6a Specific case Ireland (“P”) In the case of track gauge system 1 600 mm, the minimum curve radius to be negotiated shall be 105 m for all units;’ |
|
(97) |
in section 7.3.2.10, the text ‘clause 7.4.2.8.1’ is replaced by ‘clause 7.4.2.9.1’; |
|
(98) |
section 7.3.2.11 is amended as follows:
|
|
(99) |
in section 7.3.2.11, the text ‘clause 7.4.2.3.1’ is replaced by ‘clause 7.4.2.4.1’; |
|
(100) |
in section 7.3.2.12, the text ‘(“T”)’ is replaced by the text ‘(“T1”)’; |
|
(101) |
section 7.3.2.14, is amended as follows:
|
|
(102) |
section 7.3.2.16, is amended as follows:
|
|
(103) |
in section 7.3.2.20, the text ‘Specific case Italy (“T”)’ is replaced by the text ‘Specific case Italy (“T0”)’; |
|
(104) |
in section 7.3.2.20, the following paragraph is added: ‘Review clause: At the latest by 31 July 2025, the Member State shall deliver to the Commission a report on possible alternatives to the above additional specifications, in order to remove or significantly reduce the constraints on rolling stocks caused by the non-compliance of the tunnels with the TSIs.’; |
|
(105) |
in section 7.3.2.21, the text ‘Specific case Channel Tunnel (“T”)’ is replaced by the text ‘Specific case Channel Tunnel (“P”)’; |
|
(106) |
a new section 7.3.2.27 is added below section 7.3.2.26 as follows: ‘7.3.2.27. Specific case the United Kingdom (Great Britain) (“P”) Any change to a vehicle swept envelope as defined in the national technical rules notified for the gauging process (for example as described in RIS-2773-RST) will be categorised as 15(1) (c) of Commission Implementing Regulation (EU) 2018/545, and will not be classified as 21(12)(a) of Directive (EU) 2016/797.’; |
|
(107) |
a new section 7.5.1.3 is added below section 7.5.1.2 as follows: ‘7.5.1.3. Requirements on aerodynamic effects on ballasted tracks have been set up for units of maximum design speed higher than 250 km/h. As the current state of the art does not allow to provide for a harmonized requirement nor assessment methodology, the TSI allows the application of national rules. This will need to be reviewed in order to consider the following:
|
|
(108) |
a new section 7.5.2.2 is added below section 7.5.2.1 as follows: ‘7.5.2.2. In order to facilitate free circulation of locomotives and passenger coaches, conditions for having an authorization for placing on the market not limited to particular networks have been developed during the preparation of ERA recommendation ERA-REC-111-2015-REC of 17 December 2015. These provisions should be further developed to adapt them to Directive (EU) 2016/797 and to take into account the cleaning up of national technical rules, with particular focus on passenger coaches.’; |
|
(109) |
a new section 7.5.2.3 is added below section 7.5.2.2 as follows: ‘7.5.2.3. Pursuant to Article 54(2) and (3) of Directive (EU) 2016/797, vehicles authorised for placing in service prior to 15 June 2016 shall receive an authorization for placing on the market according to Article 21 of Directive (EU) 2016/797 in order to operate on one or more networks which are not yet covered by their authorisation. Such vehicles shall thus be conform to this TSI or benefit from a non-application of this TSI pursuant to Article 7(1) of Directive 2016/797/EC. In order to facilitate the free movement of vehicles, provisions shall be developed to set out which level of flexibility could be granted to such vehicles as well as to vehicles which were not subject to authorization, as regards compliance with the TSI requirements while fulfilling the essential requirements, maintaining the appropriate safety level, and where reasonably practicable, improving it.’; |
|
(110) |
section 7.5.3.1 is amended as follows:
|
|
(111) |
in the list ‘APPENDICES’ following Chapter 7, the text ‘Appendix A: Buffer and draw gear’ is replaced by ‘Appendix A: Intentionally deleted’; |
|
(112) |
the text of Appendix A is replaced by ‘Intentionally deleted’; |
|
(113) |
section C.3 of Appendix C is replaced by the following: ‘C.3 Running dynamic behaviour The running characteristics are permitted to be determined by running tests or by reference to a similar type approved machine as detailed in clause 4.2.3.4.2 of this TSI or by simulation. The following additional deviations from the specification referenced in Annex J-1, index 16 apply:
Running behaviour can be proven by simulation of the tests described in to the specification referenced in Annex J-1, index 16 (with the exceptions as specified above) when there is a validated model of representative track and operating conditions of the machine. A model of a machine for simulation of running characteristics shall be validated by comparing the model results against the results of running tests when the same input of track characteristic is used. A validated model is a simulation model that has been verified by an actual running test that excites the suspension sufficiently and where there is a close correlation between the results of the running test and the predictions from the simulation model over the same test track.’; |
|
(114) |
Appendix H is replaced by the following: ‘Appendix H Assessment of the rolling stock subsystem H.1 Scope This Appendix indicates the assessment of conformity of the rolling stock subsystem. H.2 Characteristics and modules The sub-system characteristics to be assessed in the different phases of design, development and production are marked by X in Table H.1. A cross in column 4 of Table H.1 indicates that the relevant characteristics shall be verified by testing each single subsystem. Table H.1 Assessment of the rolling stock subsystem
|
||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
|
(115) |
Appendix I is replaced by the following: ‘Appendix I Aspects for which the technical specification is not available (open points) Open points that relate to technical compatibility between the vehicle and the network:
Open points that do not relate to technical compatibility between the vehicle and the network:
|
|
(116) |
Appendix J is replaced by the following: ‘Appendix J Technical specifications referred to in this TSI J.1 Standards or normative documents
J.2 Technical documents (available on ERA website)
|
||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
(*1) Directive (EU) 2016/798 of the European Parliament and of the Council of 11 May 2016 on railway safety (OJ L 138, 26.5.2016, p. 102).’;
(*2) Commission Implementing Regulation (EU) 2019/773 of 16 May 2019 on the technical specification for interoperability relating to the operation and traffic management subsystem of the rail system within the European Union and repealing Decision 2012/757/EU (OJ L 139 I, 27.5.2019, p. 5).’;
(*3) Commission Implementing Regulation (EU) No 402/2013 of 30 April 2013 on the common safety method for risk evaluation and assessment and repealing Regulation (EC) No 352/2009 as referred to in Article 6(3)(a) of Directive 2004/49/EC of the European Parliament and of the Council (OJ L 121, 3.5.2013, p. 8).’;
(*4) Commission Implementing Regulation (EU) 2018/545 of 4 April 2018 establishing practical arrangements for the railway vehicle authorisation and railway vehicle type authorisation process pursuant to Directive (EU) 2016/797 of the European Parliament and of the Council (OJ L 90, 6.4.2018, p. 66).
(*5) Commission Decision 2010/713/EU of 9 November 2010 on modules for the procedures for assessment of conformity, suitability for use and EC verification to be used in the technical specifications for interoperability adopted under Directive 2008/57/EC of the European Parliament and of the Council (OJ L 319, 4.12.2010, p. 1).
(*6) Commission Regulation (EU) No 1300/2014 of 18 November 2014 on the technical specifications for interoperability relating to accessibility of the Union's rail system for persons with disabilities and persons with reduced mobility (OJ L 356, 12.12.2014, p. 110).’;
(*9) Commission Regulation (EU) No 1304/2014 of 26 November 2014 on the technical specification for interoperability relating to the subsystem “rolling stock — noise” amending Decision 2008/232/EC and repealing Decision 2011/229/EU (OJ L 356, 12.12.2014, p. 421).’;’
(*7) The word “Check” means that the applicant will apply Annex I of the CSM on RA in order to demonstrate that the changed vehicle ensures an equal or higher level of safety. This demonstration shall be independently assessed by an assessment body as defined in CSM on RA. If the body concludes that the new safety assessment demonstrates a lower level of safety or the result is unclear, the applicant shall request an authorization for placing on the market.
(*8) The rolling stock fulfilling one of the following conditions are deemed to be compatible with all rail inclinations:
|
— |
Rolling stock assessed according to EN 14363:2016 |
|
— |
Rolling stock assessed according to EN 14363:2005 (amended or not amended by ERA/TD/2012-17/INT) or UIC 518:2009 with the result, that there is no restriction to one rail inclination |
|
— |
Rolling stock assessed according to EN 14363:2005 (amended or not amended by ERA/TD/2012-17/INT) or UIC 518:2009 with the result, that there is a restriction to one rail inclination and a new assessment of the wheel-rail-contact test conditions based on real wheel- and rail profiles and measured track gauge show compliance with the requirements on wheel-rail-contact conditions of EN 14363:2016. |
(1) Clauses of the standard that are in direct relationship to the requirement expressed in the clause of the TSI indicated in column 3.
ANNEX V
The Annex to Regulation (EU) No 1303/2014 is amended as follows:
|
(1) |
in Sections 1.1, 3, 4.1, 4.4 and 6.2.5 the references to ‘Directive 2008/57/EC’ are replaced by references to ‘Directive (EU) 2016/797’; |
|
(2) |
in section 1.1.1(a), ‘European Union rail network’ is replaced by ‘network of the Union rail system’; |
|
(3) |
in section 1.1.3.1 ‘European Union rail’ is replaced by ‘network of the Union rail’; |
|
(4) |
section 1.1.4 is modified as follows: ‘1.1.4 Risk scope 1.1.4.1.
1.1.4.2.
|
|
(5) |
section 1.2 is replaced as follows: ‘1.2 Geographical scope The geographical scope of this TSI is the network of the Union rail system as described in Annex I of Directive (EU) 2016/797 with the exclusion of the cases referred to in Articles 1(3) and 1(4) of Directive (EU) 2016/797’; |
|
(6) |
‘fire fighting point(s)’ is replaced by ‘evacuation and rescue point(s)’ in sections 1.1.1(b), 2.2.1(b), 2.4(c), 4.2.1.7, 4.2.3, 4.4.1(c), 4.4.2(a), 4.4.6; |
|
(7) |
in point (b) of Section 2.2.3, the text ‘panic and to’ is deleted; |
|
(8) |
in point (c) (1) of Section 2.3, the text ‘inside the tunnel’ is deleted; |
|
(9) |
point (f) of Section 2.3 is replaced as follows:
|
|
(10) |
in Section 2.4, a definition (b1) ‘Final place of safety’ is added as follows:
|
|
(11) |
point 2.4(c) is replaced as follows:
|
|
(12) |
a definition (g) ‘CSM on risk assessment’ is added as follows:
|
|
(13) |
section 3 is replaced as follows: ‘3. ESSENTIAL REQUIREMENTS
3.1 Infrastructure and energy subsystems
3.2 Rolling stock subsystem
|
|
(14) |
in section 4.1, ‘European Union rail system’ is replaced by ‘Union rail system’; |
|
(15) |
section 4.2.1.2(b) is deleted; |
|
(16) |
section 4.2.1.3 is replaced as follows: ‘4.2.1.3 This specification applies to all tunnels.
(*1) Commission Delegated Regulation (EU) 2016/364 of 1 July 2015 on the classification of the reaction to fire performance of construction products pursuant to Regulation (EU) No 305/2011 of the European Parliament and of the Council (OJ L 68, 15.3.2016, p. 4).’;" |
|
(17) |
section 4.2.1.4 is replaced as follows: ‘4.2.1.4. This specification applies to all tunnels of more than 1 km in length.
|
|
(18) |
section 4.2.1.5.2(b3) is deleted; |
|
(19) |
in section 4.2.1.5.4, the terms ‘on escape routes’ and ‘as low as possible,’ are deleted and point (c) is replaced as follows:
|
|
(20) |
in section 4.2.1.5.5, point (f), the term ‘cross-passage’ is replaced by ‘cross-passages’; |
|
(21) |
in section 4.2.1.6 point (a), the term ‘top’ is replaced by ‘bottom’; |
|
(22) |
section 4.2.1.7 is modified as follows:
|
|
(23) |
table in 4.2.1.7 is replaced as follows:
|
|
(24) |
in point 4 of point (c) of section 4.2.1.7 is replaced as follows:
|
|
(25) |
a new section 4.2.1.9 is added with the following text: ‘4.2.1.9 This specification applies to all tunnels of more than 1 km length. The electricity supply system in the tunnel shall be suitable for the emergency response services equipment in accordance with the emergency plan for the tunnel. Some national emergency response services groups may be self-sufficient in relation to electricity supply. In this case, the option of not providing electricity supply facilities for the use of such groups may be appropriate. Such a decision, however, must be described in the emergency plan.’; |
|
(26) |
a new section 4.2.1.10 is added with the following text: ‘4.2.1.10 This specification applies to all tunnels of more than 1 km length.
|
|
(27) |
a new section 4.2.1.11 is added with the following text: ‘4.2.1.11. This specification applies to all tunnels of more than 1 km in length.
|
|
(28) |
section 4.2.2.1 is replaced as follows: ‘4.2.2.1. This specification applies to all tunnels of more than 1 km length.
|
|
(29) |
in section 4.2.2.2, the term ‘Overhead line or conductor rail earthing’ is replaced by ‘Earthing of contact line’. The point c and the term ‘operations’ in point b are deleted; |
|
(30) |
section 4.2.2.3 is deleted; |
|
(31) |
section 4.2.2.4 is deleted; |
|
(32) |
section 4.2.2.5. is deleted; |
|
(33) |
in the table in section 4.3.1 the reference to clause ‘4.2.2.4(a)’ is replaced by a reference to clause ‘4.2.1.3’; |
|
(34) |
in the table in section 4.3.2 the terms ‘specific elements for train crew and auxiliary staff’ and ‘4.6.3.2.3’ are deleted; |
|
(35) |
in section 4.4, the terms ‘Article 18(3)’ are replaced by ‘Article 15(4)’ and ‘Annex VI’ is replaced by ‘Annex IV’; |
|
(36) |
section 4.4.2 is replaced as follows: ‘4.4.2. Tunnel emergency plan These rules apply to tunnels of more than 1 km in length
|
|
(37) |
section 4.4.4. is modified as follows: ‘4.4.4. Switching off and Earthing procedures These rules apply to all tunnels.
|
|
(38) |
in Section 4.4.6.(a) the text ‘in the Register of Infrastructure defined in clause 4.8.1 and’ is deleted; |
|
(39) |
in Section 4.4.6.(c) the text ‘panic and’ is deleted; |
|
(40) |
section 4.8 is deleted; |
|
(41) |
section 6.2.5(a) is modified as follows:
|
|
(42) |
Section 6.2.6 is replaced as follows: ‘6.2.6. Assessment of conformity to the Safety requirements applying to the Infrastructure and Energy subsystems
|
|
(43) |
section 6.2.7 is modified as follows:
in section 6.2.7.6, the term ‘installations’ is replaced by ‘systems’ and the reference to clause ‘4.2.2.5’ is replaced by a reference to clause ‘4.2.1.10.’; |
|
(44) |
section 7(b) is modified as follows: the text ‘suitable for safe integration in accordance with Section 15(1) of Directive 2008/57/EC with all non-TSI compliant tunnels within the geographical scope of this TSI.’ is replaced by ‘technically compatible with all non-TSI compliant tunnels within the geographical scope of this TSI in accordance with Article 21(3) of Directive (EU) 2016/797.’; |
|
(45) |
section 7.1.1.(b) is modified as follows: ‘In the latter case Article 24 and 25 of Directive 2008/57/EC apply.’ is deleted; |
|
(46) |
Section 7.2.2 is replaced as follows: ‘7.2.2. Upgrade and renewal measures for tunnels In case of the upgrade or renewal of a tunnel, according to Article 15(7) and Annex IV of Directive (EU) 2016/797, the notified body issues certificates of verification for those parts of the subsystem composing the tunnel under the scope of the upgrade or renewal. 7.2.2.1.
7.2.2.2.
|
|
(47) |
section 7.3.1 is replaced by the following: ‘7.3.1. General
7.3.2. Operational rules related to trains running in tunnels (clause 4.4.6) 7.3.2.1 Additional prescriptions for rolling stock intended to be operated in non TSI compliant tunnels in Italy are detailed in the LOC&PAS TSI, clause 7.3.2.20. 7.3.2.2 Additional prescriptions for passenger rolling stock intended to be operated in the Channel Tunnel are detailed in the LOC&PAS TSI, clause 7.3.2.21’; |
|
(48) |
The table in appendix B is replaced as follows:
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
(*1) Commission Delegated Regulation (EU) 2016/364 of 1 July 2015 on the classification of the reaction to fire performance of construction products pursuant to Regulation (EU) No 305/2011 of the European Parliament and of the Council (OJ L 68, 15.3.2016, p. 4).’;’
ANNEX VI
The Annex to Regulation (EU) 2016/919 is amended as follows:
|
(1) |
Section 1.1 is amended as follows:
|
|
(2) |
Section 1.2 is replaced by the following: ‘1.2. Geographical Scope The geographical scope of this TSI is the network of the whole rail system, as described in Annex I point 1 of Directive (EU) 2016/797 and excludes the infrastructure cases referred to in Articles 1(3) and 1(4) of Directive (EU) 2016/797. The TSI shall apply to networks with 1 435 mm, 1 520 mm, 1 524 mm, 1 600 mm and 1 668 mm track gauges. However, it shall not apply to short border crossing lines with 1 520 mm track gauges that are connected to the network of third countries.’; |
|
(3) |
Section 1.3 is amended as follows:
|
|
(4) |
The first paragraph of section 2.1 is replaced by the following: ‘The Control-Command and Signalling Subsystems are defined in Annex II of Directive (EU) 2016/797 as:
|
|
(5) |
Section 2.2 is amended as follows:
|
|
(6) |
Section 2.3 is replaced by the following: ‘2.3 Trackside Application Levels (ETCS) The interfaces specified by this TSI define the means of data transmission to, and (where appropriate) from trains. The ETCS specifications referenced by this TSI provide application levels from which a trackside implementation may choose the means of transmission that meet its requirements. This TSI defines the requirements for all application levels. For the technical definition of the ETCS application levels see Annex A, 4.1 c.’; |
|
(7) |
Section 3.1 is amended as follows:
|
|
(8) |
Section 3.2.1 is replaced by the following: ‘3.2.1 Safety Every Control-Command and Signalling Subsystems project shall take the measures necessary to ensure that the level of risk of an incident occurring within the scope of the Control-Command and Signalling Subsystems, is not higher than the objective for the service. To ensure that the measures taken to achieve safety do not jeopardise interoperability, the requirements of the basic parameter defined in point 4.2.1 (Control-Command and Signalling reliability, availability and safety characteristics relevant to interoperability) shall be respected. For the ETCS Class A system the safety objective is apportioned between the Control-Command and Signalling On-board and Trackside Subsystems. The detailed requirements are specified in the basic parameter defined in point 4.2.1 (Control-Command and Signalling reliability, availability and safety characteristics relevant to interoperability). This safety requirement shall be met together with the availability requirements as defined in Point 3.2.2 (Reliability and Availability). For the ETCS Class A system:
Additionally the correct application of the risk management process as set out in Annex I of Regulation (EU) No 402/2013, as well as the appropriateness of the results from this application, shall be independently assessed by a CSM assessment body according to Article 6 of that Regulation. The CSM Assessment Body shall be accredited or recognised according to the requirements in Annex II of Regulation (EU) No 402/2013 in the fields of “Control-command and signalling” and “System safe integration” as listed in item 5 “classification” of ERADIS database entry for Assessment Bodies. The application of the specifications as referred to in Annex A, Table A 3 is an appropriate means to fully comply to the risk management process as set out in Annex I of the Commission Implementing Regulation (EU) No 402/2013 for design, implementation, production, installation and validation (incl. Safety acceptance) of interoperability constituents and subsystems. When different specifications from the ones referred to in Annex A, Table 3 are applied, at least equivalence shall be demonstrated with the specifications in Annex A, Table 3. Whenever the specifications as referred to in Annex A, Table A 3 are used as an appropriate means to fully comply to the risk management process as set out in Annex I of the Commission Implementing Regulation (EU) No 402/2013, in order to avoid unnecessary duplication of independent assessment work, the independent safety assessment activities that are required by the specifications referred to in Annex A, Table A 3 shall be carried out by an Assessment Body accredited or recognized as specified in the section above instead of a CENELEC independent safety assessor. (*2) Commission Implementing Regulation (EU) No 402/2013 of 30 April 2013 on the common safety method for risk evaluation and assessment and repealing Regulation (EC) No 352/2009 (OJ L 121, 3.5.2013, p. 8)." (*3) Directive (EU) 2016/798 of the European Parliament and of the Council of 11 May 2016 on railway safety (OJ L 138, 26.5.2016, p. 102).’;" |
|
(9) |
The second paragraph of section 3.2.2 is replaced by the following: ‘The level of risk caused by age and wear of constituents used within the subsystem shall be monitored. The requirements for maintenance stated in point 4.5 shall be respected.’; |
|
(10) |
Section 3.2.5.2 is deleted; |
|
(11) |
A new section 3.2.6 is added as follows: ‘3.2.6 Accessibility No requirements are mandated for the CCS subsystems for the essential requirement accessibility.’ |
|
(12) |
Section 4.1.1 is amended as follows:
|
|
(13) |
In section 4.1.2 the text ‘limiting the movement of TSI-compliant on-board subsystems.’ is replaced by ‘limiting the movement of vehicles with TSI-compliant on-board subsystems.’; |
|
(14) |
Table 4.1 in section 4.1.3 is replaced by: ‘Table 4.1
|
|
(15) |
The title of section 4.2.1 is replaced by ‘Control-Command and Signalling reliability, availability and safety characteristics relevant to interoperability’; |
|
(16) |
Section 4.2.2 is replaced by the following: ‘4.2.2. On-board ETCS functionality The basic parameter for ETCS on-board functionality describes all of the functions needed to run a train in a safe way. The primary function is to provide automatic train protection and cab signalling:
These functions shall be implemented in accordance with Annex A 4.2.2 b and their performance shall conform to Annex A 4.2.2 a. The requirements for tests are specified in Annex A 4.2.2 c. The main functionality is supported by other functions, to which Annex A 4.2.2 a and Annex A 4.2.2 b also apply, together with the additional specifications indicated below:
|
|
(17) |
Section 4.2.3 is replaced by the following: ‘4.2.3. Trackside ETCS functionality This Basic parameter describes the ETCS trackside functionality. It contains all ETCS functionality to provide a safe path to a specific train. The main functionality is:
These functions shall be implemented in accordance with Annex A 4.2.3 b and their performance shall conform to Annex A 4.2.3 a. The main functionality is supported by other functions, to which Annex A 4.2.3 a and Annex A 4.2.3 b also apply, together with the additional specifications indicated below:
|
|
(18) |
In section 4.2.6.3 the reference to ‘4.2.6f’ is deleted. |
|
(19) |
In section 4.2.11 the text ‘Control-Command and Signalling equipment.’ is replaced by ‘Control-Command and Signalling train detection equipment.’ |
|
(20) |
In section 4.2.16 the text ‘by Control-command and signalling On-board Subsystems’ is replaced by ‘by Control-command and signalling On-board Interoperability Constituents and Subsystems’; |
|
(21) |
A new section 4.2.17 is added as follows: ‘4.2.17. ETCS and Radio System Compatibility Due to the different possible implementations and the status of the migration to fully compliant CCS Subsystems, checks shall be performed in order to demonstrate the technical compatibility between the on-board and trackside CCS Subsystems. The necessity of these checks shall be considered as a measure to increase the confidence on the technical compatibility between the CCS subsystems. It is expected that these checks will be reduced until the principle stated in 6.1.2.1 is achieved. 4.2.17.1. ETCS System Compatibility (ESC) shall be the recording of technical compatibility between ETCS on-board and the trackside parts ETCS of the CCS subsystems within an area of use. ESC type shall be the value assigned to record the technical compatibility between an ETCS on-board and a section within the area of use. All sections of the Union network which require the same set of checks for the demonstration of ESC shall have the same ESC type. 4.2.17.2. Radio System Compatibility (RSC) shall be the recording of technical compatibility between voice or data radio on-board and the trackside parts of GSM-R of the CCS subsystems. RSC type shall be the value assigned to record the technical compatibility between a voice or data radio and a section within the area of use. All sections of the Union network which require the same set of checks for the demonstration of RSC shall have the same RSC type.’; |
|
(22) |
Section 4.3 is amended as follows:
|
||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
|
(23) |
In section 4.4 the text ‘Traffic Operation and Management TSI’ is replaced by ‘Operation and Traffic Management TSI’. |
|
(24) |
In section 4.5.1 at the end of point (1) the following text is added ‘For equipment error corrections see point 6.5,’. |
|
(25) |
Section 4.8 is replaced by: ‘4.8 Registers The data to be provided for the registers provided for in Articles 48 and 49 of Directive (EU) 2016/797 are those indicated in Commission Implementing Decision 2011/665/EU (*4) and Commission Implementing Regulation (EU) 2019/777 (*5). (*4) Commission Implementing Decision 2011/665/EU of 4 October 2011 on the European register of authorised types of railway vehicles (OJ L 264, 8.10.2011, p. 32)." (*5) Commission Implementing Regulation (EU) 2019/777 of 16 May 2019 on the common specifications for the register of railway infrastructure and repealing Implementing Decision 2014/880/EU (OJ L 139 I, 27.5.2019, p. 312).’;" |
|
(26) |
A new section 4.9 is added below section 4.8 as follows: ‘4.9. Route compatibility checks before the use of authorised vehicles The parameters of the on-board CCS subsystem to be used by the railway undertaking, for the purpose of route compatibility check, are described in Appendix D1 of Commission Implementing Regulation (EU) 2019/773 (*6). (*6) Commission Implementing Regulation (EU) 2019/773 of 16 May 2019 on the technical specification for interoperability relating to the operation and traffic management subsystem of the rail system within the European Union and repealing Decision 2012/757/EU (OJ L 139 I, 27.5.2019, p. 5).’;" |
|
(27) |
Section 5.1 is replaced by the following: ‘5.1 Definition In accordance with Article 2(7) of Directive (EU) 2016/797, interoperability constituents means any elementary component, group of components, subassembly or complete assembly of equipment incorporated or intended to be incorporated into a subsystem, upon which the interoperability of the rail system depends directly or indirectly, including both tangible objects and intangible objects.’; |
|
(28) |
In section 5.2.2 a new paragraph is added at the end of the section as follows: ‘Compliance of interfaces internal to the group of ICs to basic parameters of Chapter 4 does not have to be verified. Compliance of interfaces external to the group of ICs has to be verified to demonstrate conformity with the basic parameters related to the requirements of these external interfaces.’; |
|
(29) |
Section 5.3 is amended as follows:
|
|
(30) |
Section 6.1 is replaced by the following: ‘6.1. Introduction 6.1.1. General principles 6.1.1.1. Fulfilment of the essential requirements set out in Chapter 3 of this TSI shall be ensured through compliance with the basic parameters specified in Chapter 4. This compliance shall be demonstrated by:
6.1.1.2. In certain cases, some of the essential requirements may be met by national rules, because of:
In such cases, assessment of conformity with those rules shall be carried out under the responsibility of the Member States concerned according to notified procedures. See point 6.4.2. 6.1.1.3. With regard to checking if essential requirements are fulfilled through compliance with the basic parameters, and without prejudice to the obligations set out in Chapter 7 of this TSI, control-command and signalling interoperability constituents and subsystems that do not implement all functions, performance and interfaces as specified in Chapter 4 (including the specifications referred to in Annex A), can obtain EC certificates of conformity or, respectively, certificates of verification, under the following conditions for issuing and using the certificates:
If a control-command and signalling interoperability constituent or subsystem does not implement all functions, performance and interfaces specified in this TSI, the provisions of point 6.4.3 shall apply. 6.1.2. Principles for testing ETCS and GSM-R 6.1.2.1. The principle is that a Control-Command and Signalling On-board Subsystem covered by an “EC” declaration of verification is able to run on every Control-Command and Signalling Trackside Subsystem covered by an “EC” Declaration of verification, under the conditions specified in this TSI, with no additional verifications. Achievement of this principle is facilitated by:
6.1.2.2. For the purpose of this TSI, an “operational test scenario” means a sequence of trackside and on-board events related to or influencing the Control-command and Signalling subsystems (e.g. sending/receiving messages, exceeding a speed limit, actions of operators) and the specified timing between them in order to test the intended railway system operation in situations relevant for ETCS and GSM-R (e.g. entry of a train into an equipped area, awakening of a train, overriding a signal at stop). The operational tests scenarios are based on the engineering rules adopted for the project. Check of compliance of a real implementation with an operational tests scenario shall be possible gathering information through easily accessible interfaces (preferably the standard interfaces specified in this TSI). 6.1.2.3. The set of engineering rules for the trackside parts of ETCS and GSM-R and related operational test scenarios for the Trackside Control-command and Signalling Subsystem shall be sufficient to describe all intended system operations relevant for the Trackside Control-command and Signalling Subsystem in normal and identified degraded situations, and:
6.1.2.4. The Agency shall set up and manage in a technical document the set of checks to demonstrate the technical compatibility of an on-board subsystem with the trackside subsystem. Infrastructure Managers, with the support of the ETCS suppliers for their network, shall submit to the Agency the definition of the necessary checks (as defined in 4.2.17) on their network by 16 January 2020 at the latest. Infrastructure Managers shall classify the ETCS lines according to ESC types in RINF. Infrastructure Managers shall submit to the Agency any changes on the referred checks for their network. The Agency shall update the technical document within 5 working days. 6.1.2.5. The Agency shall set up and manage in a technical document the set of checks to demonstrate the technical compatibility of an on-board subsystem with the trackside subsystem. Infrastructure Managers, with the support of the GSM-R suppliers for their network, shall submit to the Agency the definition of the necessary checks (as defined in 4.2.17) on their network by 16 January 2020 at the latest. Infrastructure Managers shall classify their lines according to RSC types for voice and, if applicable, ETCS data in RINF. Infrastructure Managers shall submit to the Agency any changes on the referred checks for their network. The Agency shall update the technical document within 5 working days. (*7) The template to be used to provide this information will be defined in the Application Guide.’;" |
|
(31) |
Section 6.2 is amended as follows:
|
|
(32) |
Section 6.3 is amended as follows:
|
|
(33) |
Section 6.4 is replaced as follows:
|
|
(34) |
Section 6.5 is replaced by the following: ‘6.5. Management of errors Where deviations from intended functions and/or performance are detected during the tests or during the operational life of a subsystem, the applicants and/or operators shall inform without delay the Agency and the authorising entity that issued the authorisations for the concerned trackside subsystems or vehicles, to initiate the procedures set out in Article 16 of Directive (EU) 2016/797. As a result of the application of Article 16(3) of that Directive:
The Agency shall organise an efficient processing of all the information received in order to facilitate the Change Control Management process for improvement/further development of the specifications, including the test specifications.’; |
|
(35) |
Section 7.2 is amended as follows:
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
|
(36) |
Section 7.3.2 is amended as follows:
|
|
(37) |
Section 7.4.1 is replaced by: ‘7.4.1 Trackside installations Articles 1, 2 and Annex I to Commission Implementing Regulation (EU) 2017/6 (*9) of 5 January 2017 on the European Rail Traffic Management System European deployment plan shall apply as referred to in Article 47 of Regulation (EU) No 1315/2013 (*10). Trackside shall not install and operate the Euroloop and radio infill data transmission, except on already existing installations or planned projects that use those data transmission. Such planned projects shall be notified to the European Commission by 30 June 2020. 7.4.1.1 It is mandatory to fit ETCS trackside when:
(*9) Commission Implementing Regulation (EU) 2017/6 of 5 January 2017 on the European Rail Traffic Management System European deployment plan (OJ L 3, 6.1.2017, p. 6)." (*10) Regulation (EU) No 1315/2013 of the European Parliament and of the Council of 11 December 2013 on Union guidelines for the development of the trans-European transport network and repealing Decision No 661/2010/EU (OJ L 348, 20.12.2013, p. 1).’;" |
|
(38) |
Section 7.4.2.1 is amended as follows: ‘7.4.2.1
(*11) Or placed into service in accordance with Directive 2008/57/EC, if Directive (EU) 2016/797 is not yet applicable.’;" |
|
(39) |
New section 7.4.2.3 is added as follows: ‘7.4.2.3
(*12) Or placed into service in accordance with Directive 2008/57/EC, if Directive (EU) 2016/797 is not yet applicable." (*13) Variants or versions of a vehicle type are considered to be authorised in conformity to an existing authorised type. Where the regime of Directive 2008/57/EC applies, changes which would give rise to variants or versions of a vehicle type under Implementing Regulation (EU) 2018/545 are also considered to be based upon an existing authorised type.’;" (*12) Or placed into service in accordance with Directive 2008/57/EC, if Directive (EU) 2016/797 is not yet applicable." (*12) Or placed into service in accordance with Directive 2008/57/EC, if Directive (EU) 2016/797 is not yet applicable." |
|
(40) |
In section 7.4.3, the text ‘placing in service’ is replaced by ‘placing on the market’; |
|
(41) |
Section 7.4.4 is amended as follows:
|
|
(42) |
A new section 7.4a is added below section 7.4.4 as follows: ‘7.4a ETCS and radio system compatibility checks implementation rules Existing vehicles shall be deemed compatible with the ETCS and radio system compatibility types of the networks on which they are operating by 16 January 2020 without any further checks, maintaining the existing restrictions or conditions for use. Any subsequent modification of the vehicle or the infrastructure regarding the technical or route compatibility shall be managed according to the requirements specified for ETCS and Radio system compatibility.’; |
|
(43) |
In section 7.5 the fourth paragraph is replaced by the following: ‘Implementing a train detection system that is compliant with the requirements of this TSI can be done independently of the installation of ETCS or GSM-R.’; |
|
(44) |
In section 7.6.1, the text ‘points below should be read’ is replaced by ‘points below shall be read’; |
|
(45) |
In section 7.6.1, a new paragraph is added at the end as follows: ‘All specific cases and their relevant dates shall be re-examined in the course of future revisions of the TSI with a view to limiting their technical and geographical scope based on an assessment of their impact on safety, interoperability, cross border services, TEN-T corridors, and the practical and economic impacts of retaining or eliminating them. Special account shall be given to availability of EU funding. Specific cases shall be limited to the route or network where they are strictly necessary and taken account of through route compatibility procedures.’; |
|
(46) |
Section 7.6.2.1 is amended as follows:
|
|
(47) |
Section 7.6.2.2 is amended as follows:
|
|
(48) |
In the last two rows in the third column of the table, the text ‘set of specifications 2’ is replaced by ‘set of specifications 2 or 3’; |
|
(49) |
Section 7.6.2.3 is amended as follows:
|
|
(50) |
Section 7.6.2.6 is replaced by the following: ‘7.6.2.6.
|
|
(51) |
In section 7.6.2.7 the text ‘Index 77, point 3.1.2.4’ is replaced by ‘Index 77, point 3.1.4.1’ |
|
(52) |
In section 7.6.2.8 a new row is added at the end of the table as follows:
|
|
(53) |
A new section 7.6.2.9 is added after 7.6.2.8 as follows: ‘7.6.2.9
|
|
(54) |
A new section 7.6.2.10 is added after 7.6.2.9 as follows: ‘7.6.2.10
|
|
(55) |
A new section 7.6.2.11 is added after 7.6.2.10 as follows: ‘7.6.2.11
|
|
(56) |
Annex A is replaced by the following: ‘ANNEX A References For each reference made in the basic parameters (Chapter 4 of this TSI) the following table indicates the corresponding mandatory specifications, via the Index in Table A 2 (Table A 2.1, Table A 2.2, Table A 2.3). Table A 1
Specifications One of the three tables in Table A 2 (Table A 2.1, Table A 2.2, Table A 2.3) of this Annex shall be applied for the trackside subsystem. For the on-board subsystem either Table A 2.2 or Table A 2.3 shall be applied, after the transition period defined in 7.4.2.3. When a document listed in Table A 2 incorporates, by copying or by reference to, a clearly identified point of another document, this point, and only this, shall be considered a part of the document listed in Table A 2. For the purposes of this TSI, when a document listed in Table A 2 makes a “mandatory” or “normative” reference to a document not listed in Table A 2, the referenced document shall always be understood as an acceptable means of compliance with basic parameters (that can be used for certification of Interoperability Constituents and Subsystems and not requiring future revisions of the TSI) and not as a mandatory specification. Note: specifications indicated as “Reserved” in Table A 2 are also listed as open points in Annex G when there is a need for notification of national rules to close the corresponding open points. Reserved documents not listed as open points are intended as improvements to the system. Table A 2.1 List of mandatory specifications
Table A 2.2 List of mandatory specifications
Table A 2.3 List of mandatory specifications
Note 1: only the functional description of information to be recorded is mandatory, not the technical characteristics of the interface Note 2: the points of the specifications listed in point 2.1 of EN 301 515 which are referenced in Index 32 and Index 33 as “MI” are mandatory. Note 3: the change requests (CRs) listed in table 1 and 2 of TS 102 281 which affect points referenced in Index 32 and Index 33 as “MI” are mandatory. Note 4: Index 48 refers only to test cases for GSM-R mobile equipment. It is kept “reserved” for the time being. When agreed in a future revision of the TSI, the catalogue of available harmonised test cases for the assessment of mobile equipment and networks, according to the steps indicated in point 6.1.2 of this TSI, will be introduced in these tables. Note 5: the products which are on the market are already tailored to the needs of the RU related to GSM-R Driver Machine Interface and fully interoperable so there is no need for a standard in the TSI CCS. Note 6: information that was intended for index 78 is now incorporated in Index 27 (SUBSET-091). Note 7: this document is ETCS and GSM-R baseline independent. Note 8: Intentionally deleted. Note 9: Intentionally deleted. Note 10: Only the (MI) requirements are mandated by TSI CCS. Note 11: Intentionally deleted. Note 12: Intentionally deleted. Note 13: Intentionally deleted. Note 14: Intentionally deleted. Table A 3 List of mandatory standards The application of the version of the standards listed in the table below, and their subsequent amendments when published as harmonised standard in the certification process is an appropriate means to fully comply to the risk management process as set out in Annex I of the Commission Implementing Regulation (EU) No 402/2013, without prejudice for the provisions of chapter 4 and chapter 6 of this TSI.
Note 1: this standard is harmonised, see “Commission Communication in the framework of the implementation of the Directive 2008/57/EC of the European Parliament and of the Council of 17 June 2008 on the interoperability of the rail system within the Community (recast)” (OJ C 435, 15.12.2017), where also published editorial corrigenda are indicated. Note 2: this version of the standard may be used during the transitional period defined in the updated version of the standard. Note 3: To be used in combination with EN 50126-1 (2017). Table A 4 List of mandatory standards for accredited laboratories
|
||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
|
(57) |
the Annex G is replaced by the following: ‘ANNEX G Open Points
|
(*1) Currently the CCS TSI does not specify any interoperability requirement for the interlockings, level crossings and certain other elements of the CCS.’;
(*2) Commission Implementing Regulation (EU) No 402/2013 of 30 April 2013 on the common safety method for risk evaluation and assessment and repealing Regulation (EC) No 352/2009 (OJ L 121, 3.5.2013, p. 8).
(*3) Directive (EU) 2016/798 of the European Parliament and of the Council of 11 May 2016 on railway safety (OJ L 138, 26.5.2016, p. 102).’;
(*4) Commission Implementing Decision 2011/665/EU of 4 October 2011 on the European register of authorised types of railway vehicles (OJ L 264, 8.10.2011, p. 32).
(*5) Commission Implementing Regulation (EU) 2019/777 of 16 May 2019 on the common specifications for the register of railway infrastructure and repealing Implementing Decision 2014/880/EU (OJ L 139 I, 27.5.2019, p. 312).’;
(*6) Commission Implementing Regulation (EU) 2019/773 of 16 May 2019 on the technical specification for interoperability relating to the operation and traffic management subsystem of the rail system within the European Union and repealing Decision 2012/757/EU (OJ L 139 I, 27.5.2019, p. 5).’;
(*7) The template to be used to provide this information will be defined in the Application Guide.’;
(*8) Regulation (EC) No 765/2008 of the European Parliament and of the Council of 9 July 2008 setting out the requirements for accreditation and market surveillance to the marketing of products and repealing Regulation (EEC) No 339/93 (OJ L 218, 13.8.2008, p. 30).’
|
1* |
Commission Implementing Regulation (EU) 2018/545 of 4 April 2018 establishing practical arrangements for the railway vehicle authorisation and railway vehicle type authorisation process pursuant to Directive (EU) 2016/797 of the European Parliament and of the Council (OJ L 90, 6.4.2018, p. 66). |
|
2* |
Commission Decision 2010/713/EU of 9 November 2010 on modules for the procedures for assessment of conformity, suitability for use and EC verification to be used in the technical specifications for interoperability adopted under Directive 2008/57/EC of the European Parliament and of the Council (OJ L 319, 4.12.2010, p. 1). |
|
3* |
According to Agency's Advice 2017/3 if there is no need for new authorisation the applicable TSI corresponds to the one used for the original certification. In case there is a need for new authorisation applicable TSI corresponds to the latest TSI. |
|
4* |
Target functionality refers to the ETCS functionality that has been evaluated in the subsystem EC certificate. The Technical Opinions published by the Agency that correct errors in the TSI are considered to define the functionality state already expected during the original certification or authorisation. |
|
5* |
All activities required for a modification which are performed outside a quality management system approved by a notified body might require additional examinations or tests by the notified body. |
|
6* |
Target functionality refers to the mobile communication functionality that has been evaluated in the subsystem EC certificate. The Technical Opinions published by the Agency that correct errors in the TSI are considered to define the functionality state already expected during the original certification or authorisation. |
|
7* |
All activities required for a modification which are performed outside a quality management system approved by a notified body might require additional examinations or tests by the notified body. |
|
8* |
Target functionality refers to the ETCS functionality that has been evaluated in the subsystem EC certificate. The Technical Opinions published by the Agency that correct errors in the TSI are considered to define the functionality state already expected during the original certification or authorisation. |
|
9* |
All activities required for a modification which are performed outside a quality management system approved by a notified body might require additional examinations or tests by the notified body. |
|
10* |
Target functionality refers to the ETCS functionality that has been evaluated in the subsystem EC certificate. The Technical Opinions published by the Agency that correct errors in the TSI are considered to define the functionality state already expected during the original certification or authorisation. |
|
11* |
All activities required for a modification which are performed outside a quality management system approved by a notified body might require additional examinations or tests by the notified body. |
|
12* |
On-board subsystems with conditions and restrictions of use or non-detected deficiencies are not considered compliant regarding this clause. |
|
13* |
An upgrade of tracks operated in mixed traffic to ETCS level 3 shall only be done if passenger and freight trains retain access to these tracks.’ |
(*9) Commission Implementing Regulation (EU) 2017/6 of 5 January 2017 on the European Rail Traffic Management System European deployment plan (OJ L 3, 6.1.2017, p. 6).
(*10) Regulation (EU) No 1315/2013 of the European Parliament and of the Council of 11 December 2013 on Union guidelines for the development of the trans-European transport network and repealing Decision No 661/2010/EU (OJ L 348, 20.12.2013, p. 1).’;
(*11) Or placed into service in accordance with Directive 2008/57/EC, if Directive (EU) 2016/797 is not yet applicable.’;
(*12) Or placed into service in accordance with Directive 2008/57/EC, if Directive (EU) 2016/797 is not yet applicable.
(*13) Variants or versions of a vehicle type are considered to be authorised in conformity to an existing authorised type. Where the regime of Directive 2008/57/EC applies, changes which would give rise to variants or versions of a vehicle type under Implementing Regulation (EU) 2018/545 are also considered to be based upon an existing authorised type.’;’
(1) Commission Regulation (EU) 2015/995 of 8 June 2015 amending Decision 2012/757/EU concerning the technical specification for interoperability relating to the “operation and traffic management” subsystem of the rail system in the European Union (OJ L 165, 30.6.2015, p. 1).’
(2) HS RS TSI is Commission Decision of 21 February 2008 concerning a technical specification for interoperability relating to the rolling stock sub-system of the trans-European high-speed rail system (2008/232/CE).
(3) CR RS TSI is Commission Decision of 26 April 2011 concerning a technical specification for interoperability relating to the rolling stock subsystem — Locomotives and passenger rolling stock of the trans-European conventional rail system (2011/291/EU).
(4) LOC & PAS TSI is Commission Regulation (EU) No 1302/2014 of 18 November 2014 concerning a technical specification for interoperability relating to the “rolling stock — locomotives and passenger rolling stock” subsystem of the rail system in the European Union.
(5) Wagon TSI is Commission Regulation (EU) No 321/2013 of 13 March 2013 concerning the technical specification for interoperability relating to the subsystem rolling stock — freight wagons of the rail system in the European Union and repealing Decision 2006/861/EC.’
(6) In this case, the assessment of the management of transitions shall be according to national specifications.’
ANNEX VII
Annex I to Decision 2011/665/EU is amended as follows:
|
(1) |
point 2.3 is replaced by the following: ‘2.3 Users and user access rights ERATV shall have the following users: Table 1 Access rights to ERATV
|
|
(2) |
in point 2.4, the following paragraph is added: ‘ERATV shall, as appropriate, allow for exchange of information with other information systems of the Agency such as the European Vehicle Register (“EVR”) as referred to in Decision (EU) 2018/1614, the common user interface for the railway register of infrastructure as referred to in Commission Decision 2014/880/EU (*1) and the one stop-shop (“OSS”) as referred to in Article 12 of Regulation (EU) 2016/796 of the European Parliament and of the Council (*2). (*1) Commission Implementing Decision 2014/880/EU of 26 November 2014 on the common specifications of the register of railway infrastructure and repealing Implementing Decision 2011/633/EU (OJ L 356, 12.12.2014, p. 489)." (*2) Regulation (EU) 2016/796 of the European Parliament and of the Council of 11 May 2016 on the European Union Agency for Railways and repealing Regulation (EC) No 881/2004 (OJ L 138, 26.5.2016, p. 1).’;" |
|
(3) |
in point 2.5, the following indents are added:
(*3) As provided for in Article 12 of Regulation (EU) 2016/796." (*4) As provided for in Article 27 of Regulation (EU) 2016/796.’;" |
|
(4) |
point 5.1 is replaced by the following: ‘5.1 General principle Every national safety authority shall submit information related to the authorisations of a type of vehicle or vehicle type variant it has granted. Every national safety authority shall submit information related to the versions of a vehicle type or versions of a vehicle type variant it has received in accordance with in accordance with Article 15(3) of Regulation (EU) 2018/545. The Agency shall directly register information related to the authorisations of a type of vehicle or vehicle type variant it has granted and information related to the versions of a vehicle type or versions of a vehicle type variant it has received. ERATV shall include a web based tool for exchange of information between the national safety authorities and the Agency. This tool shall allow the following exchanges of information:
The national safety authority shall submit the data for updating the register electronically by means of a web based application and using the standard web based electronic form with the relevant fields filled in as set out in Annex II. The Agency shall check the data submitted by the national safety authority regarding their compliance with this specification, and either validate them or request a clarification. If the Agency considers that the data submitted by the national safety authority are not in compliance with this specification, the Agency shall send the national safety authority a request for correction or clarification of the submitted data. Upon each update of data regarding a type of vehicle the system shall generate a confirmation message, which shall be sent by email to the users of the national safety authority that submitted the data, to the national safety authority of all other Member States where the type is authorised, to the vehicle type authorisation holder and to the Agency.’; |
|
(5) |
point 5.2.1 is replaced by the following: ‘5.2.1 Registering a new vehicle type authorisation, a new vehicle type variant a new version of a vehicle type or a new version of a vehicle type
|
|
(6) |
point 5.3 is replaced by the following: ‘5.3 Entry or modification of data by the Agency 5.3.1 The authorising entity is a national safety authority Where a national safety authority acts as authorising entity, the Agency shall not modify data submitted by a national safety authority. The role of the Agency shall consist of validation and publication only. In exceptional circumstances, such as technical impossibility of following the normal procedure, the Agency may, following a request from a national safety authority, enter or modify data submitted by a national safety authority. In this case, the national safety authority that requested the entry or modification of data shall confirm the data entered or modified by the Agency and the Agency shall duly document the process. The timescales for entering data in ERATV as indicated in Section 5.2 shall apply. 5.3.2 The authorising entity is the Agency Where the Agency acts as authorising entity, it shall:
|
|
(7) |
section 6 is replaced by the following: ‘6. GLOSSARY
|
(*1) Commission Implementing Decision 2014/880/EU of 26 November 2014 on the common specifications of the register of railway infrastructure and repealing Implementing Decision 2011/633/EU (OJ L 356, 12.12.2014, p. 489).
(*2) Regulation (EU) 2016/796 of the European Parliament and of the Council of 11 May 2016 on the European Union Agency for Railways and repealing Regulation (EC) No 881/2004 (OJ L 138, 26.5.2016, p. 1).’;
(*3) As provided for in Article 12 of Regulation (EU) 2016/796.
(*4) As provided for in Article 27 of Regulation (EU) 2016/796.’;”
ANNEX VIII
Annex II to Decision 2011/665/EU is replaced by the following:
‘ANNEX II
DATA TO BE REGISTERED AND FORMAT
|
(1) |
For each authorised type of vehicle, ERATV shall include the following data:
|
|
(2) |
The data to be registered in ERATV for each type of vehicle and their format shall be as indicated in Table 2. The data to be registered depend on the category of the vehicle as indicated in Table 2. |
|
(3) |
The values indicated for the parameters related to the technical characteristics shall be those recorded in the file accompanying the application. |
|
(4) |
In the cases where possible values for a parameter are limited to a predefined list, these lists shall be maintained and updated by the Agency. |
|
(5) |
For the types of vehicle that are not in conformity with all the relevant TSIs in force, the national safety authority that has granted the type authorisation may limit the information to be provided on the technical characteristics indicated in Section 4 below to the parameters that have been checked according to the applicable rules. |
|
(6) |
Where a parameter is defined in the applicable TSI, the value indicated for the parameter shall be the one assessed in the verification procedure. |
|
(7) |
Predefined lists shall be maintained and kept updated by the Agency in accordance with the TSIs in force, including the TSIs that may be applied during a transitional period. |
|
(8) |
For parameters indicated as “open point” no data shall be introduced until the “open point” is closed in the relevant TSI. |
|
(9) |
For parameters indicated as “optional”, indication of data shall be subject to the decision of the applicant for the type authorisation. |
|
(10) |
Fields 0.1-0.4 shall be filled in by the Agency.
Table 2 Parameters of ERATV
|
||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
|
27.5.2019 |
EN |
Official Journal of the European Union |
LI 139/312 |
COMMISSION IMPLEMENTING REGULATION (EU) 2019/777
of 16 May 2019
on the common specifications for the register of railway infrastructure and repealing Implementing Decision 2014/880/EU
(Text with EEA relevance)
THE EUROPEAN COMMISSION,
Having regard to the Treaty on the Functioning of the European Union,
Having regard to Directive (EU) 2016/797 of the European Parliament and of the Council of 11 May 2016 on the interoperability of the rail system within the European Union (1), and in particular Article 49(5) thereof,
Whereas:
|
(1) |
Directive (EU) 2016/797 clarifies the roles of railway actors, especially railway undertakings and infrastructure managers, in relation to the checks to be performed before the use of authorised vehicles. |
|
(2) |
The register of railway infrastructure should provide transparency on the characteristics of the network and be used as a reference database. In particular, it should be used in combination with the values of the parameters recorded in the vehicle authorisation for placing on the market, to check the technical compatibility between a vehicle and a route. |
|
(3) |
The list of parameters of the register of railway infrastructure and the common user interface set out in Commission Implementing Decision 2014/880/EU (2) should be updated in order to allow for the checking of vehicle-route compatibility. At the same time, the register of infrastructure web-based application (RINF Application) should replace the common user interface. |
|
(4) |
The RINF Application should be set up and managed by the European Union Agency for Railways (the ‘Agency’) and should provide access to the Member States' asset record stating the values of the network parameters of each subsystem or part of subsystem concerned. In particular, Member States should use it to comply with the publication obligation provided for in Article 49(1) of Directive (EU) 2016/797, in order to provide users with a single entry point. |
|
(5) |
Data relating to the parameters specified in the table in the Annex to Implementing Decision 2014/880/EU is to be collected and inserted, for the whole Union rail system, in the register of railway infrastructure by 16 March 2019, in accordance with Article 5 of that Decision. Data relating to new parameters specified in this Regulation should be collected and inserted in the register of infrastructure in due time to achieve the objectives of Directive (EU) 2016/797, in particular to allow for the checking of vehicle-route compatibility on the basis of the RINF Application. RINF Application should be operational at the latest when this Regulation enters into application and data relating to parameters relevant for the checking of vehicle-route compatibility should be collected and inserted by 16 January 2020 at the latest and as soon as practicable. |
|
(6) |
Each Member State should designate a national registration entity to be responsible for the coordination of the submission and regular update of data of its register of infrastructure. |
|
(7) |
Infrastructure managers should collect data relating to their network and ensure that data submitted to registration entities is complete, consistent, accurate and up to date. |
|
(8) |
Further developments of the RINF Application should facilitate the checking of vehicle-route compatibility and the compilation of the route book with information from the RINF Application. The Agency should assess the benefits and cost of RINF Application add-ons and implement them as appropriate. |
|
(9) |
The Agency should set up an application guide describing and where necessary explaining the requirements of this Regulation. The guidelines should be updated, published and made available to the public free of charge. |
|
(10) |
On 27 July 2018, the Agency issued a recommendation on the common specifications for the register of railway infrastructure to update the functions of the register of infrastructure with Directive (EU) 2016/797. |
|
(11) |
Implementing Decision 2014/880/EU should therefore be repealed. |
|
(12) |
The measures provided for in this Regulation are in accordance with the opinion of the Committee referred to in Article 51(1) of Directive (EU) 2016/797, |
HAS ADOPTED THIS REGULATION:
Article 1
Common specifications for the register of infrastructure
1. The common specifications for the register of infrastructure referred to in Article 49 of Directive (EU) 2016/797 shall be those laid down in the Annex to this Regulation.
2. Each Member State shall ensure the values of the parameters of its railway network are computerised in an electronic application which shall comply with the common specifications of this Regulation.
Article 2
RINF Application
1. The Agency shall set up and maintain a web-based application (‘RINF Application’) to act as single entry point for the publication of Member States' infrastructure information in accordance with Article 49 of Directive (EU) 2016/797.
2. The RINF Application shall be set up in accordance with the Annex to this Regulation.
3. The Agency shall ensure that the RINF Application is operational by 16 June 2019 at the latest.
4. Each Member State shall ensure that the necessary data for its network is collected and inserted in the RINF Application by the dates set out in Table 1 in the Annex.
5. Each Member State shall ensure that data in the RINF Application is maintained updated in accordance with Article 5.
6. The Agency shall set up a group composed of representatives of the national registration entities to coordinate, monitor and support the population of the RINF Application.
Article 3
Transition
1. Deadlines for the population of the register of infrastructure stipulated in Implementing Decision 2014/880/EU and set out in the Annex to this Regulation remain applicable.
2. Member States and the Agency shall ensure that the data collected and inserted in the register of infrastructure in accordance with Implementing Decision 2014/880/EU remains available, and shall ensure it is accessible via the RINF Application.
Article 4
National registration entity
1. Each Member State shall designate a national registration entity in charge of coordinating the Member State's collecting and inserting the data to the RINF Application.
2. Each Member States shall notify the Agency by 16 June 2019 at the latest of the national registration entity designated in accordance with paragraph 1 if that entity is not the body designated in accordance with Article 6(2) of Implementing Decision 2014/880/EU.
3. From 1 January 2021, subject to the development of RINF application referred to in Article 6(1)(a), infrastructure managers of each Member States shall be in charge of collecting and inserting the data to the RINF Application.
Article 5
Collection of data
1. Infrastructure managers shall ensure the accuracy, completeness, consistency and timeliness of data in the RINF Application and submit updated data as soon as such data becomes available.
2. Until 31 December 2020, infrastructure managers shall submit data to registration entities. Registration entities shall submit data to the RINF application at least every month unless no data needs to be updated. In the latter case, registration entities shall inform the Agency that no data needs to be updated. One update shall coincide with the annual publication of the network statement.
3. From 1 January 2021, subject to the development of RINF application referred to in Article 6(1)(a), infrastructure managers shall directly submit data to the RINF application, as soon as such data becomes available.
4. Information relating to infrastructures placed in service after 16 June 2019 shall be submitted to the RINF application before the placing in service.
Article 6
Further developments
1. The Agency, taking into account the result of a cost-benefit analysis, shall update the RINF application by 1 January 2021 in order to:
|
(a) |
streamline the process of updating data in the RINF Application in order to allow infrastructure managers to update information as soon as it becomes available; |
|
(b) |
improve the description of the network so as to display its geometry accurately; |
|
(c) |
provide information regarding possible routing on the network; |
|
(d) |
provide means for alerting railway undertakings regarding changes in the RINF Application relevant to them. |
2. By 16 January 2022, the Agency, taking into account the result of a cost-benefit analysis, shall update the RINF application to enable the collection and insertion of information necessary for the Route Book referred to in Appendix D2 to Commission Implementing Regulation (EU) 2019/773 (3). Each Member State shall ensure that its register of infrastructure provides the information necessary for the Route Book one year after the RINF Application has been updated.
3. Further developments of the RINF application may create a data system feeding into all electronic information flows in respect of the Union rail network.
Article 7
Guide on the application of the common specifications
By 16 June 2019 at the latest, the Agency shall publish a guide on the application of the common specifications for the register of infrastructure (application guide). The Agency shall keep the application guide up to date. The application guide shall provide a reference to the relevant provisions of the technical specifications of interoperability for each parameter.
Article 8
Repeal
Implementing Decision 2014/880/EU is repealed.
Article 9
Entry into force and application
This Regulation shall enter into force on the 20th day following that of its publication in the Official Journal of the European Union.
It shall apply from 16 June 2019.
This Regulation shall be binding in its entirety and directly applicable in all Member States.
Done at Brussels, 16 May 2019.
For the Commission
The President
Jean-Claude JUNCKER
(1) OJ L 138, 26.5.2016, p. 44.
(2) Commission Implementing Decision 2014/880/EU of 26 November 2014 on the common specifications of the register of railway infrastructure and repealing Implementing Decision 2011/633/EU (OJ L 356, 12.12.2014, p. 489).
(3) Commission Implementing Regulation (EU) 2019/773 of 16 May 2019 on the technical specification for interoperability relating to the operation and traffic management subsystem of the rail system within the European Union and repealing Decision 2012/757/EU (See page 5 of this Official Journal).
ANNEX
1. TECHNICAL SCOPE
These specifications concern data about the following structural subsystems of the Union rail system:
|
(a) |
the infrastructure subsystem; |
|
(b) |
the energy subsystem; |
|
(c) |
the trackside control-command and signalling subsystem. |
2. PURPOSE
The main purpose of the register of infrastructure is to set out transparent characteristics of the network and be used as a reference database.
2.1. Processes to be supported by the register of infrastructure
The register of infrastructure shall support the following processes:
|
(a) |
check before the use of authorised vehicles in accordance with Article 23 of Directive (EU) 2016/797; |
|
(b) |
design of mobile subsystems; |
|
(c) |
check of the feasibility of train services; |
|
(d) |
publication of rules and restrictions of a strictly local nature in accordance with Article 14(11) of Directive (EU) 2016/797; |
|
(e) |
verification of technical compatibility between fixed installations in accordance with point (b) of Article 18(4) of Directive (EU) 2016/797; |
|
(f) |
monitoring of the progress of interoperability in the Union rail system; |
|
(g) |
establishment of the network statement relating to the nature of infrastructure; |
|
(h) |
compilation of the Route Book referred to in Appendix D2 to Implementing Regulation (EU) 2019/773 in accordance with Article 6(2); |
|
(i) |
reuse of data in the register of infrastructure in other IT tools. |
2.2. Specific requirements for the register of infrastructure
The register of infrastructure shall:
|
(a) |
provide the value of the parameters to be used to check the technical compatibility between vehicle and route; |
|
(b) |
provide relevant data to identify infrastructure characteristics of the intended area of use and facilitate the design of rolling stock and the feasibility check of train services; |
|
(c) |
enable Member States to include in the register of infrastructure rules and restrictions of a strictly local nature; |
|
(d) |
provide relevant data to facilitate the verification of the technical compatibility between a fixed subsystem and the network into which it is incorporated and to monitor the progress of interoperability of railway fixed installations; |
|
(e) |
provide the information necessary for the Route Book; |
|
(f) |
enable the use of the register of infrastructure as reference database for the network statement or other IT tools. |
3. COMMON CHARACTERISTICS
The characteristics set out in this Annex shall be common to all registers of infrastructure of the Member States.
3.1. Definitions
For the purposes of this Annex, the following definitions shall apply:
|
(1) |
‘section of line’ (SoL) means the part of line between adjacent operational points that may consist of several tracks; |
|
(2) |
‘operational point’ (OP) means any location for train service operations, where train services may begin and end or change route and where passenger or freight services may be provided; it includes locations at boundaries between Member States or infrastructure managers; |
|
(3) |
‘location point’ (LP) means any specific point on a track of a SoL where value of a parameter changes; |
|
(4) |
‘running track’ means any track used for train service movements; it does not include passing loops and meeting loops on plain line or track connections only required for train operation; |
|
(5) |
‘siding’ means any track within an operational point, which is not used for operational routing of a train. |
3.2. Railway network structure for the register of infrastructure
3.2.1. For the purposes of the register of infrastructure, each Member State shall describe its railway network by sections of line and operational points.
3.2.2. Items to be published for ‘section of line’ related to infrastructure, energy and track-side control-command and signalling subsystems shall be assigned to the infrastructure element ‘running track’.
3.2.3. Items to be published for ‘operational point’ related to infrastructure subsystem shall be assigned to the infrastructure elements ‘running track’ and ‘siding’.
3.3. Items for the register of infrastructure
3.3.1. Items shall be published in accordance with Table 1.
3.3.2. The register of infrastructure application guide referred to in Article 7 shall specify the specific format and the governance process of the data listed in Table 1 presented in one of the following ways:
|
(a) |
a single or multiple selection from a predefined list; |
|
(b) |
a CharacterString or the predefined CharacterString; |
|
(c) |
a number indicated inside square brackets. |
3.3.3. The value of a parameter shall be provided when it corresponds to a core parameter or when the corresponding item exists on the network that is described in accordance with the deadlines in Table 1.
Parameters required for checking the vehicle-route compatibility are indicated as ‘Needed for RC’ in accordance with Appendix D1 to Implementing Regulation (EU) 2019/773.
Any information relevant to the parameters is provided in Table 1.
When Table 1 refers to a document of the infrastructure manager, the infrastructure manager or the NRE in accordance with Article 5 shall submit such document to the Agency in an electronic format. Documents referred to in parameters 1.1.1.1.2.4.4, 1.1.1.1.6.4, 1.1.1.1.6.5, 1.1.1.3.7.1.3 and 1.1.1.3.11.3 shall be submitted in two EU languages.
Table 1
Items for the register of infrastructure
|
Number |
Title |
Data presentation |
Definition |
Core parameter |
Needed for RC |
Deadline to provide the parameter |
||||||||||||||||
|
1 |
MEMBER STATE |
|
|
|
||||||||||||||||||
|
1.1 |
SECTION OF LINE |
|
|
|
||||||||||||||||||
|
1.1.0.0.0 |
Generic information |
|
|
|
||||||||||||||||||
|
1.1.0.0.0.1 |
Infrastructure manager (IM)'s code |
[AAAA] |
Infrastructure manager means anybody or undertaking that is responsible in particular for establishing and maintaining railway infrastructure or a part thereof. |
X |
|
In accordance with Implementing Decision 2014/880/EU and by 16 March 2019 at the latest |
||||||||||||||||
|
1.1.0.0.0.2 |
National line identification |
CharacterString |
Unique line identification or unique line number within Member State. |
X |
|
In accordance with Implementing Decision 2014/880/EU and by 16 March 2019 at the latest |
||||||||||||||||
|
1.1.0.0.0.3 |
Operational point at start of section of line |
Predefined CharacterString |
Unique OP ID at start of section of line (kilometres increasing from start OP to the end OP). |
X |
|
In accordance with Implementing Decision 2014/880/EU and by 16 March 2019 at the latest |
||||||||||||||||
|
1.1.0.0.0.4 |
Operational point at end of section of line |
Predefined CharacterString |
Unique OP ID at end of section of line (kilometres increasing from start OP to the end OP) |
X |
|
In accordance with Implementing Decision 2014/880/EU and by 16 March 2019 at the latest |
||||||||||||||||
|
1.1.0.0.0.5 |
Length of section of line |
Predefined CharacterString |
Length between operational points at start and end of section of line. |
X |
|
In accordance with Implementing Decision 2014/880/EU and by 16 March 2019 at the latest |
||||||||||||||||
|
1.1.0.0.0.6 |
Nature of Section of Line |
Single selection from the predefined list: Regular SoL/Link |
Kind of section of line expressing size of presented data which depends on fact whether it connects OPs generated by division of a big node into several OPs or not. |
X |
|
In accordance with Implementing Decision 2014/880/EU and by 16 March 2019 at the latest |
||||||||||||||||
|
1.1.1 |
RUNNING TRACK |
|
|
|
||||||||||||||||||
|
1.1.1.0.0 |
Generic information |
|
|
|
||||||||||||||||||
|
1.1.1.0.0.1 |
Identification of track |
CharacterString |
Unique track identification or unique track number within section of line |
X |
|
In accordance with Implementing Decision 2014/880/EU and by 16 March 2019 at the latest |
||||||||||||||||
|
1.1.1.0.0.2 |
Normal running direction |
Single selection from the predefined list: N/O/B |
The normal running direction is:
|
X |
|
In accordance with Implementing Decision 2014/880/EU and by 16 March 2019 at the latest |
||||||||||||||||
|
1.1.1.1 |
Infrastructure subsystem |
|
|
|
||||||||||||||||||
|
1.1.1.1.1 |
Declarations of verification for track |
|
|
|
||||||||||||||||||
|
1.1.1.1.1.1 |
EC declaration of verification for track relating to compliance with the requirements from technical specifications for interoperability (TSIs) applicable to infrastructure subsystem |
Predefined CharacterString: [CC/RRRRRRRRRRRRRR/YYYY/NNNNNN] |
Unique number for EC declarations in accordance with Commission Implementing Regulation (EU) 2019/250 (1). |
|
|
In accordance with Implementing Decision 2014/880/EU and by 16 March 2019 at the latest |
||||||||||||||||
|
1.1.1.1.1.2 |
EI declaration of demonstration (as defined Commission 2014/881/EU (2)) for track relating to compliance with the requirements from TSIs applicable to infrastructure subsystem |
Predefined CharacterString: [CC/RRRRRRRRRRRRRR/YYYY/NNNNNN] |
Unique number for EI declarations following the same format requirements as specified for EC declarations in Annex VII of Commission Implementing Regulation (EU) 2019/250. |
|
|
In accordance with Implementing Decision 2014/880/EU and by 16 March 2019 at the latest |
||||||||||||||||
|
1.1.1.1.2 |
Performance parameters |
|
|
|
||||||||||||||||||
|
1.1.1.1.2.1 |
Trans-European Network (TEN) classification of track |
Single selection from a predefined list |
Indication of the part of the trans-European network the line belongs to. |
X |
|
In accordance with Implementing Decision 2014/880/EU and by 16 March 2019 at the latest |
||||||||||||||||
|
1.1.1.1.2.1.2 |
TEN geographic information system identity (GIS ID) |
CharacterString |
Indication of the GIS ID of the section of TEN-T database to which the track belongs |
|
|
1 January 2021 |
||||||||||||||||
|
1.1.1.1.2.2 |
Category of line |
Single selection from a predefined list |
Classification of a line according to the INF TSI – Commission Regulation (EU) No 1299/2014 (3) |
X |
|
In accordance with Implementing Decision 2014/880/EU and by 16 March 2019 at the latest |
||||||||||||||||
|
1.1.1.1.2.3 |
Part of a Railway Freight Corridor |
Single selection from a predefined list |
Indication whether the line is designated to a Railway Freight Corridor |
|
|
In accordance with Implementing Decision 2014/880/EU and by 16 March 2019 at the latest |
||||||||||||||||
|
1.1.1.1.2.4 |
Load capability |
Single selection from a predefined list |
A combination of the line category and speed at the weakest point of the track |
X |
X |
In accordance with Implementing Decision 2014/880/EU and by 16 March 2019 at the latest |
||||||||||||||||
|
1.1.1.1.2.4.1 |
National classification for load capability |
CharacterString |
National classification for load capability |
|
X |
16 January 2020 |
||||||||||||||||
|
1.1.1.1.2.4.2 |
Compliance of structures with the High Speed Load Model (HSLM) |
Single selection from the predefined list: Y/N |
For sections of line with a maximum permitted speed of 200 km/h or more. Information regarding the procedure to be used to perform the dynamic compatibility check |
|
X |
16 January 2020 |
||||||||||||||||
|
1.1.1.1.2.4.3 |
Railway location of structures requiring specific checks |
Predefined CharacterString: [± NNNN.NNN] + [CharacterString] |
Localisation of structures requiring specific checks |
|
X |
16 January 2020 |
||||||||||||||||
|
1.1.1.1.2.4.4 |
Document with the procedure(s) for static and dynamic route compatibility checks |
CharacterString |
Electronic document available in two EU languages from the IM stored by the Agency with:
Or
|
|
X |
16 January 2020 |
||||||||||||||||
|
1.1.1.1.2.5 |
Maximum permitted speed |
[NNN] |
Nominal maximum operational speed on the line as a result of infrastructure, energy and control, command and signalling subsystem characteristics expressed in kilometres/hour. |
X |
X |
In accordance with Implementing Decision 2014/880/EU and by 16 March 2019 at the latest |
||||||||||||||||
|
1.1.1.1.2.6 |
Temperature range |
Single selection from the predefined list: T1 (-25 to +40) T2 (-40 to +35) T3 (-25 to +45) Tx (-40 to +50) |
Temperature range for unrestricted access to the line according to European standard. |
X |
X |
In accordance with Implementing Decision 2014/880/EU and by 16 March 2019 at the latest |
||||||||||||||||
|
1.1.1.1.2.7 |
Maximum altitude |
[+/-][NNNN] |
Highest point of the section of line above sea level in reference to Normal Amsterdam's Peil (NAP). |
X |
|
In accordance with Implementing Decision 2014/880/EU and by 16 March 2019 at the latest |
||||||||||||||||
|
1.1.1.1.2.8 |
Existence of severe climatic conditions |
Single selection from the predefined list: Y/N |
Climatic conditions on the line are severe according to European standard. |
X |
X |
In accordance with Implementing Decision 2014/880/EU and by 16 March 2019 at the latest |
||||||||||||||||
|
1.1.1.1.3 |
Line layout |
|
|
|
||||||||||||||||||
|
1.1.1.1.3.1 |
Interoperable gauge |
Single selection from the predefined list: GA/GB,/GC/G1/DE3/S/IRL1/none |
Gauges GA, GB, GC, G1, DE3, S, IRL1 as defined in European standard. |
Parameter deleted. To be displayed for information |
||||||||||||||||||
|
1.1.1.1.3.2 |
Multinational gauges |
Single selection from the predefined list: G2/GB1/GB2/none |
Multilateral gauge or international gauge other than GA, GB, GC, G1, DE3, S, IRL1 as defined in European standard. |
Parameter deleted. To be displayed for information |
||||||||||||||||||
|
1.1.1.1.3.3 |
National gauges |
Single selection from a predefined list |
Domestic gauge as defined in European standard or other local gauge. |
Parameter deleted. To be displayed for information |
||||||||||||||||||
|
1.1.1.1.3.1.1 |
Gauging |
Single selection from a predefined list |
Gauges as defined in European standard or other local gauges, including lower or upper part. In accordance with point 7.3.2.2 in Regulation (EU) No 1302/2014, sections of lines of the United Kingdom of Great Britain network may not have gauge reference profile. |
X |
X |
16 January 2020 |
||||||||||||||||
|
1.1.1.1.3.1.2 |
Railway location of particular points requiring specific checks |
Predefined CharacterString: [± NNNN.NNN] + [CharacterString] |
Location of particular points requiring specific checks due to deviations from gauging referred to in 1.1.1.1.3.1.1. |
|
X |
16 January 2020 |
||||||||||||||||
|
1.1.1.1.3.1.3 |
Document with the transversal section of the particular points requiring specific checks |
CharacterString |
Electronic document available from the IM stored by the Agency with the transversal section of the particular points requiring specific checks due to deviations from gauging referred to in 1.1.1.1.3.1.1. Where relevant, guidance for the check with the particular point may be attached to the document with the transversal section. |
|
X |
16 January 2020 |
||||||||||||||||
|
1.1.1.1.3.4 |
Standard combined transport profile number for swap bodies |
Single selection from a predefined list |
Coding for combined transport with swap bodies as defined in UIC Code (if the line belongs to the TEN). |
X |
|
In accordance with Implementing Decision 2014/880/EU and by 16 March 2019 at the latest |
||||||||||||||||
|
1.1.1.1.3.5 |
Standard combined transport profile number for semi-trailers |
Single selection from a predefined list |
Coding for combined transport for semi-trailers as defined in UIC Code (if the line belongs to the TEN). |
X |
|
In accordance with Implementing Decision 2014/880/EU and by 16 March 2019 at the latest |
||||||||||||||||
|
1.1.1.1.3.5.1 |
Specific information |
CharacterString |
Any relevant information from the IM relating to the line layout |
|
|
1 January 2021 |
||||||||||||||||
|
1.1.1.1.3.6 |
Gradient profile |
Predefined CharacterString: [± NN.N] ([± NNNN.NNN] repeated as many times as necessary |
Sequence of gradient values and locations of change in gradient |
X |
X |
In accordance with Implementing Decision 2014/880/EU and by 16 March 2019 at the latest |
||||||||||||||||
|
1.1.1.1.3.7 |
Minimum radius of horizontal curve |
[NNNNN] |
Radius of the smallest horizontal curve of the track in metres. |
X |
X |
In accordance with Implementing Decision 2014/880/EU and by 16 March 2019 at the latest |
||||||||||||||||
|
1.1.1.1.4 |
Track parameters |
|
|
|
||||||||||||||||||
|
1.1.1.1.4.1 |
Nominal track gauge |
Single selection from the predefined list 750/1000/1435/1520/1524/1600/1668/other |
A single value expressed in millimetres that identifies the track gauge. |
X |
X |
In accordance with Implementing Decision 2014/880/EU and by 16 March 2019 at the latest |
||||||||||||||||
|
1.1.1.1.4.2 |
Cant deficiency |
[+/-] [NNN] |
Maximum cant deficiency expressed in millimetres defined as difference between the applied cant and a higher equilibrium cant the line has been designed for. |
X |
X |
In accordance with Implementing Decision 2014/880/EU and by 16 March 2019 at the latest |
||||||||||||||||
|
1.1.1.1.4.3 |
Rail inclination |
[NN] |
An angle defining the inclination of the head of a rail relative to the running surface |
X |
X |
In accordance with Implementing Decision 2014/880/EU and by 16 March 2019 at the latest |
||||||||||||||||
|
1.1.1.1.4.4 |
Existence of ballast |
Single selection from the predefined list: Y/N |
Specifies whether track construction is with sleepers embedded in ballast or not. |
|
|
In accordance with Implementing Decision 2014/880/EU and by 16 March 2019 at the latest |
||||||||||||||||
|
1.1.1.1.5 |
Switches and crossings |
|
|
|
||||||||||||||||||
|
1.1.1.1.5.1 |
TSI compliance of in service values for switches and crossings |
Single selection from the predefined list: Y/N |
Switches and crossings are maintained to in service limit dimension as specified in TSI. |
X |
|
In accordance with Implementing Decision 2014/880/EU and by 16 March 2019 at the latest |
||||||||||||||||
|
1.1.1.1.5.2 |
Minimum wheel diameter for fixed obtuse crossings |
[NNN] |
Maximum unguided length of fixed obtuse crossings is based on a minimum wheel diameter in service expressed in millimetres. |
X |
X |
In accordance with Implementing Decision 2014/880/EU and by 16 March 2019 at the latest |
||||||||||||||||
|
1.1.1.1.6 |
Track resistance to applied loads |
|
|
|
||||||||||||||||||
|
1.1.1.1.6.1 |
Maximum train deceleration |
[N.N] |
Limit for longitudinal track resistance given as a maximum allowed train deceleration and expressed in metres per square second. |
X |
X |
In accordance with Implementing Decision 2014/880/EU and by 16 March 2019 at the latest |
||||||||||||||||
|
1.1.1.1.6.2 |
Use of eddy current brakes |
Single selection from the predefined list: Allowed/allowed under conditions/allowed only for emergency brake/allowed under conditions only for emergency brake/not allowed |
Indication of limitations on the use of eddy current brakes. |
X |
X |
In accordance with Implementing Decision 2014/880/EU and by 16 March 2019 at the latest |
||||||||||||||||
|
1.1.1.1.6.3 |
Use of magnetic brakes |
Single selection from the predefined list: Allowed/allowed under conditions/allowed under conditions only for emergency brake/allowed only for emergency brake/not allowed |
Indication of limitations on the use of magnetic brakes. |
X |
X |
In accordance with Implementing Decision 2014/880/EU and by 16 March 2019 at the latest |
||||||||||||||||
|
1.1.1.1.6.4 |
Document with the conditions for the use of eddy current brakes |
CharacterString |
Electronic document available in two EU languages from the IM stored by the Agency with conditions for the use of eddy current brakes identified in 1.1.1.1.6.2. |
|
X |
16 January 2020 |
||||||||||||||||
|
1.1.1.1.6.5 |
Document with the conditions for the use of magnetic brakes |
CharacterString |
Electronic document available in two EU languages from the IM stored by the Agency with conditions for the use of magnetic brakes identified in 1.1.1.1.6.3. |
|
X |
16 January 2020 |
||||||||||||||||
|
1.1.1.1.7 |
Health, safety and environment |
|
|
|
||||||||||||||||||
|
1.1.1.1.7.1 |
Use of flange lubrication forbidden |
Single selection from the predefined list: Y/N |
Indication whether the use of on-board device for flange lubrication is forbidden. |
X |
|
In accordance with Implementing Decision 2014/880/EU and by 16 March 2019 at the latest |
||||||||||||||||
|
1.1.1.1.7.2 |
Existence of level crossings |
Single selection from the predefined list: Y/N |
Indication whether level crossings (including pedestrian track crossing) exist on the section of line. |
X |
|
In accordance with Implementing Decision 2014/880/EU and by 16 March 2019 at the latest |
||||||||||||||||
|
1.1.1.1.7.3 |
Acceleration allowed near level crossing |
CharacterString |
Existence of limit for acceleration of train if stopping or recovering speed close to a level crossing expressed in a specific reference acceleration curve. |
|
|
In accordance with Implementing Decision 2014/880/EU and by 16 March 2019 at the latest |
||||||||||||||||
|
1.1.1.1.7.4 |
Existence of trackside hot axle box detector (HABD) |
Single selection from the predefined list: Y/N |
Existence of trackside HABD |
X |
X |
16 January 2020 |
||||||||||||||||
|
1.1.1.1.7.5 |
Trackside HABD TSI compliant |
Single selection from the predefined list: Y/N |
Specific for the French, Italian and Swedish networks. Trackside hot axle box detector TSI compliant. |
|
X |
16 January 2020 |
||||||||||||||||
|
1.1.1.1.7.6 |
Identification of trackside HABD |
CharacterString |
Specific for the French, Italian and Swedish networks. Applicable if trackside HABD is not TSI compliant, identification of trackside hot axle box detector. |
|
X |
16 January 2020 |
||||||||||||||||
|
1.1.1.1.7.7 |
Generation of trackside HABD |
Single selection from a predefined list |
Specific for the French Italian and Swedish networks. Generation of trackside hot axle box detector. |
|
X |
16 January 2020 |
||||||||||||||||
|
1.1.1.1.7.8 |
Railway location of trackside HABD |
Predefined CharacterString: [± NNNN.NNN] + [CharacterString] |
Specific for the French Italian and Swedish networks. Applicable if trackside HABD is not TSI compliant, localisation of trackside hot axle box detector. |
|
X |
16 January 2020 |
||||||||||||||||
|
1.1.1.1.7.9 |
Direction of measurement of trackside HABD |
Single selection from the predefined list: N/O/B |
Specific for the French Italian and Swedish networks. Applicable if trackside HABD is not TSI compliant, direction of measurement of trackside hot axle box detector. If the direction of measurement is:
|
|
X |
16 January 2020 |
||||||||||||||||
|
1.1.1.1.7.10 |
Steady red lights required |
Single selection from the predefined list: Y/N |
Sections where two steady red lights are required in accordance with Implementing Regulation (EU) 2019/773 |
|
|
1 January 2021 |
||||||||||||||||
|
1.1.1.1.7.11 |
Belonging to a quieter route |
Single selection from the predefined list: Y/N |
Belonging to a ‘quieter route’ in accordance with Article 5b of Commission Regulation (EU) No 1304/2014 (4). |
X |
|
1 January 2021 |
||||||||||||||||
|
1.1.1.1.8 |
Tunnel |
|
|
|
||||||||||||||||||
|
1.1.1.1.8.1 |
IM's code |
[AAAA] |
Infrastructure Manager means anybody or undertaking that is responsible in particular for establishing and maintaining railway infrastructure or a part thereof. |
X |
|
In accordance with Implementing Decision 2014/880/EU and by 16 March 2019 at the latest |
||||||||||||||||
|
1.1.1.1.8.2 |
Tunnel identification |
CharacterString |
Unique tunnel identification or unique number within Member State |
X |
|
In accordance with Implementing Decision 2014/880/EU and by 16 March 2019 at the latest |
||||||||||||||||
|
1.1.1.1.8.3 |
Start of tunnel |
Predefined CharacterString: [Latitude (NN.NNNN) + Longitude (± NN.NNNN) + km (± N NNN.NNN)] |
Geographical coordinates in decimal degrees and km of the line at the beginning of a tunnel. |
X |
|
In accordance with Implementing Decision 2014/880/EU and by 16 March 2019 at the latest |
||||||||||||||||
|
1.1.1.1.8.4 |
End of tunnel |
Predefined CharacterString: [Latitude (NN.NNNN) + Longitude (± NN.NNNN) + km (± N NNN.NNN)] |
Geographical coordinates in decimal degrees and km of the line at the end of a tunnel. |
X |
|
In accordance with Implementing Decision 2014/880/EU and by 16 March 2019 at the latest |
||||||||||||||||
|
1.1.1.1.8.5 |
EC declaration of verification relating to compliance with the requirements from TSIs applicable to railway tunnel |
Predefined CharacterString: [CC/RRRRRRRRRRRRRR/YYYY/NNNNNN] |
Unique number for EC declarations in accordance with Commission Implementing Regulation (EU) 2019/250. |
|
|
In accordance with Implementing Decision 2014/880/EU and by 16 March 2019 at the latest |
||||||||||||||||
|
1.1.1.1.8.6 |
EI declaration of demonstration (as defined in Recommendation 2014/881/EU) relating to compliance with the requirements from TSIs applicable to railway tunnel |
Predefined CharacterString: [CC/RRRRRRRRRRRRRR/YYYY/NNNNNN] |
Unique number for EI declarations following the same format requirements as specified for EC declarations in Annex VII of Commission Implementing Regulation (EU) 2019/250. |
|
|
In accordance with Implementing Decision 2014/880/EU and by 16 March 2019 at the latest |
||||||||||||||||
|
1.1.1.1.8.7 |
Length of tunnel |
[NNNNN] |
Length of a tunnel in metres from entrance portal to exit portal. |
X |
|
In accordance with Implementing Decision 2014/880/EU and by 16 March 2019 at the latest |
||||||||||||||||
|
1.1.1.1.8.8 |
Cross section area |
[NNN] |
Smallest cross section area in square metres of the tunnel |
|
|
In accordance with Implementing Decision 2014/880/EU and by 16 March 2019 at the latest |
||||||||||||||||
|
1.1.1.1.8.8.1 |
Compliance of the tunnel with INF TSI |
Y/N |
compliance of the tunnel with INF TSI at the maximum permitted speed |
X |
|
1 January 2021 |
||||||||||||||||
|
1.1.1.1.8.8.2 |
Document available from the IM with precise description of the tunnel |
CharacterString |
Electronic document available from the IM stored by the Agency with precise description of the clearance gauge and geometry of the tunnel |
|
|
1 January 2021 |
||||||||||||||||
|
1.1.1.1.8.9 |
Existence of emergency plan |
Single selection from predefined list: Y/N |
Indication whether emergency plan exists. |
|
|
In accordance with Implementing Decision 2014/880/EU and by 16 March 2019 at the latest |
||||||||||||||||
|
1.1.1.1.8.10 |
Fire category of rolling stock required |
Single selection from the predefined list: A/B/none |
Categorisation on how a passenger train with a fire on board will continue to operate for a defined time period. |
X |
X |
In accordance with Implementing Decision 2014/880/EU and by 16 March 2019 at the latest |
||||||||||||||||
|
1.1.1.1.8.11 |
National fire category of rolling stock required |
CharacterString |
Categorisation on how a passenger train with a fire on board will continue to operate for a defined time period. |
|
X |
In accordance with Implementing Decision 2014/880/EU and by 16 March 2019 at the latest |
||||||||||||||||
|
1.1.1.2 |
Energy subsystem |
|
|
|
||||||||||||||||||
|
1.1.1.2.1 |
Declarations of verification for track |
|
|
|
||||||||||||||||||
|
1.1.1.2.1.1 |
EC declaration of verification for track relating to compliance with the requirements from TSIs applicable to energy subsystem |
Predefined CharacterString: [CC/RRRRRRRRRRRRRR/YYYY/NNNNNN] |
Unique number for EC declarations in accordance with Commission Implementing Regulation (EU) 2019/250. |
|
|
In accordance with Implementing Decision 2014/880/EU and by 16 March 2019 at the latest |
||||||||||||||||
|
1.1.1.2.1.2 |
EI declaration of demonstration (as defined Recommendation 2014/881/EU) for track relating to compliance with the requirements from TSIs applicable to energy subsystem |
Predefined CharacterString: [CC/RRRRRRRRRRRRRR/YYYY/NNNNNN] |
Unique number for EI declarations following the same format requirements as specified for EC declarations in Annex VII of Commission Implementing Regulation (EU) 2019/250. |
|
|
In accordance with Implementing Decision 2014/880/EU and by 16 March 2019 at the latest |
||||||||||||||||
|
1.1.1.2.2 |
Contact line system |
|
|
|
||||||||||||||||||
|
1.1.1.2.2.1.1 |
Type of contact line system |
Single selection from the predefined list: Overhead contact line (OCL) Third Rail Fourth Rail Not electrified |
Indication of the type of the contact line system. |
X |
X |
In accordance with Implementing Decision 2014/880/EU and by 16 March 2019 at the latest |
||||||||||||||||
|
1.1.1.2.2.1.2 |
Energy supply system (Voltage and frequency) |
Single selection from the predefined list: AC 25kV-50Hz/ AC 15kV-16.7 Hz/ DC 3kV/ DC 1.5 kV/ DC (Specific Case FR)/ DC 750V/ DC 650V/ DC 600V/ other |
Indication of the traction supply system (nominal voltage and frequency) |
X |
X |
In accordance with Implementing Decision 2014/880/EU and by 16 March 2019 at the latest |
||||||||||||||||
|
1.1.1.2.2.1.3 |
Umax2 for lines referred to in point 7.4.2.2.1 of Regulation (EU) No 1301/2014. |
[NNNNNN] |
Specific for the French network Highest non-permanent voltage according to EN50163 for the lines referred to in point 7.4.2.2.1 of Regulation (EU) No 1301/2014. |
|
X |
16 January 2020 |
||||||||||||||||
|
1.1.1.2.2.2 |
Maximum train current |
[NNNN] |
Indication of the maximum allowable train current expressed in amperes. |
|
|
In accordance with Implementing Decision 2014/880/EU and by 16 March 2019 at the latest |
||||||||||||||||
|
1.1.1.2.2.3 |
Maximum current at standstill per pantograph |
[NNN] |
Indication of the maximum allowable train current at standstill for DC systems expressed in amperes. |
|
X |
In accordance with Implementing Decision 2014/880/EU and by 16 March 2019 at the latest |
||||||||||||||||
|
1.1.1.2.2.4 |
Permission for regenerative braking |
Single selection from the predefined list: Y/N/Only if the vehicle is able to detect emergency shutdown in accordance with EN 50 388 |
Indication whether regenerative braking is permitted, not permitted, or permitted under specific conditions. |
|
X |
In accordance with Implementing Decision 2014/880/EU and by 16 March 2019 at the latest |
||||||||||||||||
|
1.1.1.2.2.5 |
Maximum contact wire height |
[N.NN] |
Indication of the maximum contact wire height expressed in metres. |
|
X |
In accordance with Implementing Decision 2014/880/EU and by 16 March 2019 at the latest |
||||||||||||||||
|
1.1.1.2.2.6 |
Minimum contact wire height |
[N.NN] |
Indication of the minimum contact wire height expressed in metres. |
|
X |
In accordance with Implementing Decision 2014/880/EU and by 16 March 2019 at the latest |
||||||||||||||||
|
1.1.1.2.3 |
Pantograph |
|
|
|
||||||||||||||||||
|
1.1.1.2.3.1 |
Accepted TSI compliant pantograph heads |
Single selection from a predefined list |
Indication of TSI compliant pantograph heads which are allowed to be used. |
|
X |
In accordance with Implementing Decision 2014/880/EU and by 16 March 2019 at the latest |
||||||||||||||||
|
1.1.1.2.3.2 |
Accepted other pantograph heads |
Single selection from a predefined list |
Indication of pantograph heads which are allowed to be used |
|
X |
In accordance with Implementing Decision 2014/880/EU and by 16 March 2019 at the latest |
||||||||||||||||
|
1.1.1.2.3.3 |
Requirements for number of raised pantographs and spacing between them, at the given speed |
Predefined CharacterString: [N] [NNN] [NNN] |
Indication of maximum number of raised pantographs per train allowed and minimum spacing centre line to centre line of adjacent pantograph heads, expressed in metres, at the given speed. |
|
X |
In accordance with Implementing Decision 2014/880/EU and by 16 March 2019 at the latest |
||||||||||||||||
|
1.1.1.2.3.4 |
Permitted contact strip material |
Single selection from a predefined list |
Indication of which contact strip materials are permitted to be used. |
|
X |
In accordance with Implementing Decision 2014/880/EU and by 16 March 2019 at the latest |
||||||||||||||||
|
1.1.1.2.4 |
OCL separation sections |
|
|
|
||||||||||||||||||
|
1.1.1.2.4.1.1 |
Phase separation |
Single selection from predefined list: Y/N |
Indication of existence of phase separation and required information. |
|
|
In accordance with Implementing Decision 2014/880/EU and by 16 March 2019 at the latest |
||||||||||||||||
|
1.1.1.2.4.1.2 |
Information on phase separation |
Predefined CharacterString |
Indication of required several information on phase separation |
|
|
In accordance with Implementing Decision 2014/880/EU and by 16 March 2019 at the latest |
||||||||||||||||
|
1.1.1.2.4.2.1 |
System separation |
Single selection from the predefined list: Y/N |
Indication of existence of system separation |
|
|
In accordance with Implementing Decision 2014/880/EU and by 16 March 2019 at the latest |
||||||||||||||||
|
1.1.1.2.4.2.2 |
Information on system separation |
Predefined CharacterString |
Indication of required several information on system separation |
|
|
In accordance with Implementing Decision 2014/880/EU and by 16 March 2019 at the latest |
||||||||||||||||
|
1.1.1.2.4.3 |
Distance between signboard and phase separation ending |
[N] |
Specific for route compatibility check on French network. Distance between the signboard authorizing the driver to ‘raise pantograph’ or ‘close the circuit breaker’ after passing the phase separation and the end of the phase separation section. |
|
X |
16 January 2020 |
||||||||||||||||
|
1.1.1.2.5 |
Requirements for rolling stock |
|
|
|
||||||||||||||||||
|
1.1.1.2.5.1 |
Current or power limitation on board required |
Single selection from the predefined list: Y/N |
Indication of whether an on board current or power limitation function on vehicles is required. |
|
X |
In accordance with Implementing Decision 2014/880/EU and by 16 March 2019 at the latest |
||||||||||||||||
|
1.1.1.2.5.2 |
Contact force permitted |
CharacterString |
Indication of contact force allowed expressed in newton. |
|
X |
In accordance with Implementing Decision 2014/880/EU and by 16 March 2019 at the latest |
||||||||||||||||
|
1.1.1.2.5.3 |
Automatic dropping device required |
Single selection from the predefined list: Y/N |
Indication of whether an automatic dropping device (ADD) required on the vehicle. |
|
X |
In accordance with Implementing Decision 2014/880/EU and by 16 March 2019 at the latest |
||||||||||||||||
|
1.1.1.3 |
Control — command and signalling subsystem |
|
|
|
||||||||||||||||||
|
1.1.1.3.1 |
Declarations of verification for track |
|
|
|
||||||||||||||||||
|
1.1.1.3.1.1 |
EC declaration of verification for track relating to compliance with the requirements from TSIs applicable to control, command signalling subsystem |
Predefined CharacterString: [CC/RRRRRRRRRRRRRR/YYYY/NNNNNN] |
Unique number for EC declarations in accordance with Commission Implementing Regulation (EU) 2019/250. |
|
|
In accordance with Implementing Decision 2014/880/EU and by 16 March 2019 at the latest |
||||||||||||||||
|
1.1.1.3.2 |
TSI compliant train protection system (ETCS) |
|
|
|
||||||||||||||||||
|
1.1.1.3.2.1 |
European Train Control System (ETCS) level |
Single selection from a predefined list |
ETCS application level related to the track side equipment. |
X |
|
In accordance with Implementing Decision 2014/880/EU and by 16 March 2019 at the latest |
||||||||||||||||
|
1.1.1.3.2.2 |
ETCS baseline |
Single selection from a predefined list |
ETCS baseline installed lineside. |
|
|
In accordance with Implementing Decision 2014/880/EU and by 16 March 2019 at the latest |
||||||||||||||||
|
1.1.1.3.2.3 |
ETCS infill necessary for line access |
Single selection from the predefined list: Y/N |
Indication whether infill is required to access the line for safety reasons. |
X |
|
In accordance with Implementing Decision 2014/880/EU and by 16 March 2019 at the latest |
||||||||||||||||
|
1.1.1.3.2.4 |
ETCS infill installed line-side |
Single selection from the predefined list: None/Loop/GSM-R infill/Loop & GSM-R infill |
Information about installed trackside equipment capable to transmit infill information by loop or Global System for Mobile communications for Railways (GSM-R) for level 1 installations. |
|
|
In accordance with Implementing Decision 2014/880/EU and by 16 March 2019 at the latest |
||||||||||||||||
|
1.1.1.3.2.5 |
ETCS national packet 44 application implemented |
Single selection from the predefined list: Y/N |
Indication whether data for national applications is transmitted between track and train. |
|
|
In accordance with Implementing Decision 2014/880/EU and by 16 March 2019 at the latest |
||||||||||||||||
|
1.1.1.3.2.6 |
Existence of operating restrictions or conditions |
Single selection from the predefined list: Y/N |
Indication whether restrictions or conditions due to partial compliance with the CCS TSI – Commission Regulation (EU) 2016/919 (5) exist. |
|
|
In accordance with Implementing Decision 2014/880/EU and by 16 March 2019 at the latest |
||||||||||||||||
|
1.1.1.3.2.7 |
Optional ETCS functions |
CharacterString |
Optional ETCS functions which might improve operation on the line. |
Parameter deleted. To be displayed for information |
||||||||||||||||||
|
1.1.1.3.2.8 |
Train integrity confirmation from on-board necessary for line access |
Single selection from the predefined list: Y/N |
Indication whether train confirmation from on-board is required to access the line for safety reasons. |
|
X |
16 January 2020 |
||||||||||||||||
|
1.1.1.3.2.9 |
ETCS system compatibility |
Single selection from a predefined list |
ETCS requirements used for demonstrating technical compatibility |
|
X |
16 January 2020 |
||||||||||||||||
|
1.1.1.3.2.10 |
ETCS M_version |
Single selection from a predefined list |
ETCS M_version according to SRS 7.5.1.9 |
|
|
1 January 2021 |
||||||||||||||||
|
1.1.1.3.3 |
TSI compliant radio (GSM-R) |
|
|
|
||||||||||||||||||
|
1.1.1.3.3.1 |
GSM-R version |
Single selection from a predefined list |
GSM-R functional requirements specification (FRS) and system requirements specification (SRS) version number installed lineside. |
X |
|
In accordance with Implementing Decision 2014/880/EU and by 16 March 2019 at the latest |
||||||||||||||||
|
1.1.1.3.3.2 |
Number of active GSM-R mobiles (EDOR) or simultaneous communication session on board for ETCS level 2 or level 3 needed to perform radio block centre handovers without having an operational disruption |
Single selection from the predefined list: 1/2 |
Number of simultaneous communication session on board for ETCS level 2 or level 3 required for a smooth running of the train. This relates to the radio block centre (RBC) handling of communication sessions. Not safety critical and no matter of interoperability. |
|
|
In accordance with Implementing Decision 2014/880/EU and by 16 March 2019 at the latest |
||||||||||||||||
|
1.1.1.3.3.3 |
Optional GSM-R functions |
Single selection from a predefined list |
Use of optional GSM-R functions which might improve operation on the line. They are for information only and not for network access criteria. |
|
|
In accordance with Implementing Decision 2014/880/EU and by 16 March 2019 at the latest |
||||||||||||||||
|
1.1.1.3.3.3.1 |
Additional information on network characteristics |
Characterstring |
Any additional information on network characteristics or corresponding document available from the IM and stored by the Agency, e.g.; interference level, leading to the recommendation of additional on-board protection |
|
|
1 January 2021 |
||||||||||||||||
|
1.1.1.3.3.3.2 |
GPRS for ETCS |
Selection from the predefined list: Y/N |
Indication if GPRS can be used for ETCS |
|
|
1 January 2021 |
||||||||||||||||
|
1.1.1.3.3.3.3 |
Area of implementation of GPRS |
CharacterString |
Indication of the area in which GPRS can be used for ETCS |
|
|
1 January 2021 |
||||||||||||||||
|
1.1.1.3.3.4 |
Use of group 555 |
Selection from the predefined list: Y/N |
Indication if group 555 is used |
|
X |
16 January 2020 |
||||||||||||||||
|
1.1.1.3.3.5 |
GSM-R networks covered by a roaming agreement |
Single selection from a predefined list |
List of GSM-R networks which are covered by a roaming agreement |
|
X |
16 January 2020 |
||||||||||||||||
|
1.1.1.3.3.6 |
Existence of Roaming to public networks |
Selection from the predefined list: Y/N In case of Y, provide the name of the public network: |
Existence of roaming to a public networks |
|
|
1 January 2021 |
||||||||||||||||
|
1.1.1.3.3.7 |
Details on roaming to public networks |
Character string |
If roaming to public networks is configured, please indicate to which networks, for which users and in which areas. |
|
|
1 January 2021 |
||||||||||||||||
|
1.1.1.3.3.8 |
No GSMR coverage |
selection from the predefined list: Y/N |
Indication if there is a no GSMR coverage |
X |
|
1 January 2021 |
||||||||||||||||
|
1.1.1.3.3. 9 |
Radio system compatibility voice |
Single selection from a predefined list |
Radio requirements used for demonstrating technical compatibility voice |
|
X |
16 January 2020 |
||||||||||||||||
|
1.1.1.3.3.10 |
Radio system compatibility data |
Single selection from a predefined list |
Radio requirements used for demonstrating technical compatibility data |
|
X |
16 January 2020 |
||||||||||||||||
|
1.1.1.3.4 |
Train detection systems fully compliant with the TSI |
|
|
|
||||||||||||||||||
|
1.1.1.3.4.1 |
Existence of train detection system fully compliant with the TSI: |
Single selection from the predefined list: Y/N |
Indication if there is any train detection system installed and fully compliant with the CCS TSI — Regulation (EU) 2016/919 requirements. |
X |
|
In accordance with Implementing Decision 2014/880/EU and by 16 March 2019 at the latest |
||||||||||||||||
|
1.1.1.3.5 |
Train protection legacy systems |
|
|
|
||||||||||||||||||
|
1.1.1.3.5.1 |
Existence of other train protection, control and warning systems installed Train protection system |
Single selection from the predefined list: Y/N |
Indication if other train protection, control and warning systems in normal operation are installed lineside. |
Parameter deleted. To be displayed for information |
||||||||||||||||||
|
1.1.1.3.5.2 |
Need for more than one train protection, control and warning system required on-board |
Single selection from the predefined list |
Indication whether more than one train protection, control and warning system is required to be on-board and active simultaneously. |
Parameter deleted. To be displayed for information |
||||||||||||||||||
|
1.1.1.3.5.3 |
Train protection legacy system |
Single selection from the predefined list |
Indication of which class B system is installed |
X |
X |
16 January 2020 |
||||||||||||||||
|
1.1.1.3.6 |
Radio Legacy Systems |
|
|
|
||||||||||||||||||
|
1.1.1.3.6.1 |
Other radio systems installed (Radio Legacy Systems) |
Single selection from the predefined list |
Indication of radio legacy systems installed. |
X |
X |
16 January 2020 |
||||||||||||||||
|
1.1.1.3.7 |
Train detection systems not fully compliant with the TSI |
|
|
|
||||||||||||||||||
|
1.1.1.3.7.1.1 |
Type of train detection system |
Single selection from the predefined list: track circuit/wheel detector/loop |
Indication of types of train detection systems installed. |
X |
X |
In accordance with Implementing Decision 2014/880/EU and by 16 March 2019 at the latest |
||||||||||||||||
|
1.1.1.3.7.1.2 |
Type of track circuits or axle counters to which specific checks are needed |
Single selection from the predefined list |
Indication of types of train detection systems to which specific checks are needed. |
|
X |
16 January 2020 |
||||||||||||||||
|
1.1.1.3.7.1.3 |
Document with the procedure(s) related to the type of train detection systems declared in 1.1.1.3.7.1.2 |
CharacterString |
Electronic document available in two EU languages from the IM stored by the Agency with precise procedures for the specific check to be performed for train detection systems identified in 1.1.1.3.7.1.2. |
|
X |
16 January 2020 |
||||||||||||||||
|
1.1.1.3.7.1.4 |
Section with train detection limitation |
Single selection from the predefined list: Y/N |
Specific for route compatibility check on French network. Sections with:
|
|
X |
16 January 2020 |
||||||||||||||||
|
1.1.1.3.7.2.1 |
TSI compliance of maximum permitted distance between two consecutive axles |
Single selection from the predefined list: TSI compliant/TSI not compliant |
Indication whether required distance is compliant with the TSI. |
X |
|
In accordance with Implementing Decision 2014/880/EU and by 16 March 2019 at the latest |
||||||||||||||||
|
1.1.1.3.7.2.2 |
Maximum permitted distance between two consecutive axles in case of TSI non-compliance |
[NNNNN] |
Indication of maximum permitted distance between two consecutive axles in case of TSI non-compliance, given in millimetres. |
|
|
In accordance with Implementing Decision 2014/880/EU and by 16 March 2019 at the latest |
||||||||||||||||
|
1.1.1.3.7.3 |
Minimum permitted distance between two consecutive axles |
[NNNN] |
Indication of distance given in millimetres. |
|
|
In accordance with Implementing Decision 2014/880/EU and by 16 March 2019 at the latest |
||||||||||||||||
|
1.1.1.3.7.4 |
Minimum permitted distance between first and last axle |
[NNNNN] |
Indication of distance given in millimetres. |
|
|
In accordance with Implementing Decision 2014/880/EU and by 16 March 2019 at the latest |
||||||||||||||||
|
1.1.1.3.7.5 |
Maximum distance between end of train and first axle |
[NNNN] |
Indication of maximum distance between end of train and first axle given in millimetres applicable for both sides (front and rear) of a vehicle or train. |
|
|
In accordance with Implementing Decision 2014/880/EU and by 16 March 2019 at the latest |
||||||||||||||||
|
1.1.1.3.7.6 |
Minimum permitted width of the rim |
[NNN] |
Indication of width given in millimetres. |
|
|
In accordance with Implementing Decision 2014/880/EU and by 16 March 2019 at the latest |
||||||||||||||||
|
1.1.1.3.7.7 |
Minimum permitted wheel diameter |
[NNN] |
Indication of wheel diameter given in millimetres. |
|
|
In accordance with Implementing Decision 2014/880/EU and by 16 March 2019 at the latest |
||||||||||||||||
|
1.1.1.3.7.8 |
Minimum permitted thickness of the flange |
[NN.N] |
Indication of flange thickness given in millimetres. |
|
|
In accordance with Implementing Decision 2014/880/EU and by 16 March 2019 at the latest |
||||||||||||||||
|
1.1.1.3.7.9 |
Minimum permitted height of the flange |
[NN.N] |
Indication of height of flange given in millimetres. |
|
|
In accordance with Implementing Decision 2014/880/EU and by 16 March 2019 at the latest |
||||||||||||||||
|
1.1.1.3.7.10 |
Maximum permitted height of the flange |
[NN.N] |
Indication of height of flange given in millimetres. |
|
|
In accordance with Implementing Decision 2014/880/EU and by 16 March 2019 at the latest |
||||||||||||||||
|
1.1.1.3.7.11 |
Minimum permitted axle load |
[NN.N] |
Indication of load given in tons. |
Parameter deleted. To be displayed for information |
||||||||||||||||||
|
1.1.1.3.7.11.1 |
Minimum permitted axle load per category of vehicle |
Single selection from a predefined list |
Indication of load given in tons depending of the category of vehicle. |
|
|
1 January 2021 |
||||||||||||||||
|
1.1.1.3.7.12 |
TSI compliance of rules for metal-free space around wheels |
Single selection from the predefined list: TSI compliant/not TSI compliant |
Indication whether rules are compliant with the TSI. |
|
|
In accordance with Implementing Decision 2014/880/EU and by 16 March 2019 at the latest |
||||||||||||||||
|
1.1.1.3.7.13 |
TSI compliance of rules for vehicle metal construction |
Single selection from the predefined list: TSI compliant/not TSI compliant |
Indication whether rules are compliant with the TSI. |
|
|
In accordance with Implementing Decision 2014/880/EU and by 16 March 2019 at the latest |
||||||||||||||||
|
1.1.1.3.7.14 |
TSI compliance of ferromagnetic characteristics of wheel material required |
Single selection from the predefined list: TSI compliant/not TSI compliant |
Indication whether rules are compliant with the TSI. |
|
|
In accordance with Implementing Decision 2014/880/EU and by 16 March 2019 at the latest |
||||||||||||||||
|
1.1.1.3.7.15.1 |
TSI compliance of maximum permitted impedance between opposite wheels of a wheelset |
Single selection from the predefined list: TSI compliant/not TSI compliant |
Indication whether rules are compliant with the TSI. |
|
|
In accordance with Implementing Decision 2014/880/EU and by 16 March 2019 at the latest |
||||||||||||||||
|
1.1.1.3.7.15.2 |
Maximum permitted impedance between opposite wheels of a wheelset when not TSI compliant |
[N.NNN] |
The value of maximum permitted impedance given in ohm in case of TSI non-compliance |
|
|
In accordance with Implementing Decision 2014/880/EU and by 16 March 2019 at the latest |
||||||||||||||||
|
1.1.1.3.7.16 |
TSI compliance of sanding |
Single selection from predefined list: TSI compliant/not TSI compliant |
Indication whether rules are compliant with the TSI or not |
Parameter deleted. To be displayed for information |
||||||||||||||||||
|
1.1.1.3.7.17 |
Maximum amount of sand |
Single selection from a predefined list |
Maximum amount of sand within 30s given in grams accepted on the track |
|
|
1 January 2021 |
||||||||||||||||
|
1.1.1.3.7.18 |
Sanding override by driver required |
Single selection from the predefined list: Y/N |
Indication whether possibility to activate/deactivate sanding devices by driver, according to instructions from the Infrastructure Manager, is required or not. |
|
|
In accordance with Implementing Decision 2014/880/EU and by 16 March 2019 at the latest |
||||||||||||||||
|
1.1.1.3.7.19 |
TSI Compliance of rules on sand characteristics |
Single selection from the predefined list: TSI compliant/not TSI compliant |
Indication whether rules are compliant with the TSI. |
|
|
In accordance with Implementing Decision 2014/880/EU and by 16 March 2019 at the latest |
||||||||||||||||
|
1.1.1.3.7.20 |
Existence of rules on on-board flange lubrication |
Single selection from the predefined list: Y/N |
Indication whether rules for activation or deactivation of flange lubrication exist. |
|
|
In accordance with Implementing Decision 2014/880/EU and by 16 March 2019 at the latest |
||||||||||||||||
|
1.1.1.3.7.21 |
TSI compliance of rules on the use of composite brake blocks |
Single selection from the predefined list: TSI compliant/not TSI compliant |
Indication whether rules are compliant with the TSI. |
|
|
In accordance with Implementing Decision 2014/880/EU and by 16 March 2019 at the latest |
||||||||||||||||
|
1.1.1.3.7.22 |
TSI compliance of rules on shunt assisting devices |
Single selection from the predefined list: TSI compliant/not TSI compliant |
Indication whether rules are compliant with the TSI. |
|
|
In accordance with Implementing Decision 2014/880/EU and by 16 March 2019 at the latest |
||||||||||||||||
|
1.1.1.3.7.23 |
TSI compliance of rules on combination of RST characteristics influencing shunting impedance |
Single selection from the predefined list: TSI compliant/not TSI compliant |
Indication whether rules are compliant with the TSI. |
|
|
In accordance with Implementing Decision 2014/880/EU and by 16 March 2019 at the latest |
||||||||||||||||
|
1.1.1.3.8 |
Transitions between systems |
|
|
|
||||||||||||||||||
|
1.1.1.3.8.1 |
Existence of switch over between different protection, control and warning systems while running |
Single selection from the predefined list: Y/N |
Indication whether a switch over between different systems whilst running exist |
|
|
In accordance with Implementing Decision 2014/880/EU and by 16 March 2019 at the latest |
||||||||||||||||
|
1.1.1.3.8.2 |
Existence of switch over between different radio systems |
Single selection from the predefined list: Y/N |
Indication whether a switch over between different radio systems and no communication system whilst running exist |
|
|
In accordance with Implementing Decision 2014/880/EU and by 16 March 2019 at the latest |
||||||||||||||||
|
1.1.1.3.9 |
Parameters related to electromagnetic interferences |
|
|
|
||||||||||||||||||
|
1.1.1.3.9.1 |
Existence and TSI compliance of rules for magnetic fields emitted by a vehicle |
Single selection from the predefined list: none/TSI compliant/not TSI compliant |
Indication whether rules exist and are compliant with the TSI. |
|
|
In accordance with Implementing Decision 2014/880/EU and by 16 March 2019 at the latest |
||||||||||||||||
|
1.1.1.3.9.2 |
Existence and TSI compliance of limits in harmonics in the traction current of vehicles |
Single selection from the predefined list: none/TSI compliant/not TSI compliant |
Indication whether rules exist and are compliant with the TSI. |
|
|
In accordance with Implementing Decision 2014/880/EU and by 16 March 2019 at the latest |
||||||||||||||||
|
1.1.1.3.10 |
Line-side system for degraded situation |
|
|
|
||||||||||||||||||
|
1.1.1.3.10.1 |
ETCS level for degraded situation |
Single selection from a predefined list |
ERTMS/ETCS application level for degraded situation related to the track side equipment. |
|
|
In accordance with Implementing Decision 2014/880/EU and by 16 March 2019 at the latest |
||||||||||||||||
|
1.1.1.3.10.2 |
Other train protection, control and warning systems for degraded situation |
Single selection from a predefined list |
Indication of existence of other system than ETCS for degraded situation. |
|
|
In accordance with Implementing Decision 2014/880/EU and by 16 March 2019 at the latest |
||||||||||||||||
|
1.1.1.3.11 |
Brake related parameters |
|
|
|
||||||||||||||||||
|
1.1.1.3.11.1 |
Maximum braking distance requested |
[NNNN] |
The maximum value of the braking distance [in metres] of a train shall be given for the maximum line speed. |
X |
X |
In accordance with Implementing Decision 2014/880/EU and by 16 March 2019 at the latest |
||||||||||||||||
|
1.1.1.3.11.2 |
Availability by the IM of additional information |
Single selection from the predefined list: Y/N |
Availability by the IM of additional information as defined in point (2) of point 4.2.2.6.2 of the Annex to Regulation (EU) 2019/773 |
X |
X |
16 January 2020 |
||||||||||||||||
|
1.1.1.3.11.3 |
Documents available by the IM relating to braking performance |
CharacterString |
Electronic document available in two EU languages from the IM stored by the Agency providing additional information as defined in point (2) of point 4.2.2.6.2 of the Annex to Implementing Regulation (EU) 2019/773. |
|
X |
16 January 2020 |
||||||||||||||||
|
1.1.1.3.12 |
Other CCS related parameters |
|
|
|
||||||||||||||||||
|
1.1.1.3.12.1 |
Tilting supported |
Single selection from the predefined list: Y/N |
Indication whether tilting functions are supported by ETCS. |
Parameter deleted. To be displayed for information |
||||||||||||||||||
|
1.1.1.4 |
Rules and restrictions |
|
|
|
||||||||||||||||||
|
1.1.1.4.1 |
Existence of rules and restrictions of a strictly local nature |
Single selection from the predefined list: Y/N |
Existence of rules and restrictions of a strictly local nature |
|
|
1 January 2021 |
||||||||||||||||
|
1.1.1.4.2 |
Documents regarding the rules or restrictions of a strictly local nature available by the IM |
CharacterString |
Electronic document available from the IM stored by the Agency providing additional information |
|
|
1 January 2021 |
||||||||||||||||
|
1.2 |
OPERATIONAL POINT |
|
|
|
||||||||||||||||||
|
1.2.0.0.0 |
Generic information |
|
|
|
||||||||||||||||||
|
1.2.0.0.0.1 |
Name of operational point |
CharacterString |
Name normally related to the town or village or to traffic control purpose |
X |
|
In accordance with Implementing Decision 2014/880/EU and by 16 March 2019 at the latest |
||||||||||||||||
|
1.2.0.0.0.2 |
Unique OP ID |
Predefined CharacterString: [AA+AAAAAAAAAA] |
Code composed of country code and alphanumeric OP code. |
X |
|
In accordance with Implementing Decision 2014/880/EU and by 16 March 2019 at the latest |
||||||||||||||||
|
1.2.0.0.0.3 |
OP TAF TAP primary code |
Predefined CharacterString: [AANNNNN] |
Primary code developed for TAF/TAP. |
|
|
In accordance with Implementing Decision 2014/880/EU and by 16 March 2019 at the latest |
||||||||||||||||
|
1.2.0.0.0.4 |
Type of operational point |
Single selection from a predefined list |
Type of facility in relation to the dominating operational functions. |
X |
|
In accordance with Implementing Decision 2014/880/EU and by 16 March 2019 at the latest |
||||||||||||||||
|
1.2.0.0.0.4.1 |
Type of track gauge changeover facility |
CharacterString |
Type of track gauge changeover facility |
|
X |
16 January 2020 |
||||||||||||||||
|
1.2.0.0.0.5 |
Geographical location of operational point |
Predefined CharacterString: [Latitude (NN.NNNN) + Longitude (± NN.NNNN)] |
Geographical coordinates in decimal degrees normally given for the centre of the OP. |
X |
X |
In accordance with Implementing Decision 2014/880/EU and by 16 March 2019 at the latest |
||||||||||||||||
|
1.2.0.0.0.6 |
Railway location of Operational point |
Predefined CharacterString: [NNN.NNN] + [CharacterString] |
Kilometre related to line identification defining the location of the OP. This will normally be in the centre of the OP. |
X |
X |
In accordance with Implementing Decision 2014/880/EU and by 16 March 2019 at the latest |
||||||||||||||||
|
1.2.1 |
RUNNING TRACK |
|
|
|
||||||||||||||||||
|
1.2.1.0.0 |
Generic information |
|
|
|
||||||||||||||||||
|
1.2.1.0.0.1 |
IM's code |
[AAAA] |
Infrastructure manager means any body or undertaking that is responsible in particular for establishing and maintaining railway infrastructure or a part thereof. |
X |
|
In accordance with Implementing Decision 2014/880/EU and by 16 March 2019 at the latest |
||||||||||||||||
|
1.2.1.0.0.2 |
Identification of track |
CharacterString |
Unique track identification or unique track number within OP |
X |
|
In accordance with Implementing Decision 2014/880/EU and by 16 March 2019 at the latest |
||||||||||||||||
|
1.2.1.0.1 |
Declarations of verification for track |
|
|
|
||||||||||||||||||
|
1.2.1.0.1.1 |
EC declaration of verification for track relating to compliance with the requirements from TSIs applicable to infrastructure subsystem |
Predefined CharacterString: [CC/RRRRRRRRRRRRRR/YYYY/NNNNNN] |
Unique number for EC declarations in accordance with Commission Implementing Regulation (EU) 2019/250. |
|
|
In accordance with Implementing Decision 2014/880/EU and by 16 March 2019 at the latest |
||||||||||||||||
|
1.2.1.0.1.2 |
EI declaration of demonstration (as defined Recommendation 2014/881/EU) relating to compliance with the requirements from TSIs applicable to infrastructure subsystem |
Predefined CharacterString: [CC/RRRRRRRRRRRRRR/YYYY/NNNNNN] |
Unique number for EI declarations following the same format requirements as specified for EC declarations in Annex VII of Commission Implementing Regulation (EU) 2019/250. |
|
|
In accordance with Implementing Decision 2014/880/EU and by 16 March 2019 at the latest |
||||||||||||||||
|
1.2.1.0.2 |
Performance parameters |
|
|
|
||||||||||||||||||
|
1.2.1.0.2.1 |
TEN classification of track |
Single selection from the predefined list: Part of the TEN-T Comprehensive Network/Part of the TEN-T Core Freight Network/Part of the TEN-T Core Passenger Network/Off-TEN |
Indication of the part of the trans-European network the track belongs to. |
X |
|
In accordance with Implementing Decision 2014/880/EU and by 16 March 2019 at the latest |
||||||||||||||||
|
1.2.1.0.2.2 |
Category of line: |
Single selection from a predefined list |
Classification of a line according to the INF TSI — Regulation (EU) No 1299/2014. |
|
|
In accordance with Implementing Decision 2014/880/EU and by 16 March 2019 at the latest |
||||||||||||||||
|
1.2.1.0.2.3 |
Part of a Railway Freight Corridor |
Single selection from a predefined list |
Indication whether the line is designated to a Railway Freight Corridor |
|
|
In accordance with Implementing Decision 2014/880/EU and by 16 March 2019 at the latest |
||||||||||||||||
|
1.2.1.0.3 |
Line layout |
|
|
|
||||||||||||||||||
|
1.2.1.0.3.1 |
Interoperable gauge |
Single selection from the predefined list: GA/GB/GC/G1/DE3/S/IRL1/none |
Gauges GA, GB, GC, G1, DE3, S, IRL1 as defined in European standard. |
Parameter deleted. To be displayed for information |
||||||||||||||||||
|
1.2.1.0.3.2 |
Multinational gauges: |
Single selection from the predefined list: G2/GB1/GB2/none |
Multilateral gauge or international gauge other than GA, GB, GC, G1, DE3, S, IRL1 as defined in European standard. |
Parameter deleted. To be displayed for information |
||||||||||||||||||
|
1.2.1.0.3.3 |
National gauges |
Single selection from a predefined list |
Domestic gauge as defined in European standard or other local gauge. |
Parameter deleted. To be displayed for information |
||||||||||||||||||
|
1.2.1.0.3.4 |
Gauging |
Single selection from a predefined list |
Gauges as defined in European standard or other local gauges, including lower or upper part. |
X |
X |
16 January 2020 |
||||||||||||||||
|
1.2.1.0.3.5 |
Railway location of particular points requiring specific checks |
Predefined CharacterString: [± NNNN.NNN] + [CharacterString] |
Location of particular points requiring specific checks due to deviations from gauging referred to in 1.2.1.0.3.4. |
|
X |
16 January 2020 |
||||||||||||||||
|
1.2.1.0.3.6 |
Document with the transversal section of the particular points requiring specific checks |
CharacterString |
Electronic document available from the IM stored by the Agency with the transversal section of the particular points requiring specific checks due to deviations from gauging referred to in 1.2.1.0.3.4. Where relevant, guidance for the check with the particular point may be attached to the document with the transversal section. |
|
X |
16 January 2020 |
||||||||||||||||
|
1.2.1.0.4 |
Track parameters |
|
|
|
||||||||||||||||||
|
1.2.1.0.4.1 |
Nominal track gauge |
Single selection from the predefined list: 750/1000/1435/1520/1524/1600/1668/other |
A single value expressed in millimetres that identifies the track gauge. |
X |
X |
In accordance with Implementing Decision 2014/880/EU and by 16 March 2019 at the latest |
||||||||||||||||
|
1.2.1.0.5 |
Tunnel |
|
|
|
||||||||||||||||||
|
1.2.1.0.5.1 |
IM's code |
[AAAA] |
Infrastructure manager means any body or undertaking that is responsible in particular for establishing and maintaining railway infrastructure or a part thereof. |
X |
|
In accordance with Implementing Decision 2014/880/EU and by 16 March 2019 at the latest |
||||||||||||||||
|
1.2.1.0.5.2 |
Tunnel identification |
CharacterString |
Unique tunnel identification or unique tunnel number within MS |
X |
|
In accordance with Implementing Decision 2014/880/EU and by 16 March 2019 at the latest |
||||||||||||||||
|
1.2.1.0.5.3 |
EC declaration of verification for tunnel relating to compliance with the requirements from TSIs applicable to railway tunnel |
CharacterString: [CC/RRRRRRRRRRRRRR/YYYY/NNNNNN] |
Unique number for EC declarations in accordance with Commission Implementing Regulation (EU) 2019/250. |
|
|
In accordance with Implementing Decision 2014/880/EU and by 16 March 2019 at the latest |
||||||||||||||||
|
1.2.1.0.5.4 |
EI declaration of demonstration (as defined Recommendation 2014/881/EU) for tunnel relating to compliance with the requirements from TSIs applicable to railway tunnel |
Predefined CharacterString: [CC/RRRRRRRRRRRRRR/YYYY/NNNNNN] |
Unique number for EI declarations following the same format requirements as specified for EC declarations in Annex VII of Commission Implementing Regulation (EU) 2019/250. |
|
|
In accordance with Implementing Decision 2014/880/EU and by 16 March 2019 at the latest |
||||||||||||||||
|
1.2.1.0.5.5 |
Length of tunnel |
[NNNNN] |
Length of a tunnel in metres from entrance portal to exit portal. |
|
|
In accordance with Implementing Decision 2014/880/EU and by 16 March 2019 at the latest |
||||||||||||||||
|
1.2.1.0.5.6 |
Existence of emergency plan |
Single selection from the predefined list: Y/N |
Indication whether emergency plan exists. |
|
|
In accordance with Implementing Decision 2014/880/EU and by 16 March 2019 at the latest |
||||||||||||||||
|
1.2.1.0.5.7 |
Fire category of rolling stock required |
Single selection from the predefined list: A/B/none |
Categorisation how a passenger train with a fire on board will continue to operate for a defined time period |
|
X |
In accordance with Implementing Decision 2014/880/EU and by 16 March 2019 at the latest |
||||||||||||||||
|
1.2.1.0.5.8 |
National fire category of rolling stock required |
CharacterString |
Categorisation how a passenger train with a fire on board will continue to operate for a defined time period — according to national rules if they exist |
|
X |
In accordance with Implementing Decision 2014/880/EU and by 16 March 2019 at the latest |
||||||||||||||||
|
1.2.1.0.5.9 |
Diesel or other thermal traction allowed |
Single selection from the predefined list: Y/N |
Indication whether it is allowed to use diesel or other thermal traction in the tunnel |
|
|
1 January 2021 |
||||||||||||||||
|
1.2.1.0.6 |
Platform |
|
|
|
||||||||||||||||||
|
1.2.1.0.6.1 |
IM's code |
[AAAA] |
Infrastructure manager means any body or undertaking that is responsible in particular for establishing and maintaining railway infrastructure or a part thereof. |
X |
|
In accordance with Implementing Decision 2014/880/EU and by 16 March 2019 at the latest |
||||||||||||||||
|
1.2.1.0.6.2 |
Identification of platform |
CharacterString |
Unique platform identification or unique platform number within OP |
X |
|
In accordance with Implementing Decision 2014/880/EU and by 16 March 2019 at the latest |
||||||||||||||||
|
1.2.1.0.6.3 |
TEN Classification of platform |
Single selection from the predefined list: Part of the TEN-T Comprehensive Network/Part of the TEN-T Core Freight Network/Part of the TEN-T Core Passenger Network/Off-TEN |
Indicates the part of the trans-European network the platform belongs to. |
X |
|
In accordance with Implementing Decision 2014/880/EU and by 16 March 2019 at the latest |
||||||||||||||||
|
1.2.1.0.6.4 |
Usable length of platform |
[NNNN] |
The maximum continuous length (expressed in metres) of that part of platform in front of which a train is intended to remain stationary in normal operating conditions for passengers to board and alight from the train, making appropriate allowance for stopping tolerances. |
X |
X |
In accordance with Implementing Decision 2014/880/EU and by 16 March 2019 at the latest |
||||||||||||||||
|
1.2.1.0.6.5 |
Height of platform |
Single selection from the predefined list: 250/280/550/760/300-380/200/580/680/685/730/840/900/915/920/960/1100/other |
Distance between the upper surface of platform and running surface of the neighbouring track. It is the nominal value expressed in millimetres. |
X |
X |
In accordance with Implementing Decision 2014/880/EU and by 16 March 2019 at the latest |
||||||||||||||||
|
1.2.1.0.6.6 |
Existence of platform assistance for starting train |
Single selection from the predefined list: Y/N |
Indication of existence of equipment or staff supporting the train crew in starting the train. |
X |
|
In accordance with Implementing Decision 2014/880/EU and by 16 March 2019 at the latest |
||||||||||||||||
|
1.2.1.0.6.7 |
Range of use of the platform boarding aid |
[NNNN] |
Information of the train access level for which the boarding aid can be used. |
X |
|
In accordance with Implementing Decision 2014/880/EU and by 16 March 2019 at the latest |
||||||||||||||||
|
1.2.2 |
SIDING |
|
|
|
||||||||||||||||||
|
1.2.2.0.0 |
Generic information |
|
|
|
||||||||||||||||||
|
1.2.2.0.0.1 |
IM's code |
[AAAA] |
Infrastructure manager means any body or undertaking that is responsible in particular for establishing and maintaining railway infrastructure or a part thereof. |
X |
|
In accordance with Implementing Decision 2014/880/EU and by 16 March 2019 at the latest |
||||||||||||||||
|
1.2.2.0.0.2 |
Identification of siding |
CharacterString |
Unique siding identification or unique siding number within OP |
X |
|
In accordance with Implementing Decision 2014/880/EU and by 16 March 2019 at the latest |
||||||||||||||||
|
1.2.2.0.0.3 |
TEN Classification of siding |
Single selection from the predefined list: Part of the TEN-T Comprehensive Network/Part of the TEN-T Core Freight Network/Part of the TEN-T Core Passenger Network/Off-TEN |
Indicates the part of the trans-European network the siding belongs to. |
X |
|
In accordance with Implementing Decision 2014/880/EU and by 16 March 2019 at the latest |
||||||||||||||||
|
1.2.2.0.1 |
Declaration of verification for siding |
|
|
|
||||||||||||||||||
|
1.2.2.0.1.1 |
EC declaration of verification for siding relating to compliance with the requirements from TSIs applicable to infrastructure subsystem |
Predefined CharacterString: [CC/RRRRRRRRRRRRRR/YYYY/NNNNNN] |
Unique number for EC declarations in accordance with Commission Implementing Regulation (EU) 2019/250. |
|
|
In accordance with Implementing Decision 2014/880/EU and by 16 March 2019 at the latest |
||||||||||||||||
|
1.2.2.0.1.2 |
EI declaration of demonstration (as defined Recommendation 2014/881/EU) for siding relating to compliance with the requirements from TSIs applicable to infrastructure subsystem |
Predefined CharacterString: [CC/RRRRRRRRRRRRRR/YYYY/NNNNNN] |
Unique number for EI declarations following the same format requirements as specified for EC declarations in Annex VII of Commission Implementing Regulation (EU) 2019/250. |
|
|
In accordance with Implementing Decision 2014/880/EU and by 16 March 2019 at the latest |
||||||||||||||||
|
1.2.2.0.2 |
Performance parameter |
|
|
|
||||||||||||||||||
|
1.2.2.0.2.1 |
Usable length of siding |
[NNNN] |
Total length of the siding/stabling track expressed in metres where trains can be parked safely. |
X |
X |
In accordance with Implementing Decision 2014/880/EU and by 16 March 2019 at the latest |
||||||||||||||||
|
1.2.2.0.3 |
Line layout |
|
|
|
||||||||||||||||||
|
1.2.2.0.3.1 |
Gradient for stabling tracks |
[NN.N] |
Maximum value of the gradient expressed in millimetres per metre. |
|
X |
In accordance with Implementing Decision 2014/880/EU and by 16 March 2019 at the latest |
||||||||||||||||
|
1.2.2.0.3.2 |
Minimum radius of horizontal curve |
[NNN] |
Radius of the smallest horizontal curve, expressed in metres. |
|
X |
In accordance with Implementing Decision 2014/880/EU and by 16 March 2019 at the latest |
||||||||||||||||
|
1.2.2.0.3.3 |
Minimum radius of vertical curve |
[NNN+NNN] |
Radius of the smallest vertical curve expressed in metres. |
|
X |
In accordance with Implementing Decision 2014/880/EU and by 16 March 2019 at the latest |
||||||||||||||||
|
1.2.2.0.4 |
Fixed installations for servicing trains |
|
|
|
||||||||||||||||||
|
1.2.2.0.4.1 |
Existence of toilet discharge |
Single selection from the predefined list: Y/N |
Indication whether exists an installation of toilet discharge (fixed installation for servicing trains) as defined in INF TSI — Regulation (EU) No 1299/2014. |
X |
|
In accordance with Implementing Decision 2014/880/EU and by 16 March 2019 at the latest |
||||||||||||||||
|
1.2.2.0.4.2 |
Existence of external cleaning facilities |
Single selection from the predefined list: Y/N |
Indication whether exists an installation of external cleaning facility (fixed installation for servicing trains) as defined in INF TSI — Regulation (EU) No 1299/2014. |
X |
|
In accordance with Implementing Decision 2014/880/EU and by 16 March 2019 at the latest |
||||||||||||||||
|
1.2.2.0.4.3 |
Existence of water restocking |
Single selection from the predefined list: Y/N |
Indication whether exists an installation of water restocking (fixed installation for servicing trains) as defined in INF TSI — Regulation (EU) No 1299/2014. |
X |
|
In accordance with Implementing Decision 2014/880/EU and by 16 March 2019 at the latest |
||||||||||||||||
|
1.2.2.0.4.4 |
Existence of refuelling |
Single selection from the predefined list: Y/N |
Indication whether exists an installation of refuelling (fixed installation for servicing trains) as defined in INF TSI — Regulation (EU) No 1299/2014. |
X |
|
In accordance with Implementing Decision 2014/880/EU and by 16 March 2019 at the latest |
||||||||||||||||
|
1.2.2.0.4.5 |
Existence of sand restocking |
Single selection from the predefined list: Y/N |
Indication whether an installation of sand restocking exists (fixed installation for servicing trains). |
X |
|
In accordance with Implementing Decision 2014/880/EU and by 16 March 2019 at the latest |
||||||||||||||||
|
1.2.2.0.4.6 |
Existence of electric shore supply |
Single selection from the predefined list: Y/N |
Indication whether exists an installation of electric shore supply (fixed installation for servicing trains). |
X |
|
In accordance with Implementing Decision 2014/880/EU and by 16 March 2019 at the latest |
||||||||||||||||
|
1.2.2.0.5 |
Tunnel |
|
|
|
||||||||||||||||||
|
1.2.2.0.5.1 |
IM's code |
[AAAA] |
Infrastructure manager means any body or undertaking that is responsible in particular for establishing and maintaining railway infrastructure or a part thereof. |
X |
|
In accordance with Implementing Decision 2014/880/EU and by 16 March 2019 at the latest |
||||||||||||||||
|
1.2.2.0.5.2 |
Tunnel identification |
CharacterString |
Unique tunnel identification or unique number within Member State |
X |
|
In accordance with Implementing Decision 2014/880/EU and by 16 March 2019 at the latest |
||||||||||||||||
|
1.2.2.0.5.3 |
EC declaration of verification for tunnel relating to compliance with the requirements from TSIs applicable to railway tunnel |
Predefined CharacterString: [CC/RRRRRRRRRRRRRR/YYYY/NNNNNN] |
Unique number for EC declarations in accordance with Commission Implementing Regulation (EU) 2019/250. |
|
|
In accordance with Implementing Decision 2014/880/EU and by 16 March 2019 at the latest |
||||||||||||||||
|
1.2.2.0.5.4 |
EI declaration of demonstration (as defined Recommendation 2014/881/EU) for tunnel relating to compliance with the requirements from TSIs applicable to railway tunnel |
Predefined CharacterString: [CC/RRRRRRRRRRRRRR/YYYY/NNNNNN] |
Unique number for EI declarations following the same format requirements as specified for EC declarations in Annex VII of Commission Implementing Regulation (EU) 2019/250. |
|
|
In accordance with Implementing Decision 2014/880/EU and by 16 March 2019 at the latest |
||||||||||||||||
|
1.2.2.0.5.5 |
Length of tunnel |
[NNNNN] |
Length of a tunnel in metres from entrance portal to exit portal. |
|
|
In accordance with Implementing Decision 2014/880/EU and by 16 March 2019 at the latest |
||||||||||||||||
|
1.2.2.0.5.6 |
Existence of emergency plan |
Single selection from the predefined list: Y/N |
Indication whether emergency plan exists. |
|
|
In accordance with Implementing Decision 2014/880/EU and by 16 March 2019 at the latest |
||||||||||||||||
|
1.2.2.0.5.7 |
Fire category of rolling stock required |
Single selection from the predefined list: A/B/none |
Categorisation how a passenger train with a fire on board will continue to operate for a defined time period. |
|
X |
In accordance with Implementing Decision 2014/880/EU and by 16 March 2019 at the latest |
||||||||||||||||
|
1.2.2.0.5.8 |
National fire category of rolling stock required |
CharacterString |
Categorisation how a passenger train with a fire on board will continue to operate for a defined time period — according to national rules if they exist. |
|
X |
In accordance with Implementing Decision 2014/880/EU and by 16 March 2019 at the latest |
||||||||||||||||
|
1.2.2.0.6 |
Contact line system |
|
|
|
||||||||||||||||||
|
1.2.2.0.6.1 |
Maximum current at standstill per pantograph |
[NNN] |
Indication of the maximum allowable train current at standstill for DC systems expressed in amperes. |
|
X |
16 January 2020 |
||||||||||||||||
|
1.2.3 |
Rules and restrictions |
|
|
|
||||||||||||||||||
|
1.2.3.1 |
Existence of rules and restrictions of a strictly local nature |
Single selection from the predefined list: Y/N |
Existence of rules and restrictions of a strictly local nature |
|
|
1 January 2021 |
||||||||||||||||
|
1.2.3.2 |
Documents regarding the rules or restrictions of a strictly local nature available by the IM |
CharacterString |
Electronic document available from the IM stored by the Agency providing additional information |
|
|
1 January 2021 |
||||||||||||||||
4. HIGH LEVEL SYSTEM OVERVIEW
4.1. Register of infrastructure system
The architecture of the registers of infrastructure system shall be as follows.
Figure 1
RINF system
4.2. Administration of the RINF application
The RINF application shall be a web-based application set up, managed, maintained and administered by the Agency.
The Agency shall make available to the national registration entities (NREs) the following files and documents to be used for the setting up of the registers of infrastructure and connecting them with the RINF application:
|
(a) |
user manual; |
|
(b) |
specification of the structure of the files for the transmission of data; |
|
(c) |
description of codes for preparing the files — Guide describing the validation process of the transmitted files. |
4.3. Minimum required functionality of the RINF application
The RINF application shall provide at least the following functionalities:
|
(a) |
user management: the RINF application administrator must be able to manage users' access rights; |
|
(b) |
information auditing: the RINF application administrator must be able to view the logs of all user activity performed on the RINF application as a list of the activities that have been performed by RINF application users within a particular timeframe; |
|
(c) |
connectivity and authentication: the registered RINF application users must be able to connect to the RINF application via internet and use its functionalities according to their rights; |
|
(d) |
prepare files for infrastructure managers users; |
|
(e) |
merge files for national registration entity users; |
|
(f) |
search for the register of infrastructure data including OPs and/or SoLs, including data validity dates; |
|
(g) |
select an OP or a SoL and view its details: the RINF application users must be able to define a geographical area using the map interface and the RINF application provides the available data requested by the users for this area; |
|
(h) |
view information for a specified subset of lines and OPs in a defined area via a map interface; |
|
(i) |
visual representation of items of the register of infrastructure on a digital map: the users, through the RINF application, must be able to navigate, select an item depicted on the map and retrieve any relevant information; |
|
(j) |
visual representation of data of the register of infrastructure allowing publication of thematic maps; |
|
(k) |
list SoLs and OPs which are part of a route defined by the user and export the corresponding characteristics; |
|
(l) |
deliver a certificate each time the export of characteristics resulting from a search is intended to be used by a railway undertaking in accordance with Article 23(1) of Directive (EU) 2016/797; |
|
(m) |
application programming interface (API); |
|
(n) |
validation, upload and reception of the data sets provided by a national register entity. |
4.4. Operating mode
The register of infrastructure system shall provide two main interfaces via the RINF application:
|
(a) |
one which is to be used by Member States in order to submit their set of data; |
|
(b) |
the other which is to be used by RINF application users in order to connect to the system and retrieve information. |
Pending the evolution of the RINF application to allow infrastructure managers to update information directly in it, the RINF application central database shall be fed with copies of the sets of data maintained by each Member State. In particular, NREs shall create files that encapsulate the full set of data following the specifications of Table 1 and submit it to the RINF application in accordance with Article 5.
NREs shall upload the files to the RINF application through a dedicated interface provided for this operation. A specific module shall facilitate the validation and uploading of data provided by NREs.
The RINF application central database shall make data sent by NREs publicly available without any modification.
The basic functionality of the RINF application shall allow users to search and retrieve data of register of infrastructure.
The RINF application shall retain the complete historical record of data made available by NREs. Those records shall be stored for two years from the date of withdrawal of the data.
The Agency, as administrator of the RINF application, shall provide access to users upon request.
Answers to the queries initiated by the RINF application users shall be provided within 24 hours from the moment the query was initiated.
4.5. Availability
The RINF application shall be available seven days a week. The unavailability of the system shall be minimal during maintenance.
In the case of failure outside the normal working hours of the Agency, the actions to restore the service shall start the next Agency working day.
5. APPLICATION GUIDE FOR THE COMMON SPECIFICATIONS
The application guide for the common specifications referred to in Article 7 shall be made publicly available by the Agency on its website and updated as appropriate.
It shall provide extended definitions of all the objects and parameters of the register of infrastructure and guidance on the most common situations and on solutions for modelling the railway network.
It shall contain in particular:
|
(a) |
description of the functionalities provided by the RINF application; |
|
(b) |
items and their corresponding description as specified as section 3.3 and in Table 1. For each field, at least its format, limit of value, conditions under which parameter is applicable and mandatory, railway technical rules for parameters values, reference to TSIs and other technical documents related to items of the register of infrastructure; |
|
(c) |
detailed definitions and specifications for parameters; |
|
(d) |
presentation of provisions for modelling the network and collecting data with relevant explanations and examples; |
|
(e) |
procedures for validation and submission of data from registers of infrastructure of the Member States to the RINF application. |
The application guide shall provide explanations on the specifications referred to in this Annex which are necessary for the proper development of the register of infrastructure system.
(1) Commission Implementing Regulation (EU) 2019/250 of 12 February 2019 on the templates for ‘EC’ declarations and certificates for railway interoperability constituents and subsystems, on the model of declaration of conformity to an authorised railway vehicle type and on the ‘EC’ verification procedures for subsystems in accordance with Directive (EU) 2016/797 of the European Parliament and of the Council and repealing Commission Regulation (EU) No 201/2011 (OJ L 42, 13.2.2019, p. 9).
(2) Commission Recommendation 2014/881/EU of 18 November 2014 on the procedure for demonstrating the level of compliance of existing railway lines with the basic parameters of the technical specifications for interoperability (OJ L 356, 12.12.2014, p. 520).
(3) Commission Regulation (EU) No 1299/2014 of 18 November 2014 on the technical specifications for interoperability relating to the ‘infrastructure’ subsystem of the rail system in the European Union (OJ L 356, 12.12.2014, p. 1).
(4) Commission Regulation (EU) No 1304/2014 of 26 November 2014 on the technical specification for interoperability relating to the subsystem ‘rolling stock — noise’ amending Decision 2008/232/EC and repealing Decision 2011/229/EU (OJ L 356, 12.12.2014, p. 421).
(5) Commission Regulation (EU) 2016/919 of 27 May 2016 on the technical specification for interoperability relating to the ‘control-command and signalling’ subsystems of the rail system in the European Union (OJ L 158, 15.6.2016, p. 1).
|
27.5.2019 |
EN |
Official Journal of the European Union |
LI 139/356 |
COMMISSION IMPLEMENTING REGULATION (EU) 2019/778
of 16 May 2019
amending Regulation (EU) No 1305/2014 as regards Change Control Management
(Text with EEA relevance)
THE EUROPEAN COMMISSION,
Having regard to the Treaty on the Functioning of the European Union,
Having regard to Directive (EU) 2016/797 of the European Parliament and of the Council of 11 May 2016 on the interoperability of the rail system within the European Union (1), and in particular Article 5(11) thereof,
Whereas:
|
(1) |
Article 19 of Regulation (EU) 2016/796 of the European Parliament and of the Council (2) requires the European Union Agency for Railways (‘the Agency’) to address recommendations to the Commission on the technical specifications for interoperability (‘TSIs’) and their revision, in accordance with Article 5 of Directive (EU) 2016/797, and to ensure that TSIs are adapted to technical progress, market trends and social requirements. |
|
(2) |
Article 13 of Commission Delegated Decision (EU) 2017/1474 (3) requires the Section 7.2 of the Annex to Commission Regulation (EU) No 1305/2014 (4) (TAF TSI) to be amended for specifying the modified change control procedure for the TAF TSI. |
|
(3) |
According to Article 5 of Regulation (EU) 2016/796, a working party has been established for making a proposal for a recommendation as regards the changes of the section 7.2 of the TAF TSI. |
|
(4) |
On 20 April 2018, the Agency addressed a recommendation to the Commission on the revision of section 7.2 of the Annex to Regulation (EU) No 1305/2014. |
|
(5) |
Section 7.2 of of the Annex to Regulation (EU) No 1305/2014 related to TAF TSI should be amended accordingly. |
|
(6) |
The list of the relevant technical documents referenced in TAF TSI should be updated. |
|
(7) |
The measures provided for in this Regulation are in accordance with the opinion of the Committee established in accordance with Article 51(1) of Directive (EU) 2016/797, |
HAS ADOPTED THIS REGULATION:
Article 1
Section 7.2 of the Annex to Regulation (EU) No 1305/2014 is replaced by Annex I to this Regulation.
Article 2
Appendix I of the Annex to Regulation (EU) No 1305/2014 is replaced by the text in Annex II to this Regulation.
Article 3
This Regulation shall enter into force on the twentieth day following that of its publication in the Official Journal of the European Union.
This Regulation shall be binding in its entirety and directly applicable in all Member States.
Done at Brussels, 16 May 2019.
For the Commission
The President
Jean-Claude JUNCKER
(1) OJ L 138, 26.5.2016, p. 44.
(2) Regulation (EU) 2016/796 of the European Parliament and of the Council of 11 May 2016 on the European Union Agency for Railways and repealing Regulation (EC) No 881/2004 (OJ L 138, 26.5.2016, p. 1).
(3) Commission Delegated Decision (EU) 2017/1474 supplementing Directive (EU) 2016/797 of the European Parliament and of the Council with regard to specific objectives for the drafting, adoption and review of technical specifications for interoperability (OJ L 210, 15.8.2017, p. 5).
(4) Commission Regulation (EU) No 1305/2014 of 11 December 2014 on the technical specification for interoperability relating to the telematics applications for freight subsystem of the rail system in the European Union and repealing the Regulation (EC) No 62/2006 (OJ L 356, 12.12.2014, p. 438).
ANNEX I
Section 7.2 of the Annex to Regulation (EU) No 1305/2014 is replaced by the following:
‘7.2. Change Management
7.2.1. Change Management Process
Change management procedures shall be designed to ensure that the costs and benefits of change are properly analysed and that changes are implemented in a controlled way. These procedures shall be defined, put in place, supported and managed by the Agency and shall include:
|
— |
the identification of the technical constraints underpinning the change, |
|
— |
a statement of who takes responsibility for the change implementation procedures, |
|
— |
the procedure for validating the changes to be implemented, |
|
— |
the policy for change management, release, migration and roll-out, |
|
— |
the definition of the responsibilities for the management of the detailed specifications and for both its quality assurance and configuration management. |
The Change Control Board (CCB) shall be composed of the Agency, rail sector representative bodies and Member States. Such an affiliation of the parties shall ensure a perspective on the changes that are to be made and an overall assessment of their implications. The CCB ultimately shall be brought under the aegis of the Agency.
7.2.2. Specific Change Management Process for documents listed in Appendix I to this Regulation
The change control management for the documents listed in Appendix I to this Regulation shall be established by the Agency in accordance with the following criteria:
|
1. |
The change requests affecting the documents are submitted either via the Member States or via the representative bodies from the railway sector acting on a European level as defined in Article 38(4) of Regulation (EU) 2016/796 of the European Parliament and of the Council (*1), or via the TAF TSI Steering Committee. |
|
2. |
The Agency shall gather and store the change requests. |
|
3. |
The Agency shall present the change requests to the dedicated ERA working party, which will evaluate them and prepare a proposal accompanied by an economic evaluation, where appropriate. |
|
4. |
Afterwards the Agency shall present each change request and the associated proposal to the change control board that will or will not validate or postpone the change request. |
|
5. |
If the change request is not validated, the Agency shall send back to the requester either the reason for the rejection or a request for additional information about the draft change request. |
|
6. |
If the change request is validated, the technical document shall be amended. |
|
7. |
If no consensus about the validation of a change request can be reached, the Agency shall submit to the Commission a recommendation to update the documents listed in Appendix I together with the draft new version of the document, the change requests and their economic evaluation and shall make these documents available on their web site. |
|
8. |
The new version of the technical document with the validated change requests shall be made available at the site of the Agency. The Agency will keep the Member States informed via the Committee established in accordance with Article 29(1) of Directive 2008/57/EC. |
|
9. |
If a change request would require a change of the legal text of the TAF TSI, the Agency shall send a request to the European commission to request a revision of the TAF TSI and/or request the technical opinion from the Agency. |
Where change control management affects elements which are in common use within the TAP TSI, the changes shall be made so as to remain compliant to the implemented TAP TSI in order to achieve optimum synergies.
(*1) Regulation (EU) 2016/796 of the European Parliament and of the Council of 11 May 2016 on the European Union Agency for Railways and repealing Regulation (EC) No 881/2004 (OJ L 138, 26.5.2016, p. 1).’ ’
ANNEX II
Appendix I of the Annex to Regulation (EU) No 1305/2014 is replaced by the following:
‘Appendix I
List of technical documents
|
No |
Reference |
Title |
|
1 |
ERA-TD-100 |
TAF TSI — ANNEX A.5:FIGURES AND SEQUENCE DIAGRAMS OF THE TAF TSI MESSAGES |
|
2 |
ERA-TD-101 |
Annex D.2: Appendix A (Wagon/ILU Trip Planning) |
|
3 |
ERA-TD-102 |
Annex D.2: Appendix B — Wagon and Intermodal Unit Operating Database (WIMO) |
|
4 |
ERA-TD-103 |
Annex D.2: Appendix C — Reference Files |
|
5 |
ERA-TD-104 |
Annex D.2: Appendix E — Common Interface |
|
6 |
ERA-TD-105 |
Annex D.2: Appendix F — TAF TSI Data and Message Model |
|
27.5.2019 |
EN |
Official Journal of the European Union |
LI 139/360 |
COMMISSION IMPLEMENTING REGULATION (EU) 2019/779
of 16 May 2019
laying down detailed provisions on a system of certification of entities in charge of maintenance of vehicles pursuant to Directive (EU) 2016/798 of the European Parliament and of the Council and repealing Commission Regulation (EU) No 445/2011
(Text with EEA relevance)
THE EUROPEAN COMMISSION,
Having regard to the Treaty on the Functioning of the European Union,
Having regard to Directive (EU) 2016/798 of the European Parliament and of the Council of 11 May 2016 on railway safety (1), and in particular Article 14(6) and (8) thereof,
Whereas:
|
(1) |
Directive (EU) 2016/798 aims to improve access to the market for rail transport services by defining common principles for the management, regulation and supervision of railway safety. Directive (EU) 2016/798 also provides for a framework to be put in place to ensure equal conditions for all entities in charge of maintenance for vehicles through application of the same certification requirements and conditions across the Union. |
|
(2) |
The purpose of the certification system is to provide a framework for harmonising requirements and methods to assess the ability of entities in charge of maintenance across the Union. |
|
(3) |
Following the positive evaluation of the current system of certification of entities in charge of maintenance for freight wagons addressed to the Commission on 11 March 2015 by the European Union Agency for Railways (the Agency), on 27 September 2018, the Agency issued Recommendation 007REC1004 on the revision of Commission Regulation (EU) No 445/2011 (2). |
|
(4) |
Annex III to Directive (EU) 2016/798 sets out the requirements and assessment criteria for organisations applying for a certificate for entity in charge of maintenance (‘ECM certificate’) or for a certificate in respect of maintenance functions outsourced by an entity in charge of maintenance. In order to be fully applicable those requirements need to be further detailed and specified for the different maintenance functions as referred to in points (a) to (d) of Article 14(3) of that Directive. |
|
(5) |
Taking into account the wide variety of design and maintenance methods, that system of maintenance should be more oriented on the management requirements, such as the organisation of the entity in charge of maintenance, rather than a specific technical requirement. |
|
(6) |
Safety-critical components require particular attention and priority in maintenance procedures. However, the criticality aspects of any component are related to the particular design of the vehicle and to the particular functions of the component. It is therefore not possible to establish an exhaustive list of safety-critical components. The essential elements of safety-critical components should be set out. |
|
(7) |
When designing a new type of vehicle, the manufacturer should determine the criticality of the functions and components of their products by a risk-based analysis and record them in the technical file referred to in Article 15(4) of Directive (EU) 2016/797 of the European Parliament and of the Council (3). The determination of the criticality should take into account how the component is intended to be used and the environment in which it will be used. The entity in charge of maintenance should have access to the relevant parts of the technical file to ensure it is fully aware of the criticality of the components for each type of vehicles under its responsibility. The entity in charge of maintenance should identify criticalities by observing and analysing the failures and tracing all its interventions, and be obliged to provide information at least on the safety-critical components identified as such by the manufacturer. |
|
(8) |
Where the entity in charge of maintenance considers that new safety-critical components should be included in the technical file or components should be reclassified as non safety-critical, it should promptly inform the manufacturer, the holder of the vehicle type authorisation and the holder of the vehicle authorisation to allow taking the necessary measures, including a revision of the technical file, if needed. |
|
(9) |
An entity or organisation taking on one or more maintenance functions as referred to in points (b) to (d) of Article 14(3) of Directive (EU) 2016/798 or part of those maintenance functions may apply the system of certification on a voluntary basis, based on the principles specified in Article 6. The aim of that certification is to ensure that maintenance is carried out within a controlled process that meets common quality standards in all its steps. Article 14(5) of Directive (EU) 2016/798 on the validity throughout the Union should also apply to those voluntary certificates. |
|
(10) |
As part of their activities, infrastructure managers may need to use trains, infrastructure inspection vehicles, on-track machines or other special vehicles for different purposes, such as transporting materials or staff for construction or infrastructure maintenance, performing maintenance on its infrastructure assets or managing emergency situations. In such situations, the infrastructure manager should be deemed to operate in the capacity of a railway undertaking under its safety management system. Assessing the infrastructure manager's capacity to operate vehicles for this purpose should be part of its assessment for a safety authorisation under Article 12 of Directive (EU) 2016/798. |
|
(11) |
The assessment by a certification body of an application for an ECM certificate is an assessment of the applicant's ability to manage maintenance activities and to deliver the operational functions of maintenance either by itself or through contracts with other bodies, such as maintenance workshops, charged with delivering those functions or parts of those functions. |
|
(12) |
In accordance with Article 14(4) of Directive (EU) 2016/798, the certification bodies are accredited bodies, recognised bodies or the national safety authorities. A system of accreditation should provide a tool for managing risks by assuring that accredited bodies are competent to carry out the work they undertake. Furthermore, accreditation is a means to secure national and international recognition of ECM certificates issued by accredited bodies. |
|
(13) |
In order to have a system allowing certification bodies to perform checks on certified entities in charge of maintenance across the Union and to harmonise approaches to certification, it is important that all bodies able to award certificates to any entity in charge of maintenance (‘certification bodies’) cooperate with one another. Specific requirements for accreditation and recognition are to be developed and approved in accordance with Chapter II of Regulation (EC) No 765/2008 of the European Parliament and of the Council (4). |
|
(14) |
Performance, organisation and decision-making procedures in the field of railway safety and interoperability vary substantially among the entities in charge of maintenance, with a detrimental effect on the smooth operation of the single European railway area. In particular, small and medium-sized enterprises wishing to enter the railway market in another Member State might be negatively affected by that. Therefore, strengthened coordination with a view to greater harmonisation at Union level is essential. In order to ensure that the entities in charge of maintenance and the certification bodies implement and apply consistently the different provisions of this Regulation, the European Union Agency for Railways (‘the Agency’) should, within its powers to monitor the overall safety performance of the Union rail system referred to in Article 35 of Regulation (EU) 2016/796 of the European Parliament and of the Council (5), monitor the activities of the certification bodies through audit and inspections. To be able to perform this function, the Agency should collect information on the nature of the certification bodies active in that field and the number of certificates issued to entities in charge of maintenance. It is also important for the Agency to facilitate coordination of the certification bodies. |
|
(15) |
Pending the full application of the certification system of the entity in charge of maintenance provided for in this Regulation, the existing practices to certify entities in charge of maintenance and maintenance workshops for vehicles other than freight wagons should remain valid during a period of transition in order to ensure the uninterrupted provision of rail operation services, in particular at international level. |
|
(16) |
This Regulation provides for a system of certification for all types of vehicles, including freight wagons. Therefore, Commission Regulation (EU) No 445/2011 (6) should be repealed. |
|
(17) |
The measures provided for in this Regulation are in accordance with the opinion of the Committee referred to in Article 28(1) of Directive (EU) 2016/798, |
HAS ADOPTED THIS REGULATION:
Article 1
Subject matter and scope
1. This Regulation establishes a system of certification of entities in charge of maintenance (‘ECM certificate’) including the maintenance functions described in Article 14(3) of Directive (EU) 2016/798.
2. It applies to all vehicles, and introduces the possibility for certification of outsourced maintenance functions.
3. This Regulation sets out the requirements to be met by the entities in charge of maintenance concerning the management of safety-critical components.
Article 2
Definitions
For the purposes of this Regulation, the following definitions shall apply:
|
(a) |
‘accreditation’ means accreditation as defined in Article 2(10) of Regulation (EC) No 765/2008; |
|
(b) |
‘certification body’ means a body, responsible for the certification of entities in charge of maintenance or for certification of the entity or organisation that fulfil maintenance functions referred to in points (b), (c) or (d) of Article 14(3) of Directive (EU) 2016/798, or parts of those functions; |
|
(c) |
‘release to service’ means the justified and recorded assurance, accompanied by documentation where appropriate, given by the entity delivering the maintenance to the fleet-maintenance manager that maintenance has been delivered according to the maintenance orders; |
|
(d) |
‘return to operation’ means a notice given to the user, such as a railway undertaking or a keeper, by the entity in charge of maintenance, based on a release to service, assuring that all appropriate maintenance works have been completed and the vehicle, previously removed from operation, is in a condition to be used safely, possibly subject to restrictions of use; |
The definition of ‘safety-critical component’ provided for in section 4.2.12.1 of Annex to Commission Regulation (EU) No 1302/2014 (7) shall apply.
Article 3
System of Certification
1. Without prejudice to Article 15(1) of Directive (EU) 2016/798, any entity in charge of maintenance shall satisfy the requirements of Annex II, in respect of all vehicles subject to Directive (EU) 2016/798.
2. An ECM certification establishing compliance with the requirements of Annex II shall be mandatory for any entity in charge of maintenance:
|
(a) |
responsible for the maintenance of freight wagons, or |
|
(b) |
which is not a railway undertaking or an infrastructure manager maintaining vehicles exclusively for its own operations. |
3. Any entity in charge of maintenance of vehicles other than those mentioned in paragraph 2, may apply for ECM certification.
4. Compliance with Annex II shall be demonstrated either through an ECM certification or, without prejudice to paragraph 2, in case of railway undertakings through the process of safety certification or in case of infrastructure managers through the process of safety authorisation.
5. The ECM certificate granted to a railway undertaking or an infrastructure manager shall be deemed evidence of compliance with points 5.2.4 and 5.2.5 both of Annex I and Annex II to Commission Delegated Regulation (EU) 2018/762 (8) as regards maintenance of vehicles.
Article 4
Safety-critical components
1. For managing safety-critical components, the entity in charge of maintenance shall take into account the initial identification of safety-critical components by the manufacturer of the vehicle together with any specific maintenance instructions recorded in the technical files of subsystems referred to in Article 15(4) of Directive (EU) 2016/797.
2. The entity in charge of maintenance shall, either directly or via the keeper provide information to the railway undertakings and infrastructure managers operating the vehicles, keepers, manufacturers, holders of vehicles authorisations and holders of the type authorisation of vehicles, subsystems or components, as most appropriate and shall in particular, inform them of exceptional maintenance findings beyond wear and tear.
3. Where during the maintenance of a vehicle an entity in charge of maintenance becomes aware of evidence suggesting a component not previously identified as safety critical should be considered as such, it shall inform the manufacturer, the holder of the vehicle type authorisation and the holder of the vehicle authorisation without delay.
4. To confirm if the component is safety critical the manufacturer, when it can be identified, shall perform a risk assessment. It shall take into account the component's intended use and the environment in which it is intended to be used. As appropriate, the entity in charge of maintenance shall adjust its maintenance procedures to ensure monitoring and the safe maintenance of the component.
5. Safety critical components including those identified under paragraph 4 above, shall be recorded in and managed through the relevant vehicle documentation as follows:
|
(a) |
manufacturers shall manage information on safety critical components and appropriate maintenance instructions related to them through reference in the technical file of subsystems referred to in Article 15(4) of Directive (EU) 2016/797; and |
|
(b) |
entities in charge of maintenance shall manage safety critical components and appropriate maintenance instructions as well as relevant maintenance activities in the maintenance file or documentation referred to in Article 14 of Directive (EU) 2016/798. |
6. The entity in charge of maintenance shall inform the rail sector and the rail supply industry about new or unexpected safety relevant findings including exceptional maintenance findings beyond wear and tear, in relation to vehicles, subsystems or other components, when the related risks are relevant for more actors and are likely to be poorly controlled. The entity in charge of maintenance shall use the Safety Alert IT or another informatics tool provided by the Agency for this purpose.
7. At the request of the entity in charge of maintenance or of the keeper of the vehicle, the manufacturers shall provide technical and engineering support for safety-critical components and their safe integration.
Article 5
Obligations of parties involved in the maintenance process
1. The entity in charge of the maintenance of the vehicle shall deliver information on the maintenance of a vehicle, and, where applicable on aspects relevant for the operation to the railway undertakings or infrastructure managers at request, either directly or via the keeper.
2. The railway undertaking or the infrastructure manager shall deliver information on the operation of a vehicle to the entity in charge of maintenance at request, either directly or via the keeper of the vehicle.
3. All parties involved in the maintenance process such as railway undertakings, infrastructure managers, keepers, entities in charge of maintenance, as well as manufacturers of vehicles, subsystems or components, shall exchange relevant information about maintenance in accordance with the criteria listed in Sections I.7 and I.8 of Annex II.
4. Where any involved party, in particular a railway undertaking or an infrastructure manager, has evidence that an entity in charge of maintenance does not comply with Article 14 of Directive (EU) 2016/798 or with the requirements of this Regulation, it shall without delay inform the certification body and the relevant national safety authority thereof. The certification body or, where the entity in charge of maintenance is not certified, the relevant national safety authority shall take appropriate action to check whether the claim of non-compliance is justified.
5. Where there is a change of entity in charge of maintenance, the keeper, in accordance with Article 47(6) of Directive (EU) 2016/797, shall inform without delay the registration entity referred to in Article 4(1) of Commission Decision 2007/756/EC (9) and request the update of the vehicle register. In that situation:
|
(i) |
the former entity in charge of maintenance shall without delay deliver the maintenance documentation to the keeper; |
|
(ii) |
the former entity in charge of maintenance shall be relieved of its obligations when it is removed from the vehicle register; |
|
(iii) |
in the absence of a new entity in charge of maintenance the registration of the vehicle shall be suspended. |
Article 6
Certification bodies
1. Member States shall provide the Agency with the following information concerning the certification bodies:
|
— |
name |
|
— |
address |
|
— |
contact details |
|
— |
the nature of their empowerment in accordance with Article 14 of Directive (EU) 2016/798 (accreditation, recognition or if they have taken on the task as the national safety authority) |
2. Member States shall inform the Agency about any change in the situation within one month of the occurrence of that change.
3. Member States shall ensure that the certification bodies comply with the general criteria and principles set out in Annex I and with any specific sectoral accreditation schemes laid down by the relevant Union legislation.
4. Member States shall ensure that decisions taken by the certification bodies are subject to judicial review.
5. In order to harmonise approaches to the assessment of applications, the certification bodies shall cooperate with one another both within the Member States and across the Union.
6. The Agency shall organise and facilitate cooperation between the certification bodies.
7. The certification bodies shall deliver an activity report in an electronic form every 3 years to the Agency. The content of such a report shall be defined by the Agency (in collaboration with the certification bodies) and made available on 16 December 2020 and in accordance with any specific sectoral accreditation schemes laid down by the relevant Union legislation. The Agency shall publish the reports on its website.
8. A national safety authority, a national investigation body or the Agency may request information from any certification body on the situation concerning an individual ECM certification. The certification body shall reply within 2 weeks at the latest.
Article 7
Certification of entities in charge of maintenance
1. The entity in charge of maintenance shall apply for ECM certification to a certification body. It shall use the relevant form in Annex III and provide documentary evidence for the requirements and procedures set out in Annex II. The application shall include the description of the strategy to ensure continued compliance with the requirements set out in Annex II, after the award of the ECM certification, including the compliance with Commission Regulation (EU) No 1078/2012 (10).
2. The application for ECM certification may be limited to a specified category of vehicles.
3. The applicant shall submit supplementary information and documentation at the request of the certification body. The timeframe for providing supplementary information shall be reasonable, proportionate to the difficulty of providing the information requested and agreed with the applicant upon request.
4. The certification body shall verify the fulfilment of the requirements set out in Annex II. To that end, it may undertake site visits of the entity in charge of maintenance.
5. The certification body shall take a decision to award or refuse ECM certification at the latest 4 months after all the information and documentation has been received.
6. The certification body shall give the reasons for its decisions. It shall notify its decision to the entity in charge of maintenance, with an indication of the appeal process, the time limit for an appeal and the contact details of the appeal body.
7. The decision to award the ECM certification shall be notified using the relevant form set out in Annex IV.
8. An ECM certification shall be valid for a maximum period of 5 years. The certified entity in charge of maintenance shall inform the certification body of any changes that might have an impact on the validity of its certification without delay.
Article 8
Compliance of entities in charge of maintenance
1. The certification body shall conduct surveillance activities in respect of the entity in charge of maintenance to verify continued compliance with the requirements set out in Annex II. It shall conduct site visits at least once every 12 months. The choice regarding the nature of surveillance activities and sites to be visited shall aim at ensuring overall continuing compliance and shall be based on a geographical and functional balance. It shall take account of previous surveillance activities of the entity in charge of maintenance under surveillance.
2. Where the certification body finds that an entity in charge of maintenance no longer complies with the requirements on the basis of which it issued the ECM certification, it can take one of the following actions:
|
— |
agree an improvement plan with the entity in charge of maintenance, |
|
— |
decide to limit the scope of the ECM certification, |
|
— |
suspend or revoke the certification, depending on the extent of non-compliance. |
3. Where the entity in charge of maintenance does not follow the improvement plan or continues not to comply with the requirements set out in Annex II, the certification body shall decide to limit the scope of or revoke the ECM certification, depending on the extent of non-compliance.
4. In case of revocation of an ECM certification, the entity in charge of the national or European vehicle register shall ensure suspension of the registration of vehicles affected by the revocation, until a new entity in charge of maintenance is registered for the vehicles concerned.
5. Each entity in charge of maintenance shall submit an annual report of its activities to its certification body and make it available to the national safety authority and to the Agency upon request. The requirements for this report are set out in Annex V.
Article 9
Outsourcing maintenance functions
1. One or more of the functions referred to in points (b), (c) and (d) of Article 14(3) of Directive (EU) 2016/798, or parts thereof, may be outsourced and the certification body shall be informed thereof.
2. The entity in charge of maintenance shall demonstrate to the certification body how it complies with all the requirements and assessment criteria set out in Annex II with regard to the functions it decided to outsource.
3. The entity in charge of maintenance shall remain responsible for the outcome of the outsourced maintenance activities and shall establish a system to monitor their performance.
Article 10
Certification for outsourced maintenance functions
1. A certification may be requested by any entity or organisation taking on one or more maintenance functions as referred to in points (b), (c) and (d) of Article 14(3). Such a certification shall confirm that the maintenance carried out by the entity or organisation concerned of one or more of those functions complies with the relevant requirements set out in Annex II.
2. Certification bodies shall apply the procedures set out in Articles 6, 7, 8 and 13(2) adapted to the particular case of the applicant.
In assessing applications for certification in respect of outsourced maintenance functions or parts thereof, certification bodies shall apply:
|
(a) |
the requirements and assessment criteria set out in Section I of Annex II, adapted to the organisation's type and extent of service; |
|
(b) |
the requirements and assessment criteria describing the specific maintenance function or functions. |
Article 11
Role of the national safety authorities
If a national safety authority has knowledge that an entity in charge of maintenance does not comply with the requirements of Annex III of Directive (EU) 2016/798 or with the certification requirements of this Regulation, it shall inform the national bodies or authorities responsible for the accreditation or recognition, the Agency, the certification body and other interested parties as appropriate.
Article 12
Cooperation with the certification bodies
The Agency shall support the harmonised system of certification through the provision of:
|
(a) |
assistance to national accreditation bodies and to the relevant national authorities recognising the certification bodies; |
|
(b) |
cooperation on appropriate accreditation and certification schemes. Those schemes shall set out evaluation criteria and procedures to assess compliance of certification bodies with the requirements set out in Annex I (via the European accreditation infrastructure established pursuant to Article 14 of Regulation (EC) No 765/2008). |
Article 13
Provision of information
1. The Agency shall collect, record and publish basic information on certification bodies and certified entities in charge of maintenance. The Agency shall create an IT tool for delivering this task.
2. Certification bodies shall notify the Agency of all issued, amended, renewed, suspended or revoked ECM certifications or of all certifications for functions as referred to in points (b), (c) and (d) of Article 14(3) of Directive (EU) 2016/798, within one week from its decision, using the forms set out in Annex IV.
Article 14
Reporting
The Agency shall address to the Commission a first report on the implementation of this Regulation five years following its entry into force. The Agency shall address subsequent reports on the implementation of this Regulation every three years following the first report.
Article 15
Transitional provisions
1. Certification bodies accredited or recognised pursuant to Regulation (EU) No 445/2011 shall be deemed accredited or recognised in accordance with this Regulation under the conditions for which those certification bodies have been accredited or recognised.
2. The attestation for an entity in charge of maintenance for vehicles other than freight wagons, issued by the certification body on the basis of national laws, applicable in the field governed by this Regulation, before 16 June 2020 shall be recognised as being equivalent to ECM certification for its original period of validity or at the latest, until 16 June 2023.
3. Attestations of conformity with the principles and criteria equivalent to the requirements of Annex III of Regulation (EU) No 445/2011 issued by a certification body for vehicles other than freight wagons, by 16 June 2019 at the latest, shall be deemed equivalent to ECM certifications issued under this Regulation for their original period of validity or at the latest, until 16 June 2023.
4. Attestations of conformity for outsourced maintenance functions for vehicles other than freight wagons, issued by the certification body by 16 June 2022 at the latest, on the basis of national laws applicable in the field governed by this Regulation before its entry into force shall be deemed equivalent to ECM certifications for outsourced maintenance functions issued under this Regulation for their original period of validity or at the latest, until 16 June 2025.
5. All entities in charge of maintenance for the vehicles referred to in point (b) of Article 3 (2) other than freight wagons and vehicles listed in Article 15(1) of Directive (EU) 2016/798, which are not subject to paragraphs 2 to 4, shall comply with this Regulation by 16 June 2022 at the latest.
Article 16
Repeal
Regulation (EU) No 445/2011 is repealed with effect from 16 June 2020.
Certificates issued under Regulation (EU) No 445/2011 by a certification body shall be deemed equivalent to certificates issued under this Regulation for their original period of validity.
Article 17
Entry into force
This Regulation shall enter into force on the twentieth day following that of its publication in the Official Journal of the European Union.
It shall apply from 16 June 2020.
This Regulation shall be binding in its entirety and directly applicable in all Member States.
Done at Brussels, 16 May 2019.
For the Commission
The President
Jean-Claude JUNCKER
(1) OJ L 138, 26.5.2016, p. 102.
(2) Commission Regulation (EU) No 445/2011 of 10 May 2011 on a system of certification of entities in charge of maintenance for freight wagons and amending Regulation (EC) No 653/2007 (OJ L 122, 11.5.2011, p. 22)
(3) Directive (EU) 2016/797 of the European Parliament and of the Council of 11 May 2016 on the interoperability of the rail system within the European Union (OJ L 138, 26.5.2016, p. 44).
(4) Regulation (EC) No 765/2008 of the European Parliament and of the Council of 9 July 2008 setting out the requirements for accreditation and market surveillance relating to the marketing of products and repealing Regulation (EEC) No 339/93 (OJ L 218, 13.8.2008, p. 30).
(5) Regulation (EU) 2016/796 of the European Parliament and of the Council of 11 May 2016 on the European Union Agency for Railways and repealing Regulation (EC) No 881/2004 (OJ L 138, 26.5.2016, p. 1–43)
(6) Commission Regulation (EU) No 445/2011 of 10 May 2011 on a system of certification of entities in charge of maintenance for freight wagons and amending Regulation (EC) No 653/2007 (OJ L 122, 11.5.2011, p. 22).
(7) Commission Regulation (EU) No 1302/2014 of 18 November 2014 concerning a technical specification for interoperability relating to ‘rolling stock – locomotives and passengers rolling stock’ subsystem of the rail system in the European Union (OJ L 356, 12.12.2014, p. 228).
(8) Commission Delegated Regulation (EU) 2018/762 of 8 March 2018 establishing common safety methods on safety management system requirements pursuant to Directive (EU) 2016/798 of the European Parliament and of the Council and repealing Commission Regulations (EU) No 1158/2010 and (EU) No 1169/2010 (OJ L 129, 25.5.2018, p. 26).
(9) Commission Decision 2007/756/EC of 9 November 2007 adopting a common specification of the national vehicle register provided for under Articles 14(4) and (5) of Directives 96/48/EC and 2001/16/EC (OJ L 305, 23.11.2007, p. 30).
(10) Commission Regulation (EU) No 1078/2012 of 16 November 2012 on a common safety method for monitoring to be applied by railway undertakings, infrastructure managers after receiving a safety certificate or safety authorisation and by entities in charge of maintenance (OJ L 320, 17.11.2012, p. 8).
ANNEX I
Criteria for accreditation or recognition of certification bodies involved in the assessment and award of ECM certificates
1. ORGANISATION
The certification body shall document its organisational structure, showing the duties, responsibilities and authorities of management and other certification staff and any committees. Where the certification body is a defined part of a legal entity, the structure shall include the line of authority and the relationship to other parts within the same legal entity.
2. INDEPENDENCE
The certification body shall be organisationally and functionally independent in its decision-making from railway undertakings, infrastructure managers, keepers, manufacturers and entities in charge of maintenance and shall not provide similar services.
The independence of the staff responsible for the certification checks shall be guaranteed. No official shall be remunerated on the basis of either the number of checks performed or the results of those checks.
3. COMPETENCE
The certification body and the staff deployed shall have the required professional competence, in particular regarding the organisation of the maintenance of vehicles and the appropriate maintenance system. The specific requirements addressing the personnel involved in the management and performance of assessment and in the certification shall be described in the accreditation scheme.
4. IMPARTIALITY
The certification body's decisions shall be based on objective evidence of conformity or non-conformity obtained by the certification body, and shall not be influenced by other interests or by other parties.
5. RESPONSIBILITY
The certification body is not responsible for ensuring ongoing conformity with the requirements for certification.
The certification body has the responsibility to assess sufficient objective evidence upon which to base a certification decision.
6. OPENNESS
A certification body shall provide public access to, or disclosure of, appropriate and timely information about its audit process and certification process. It shall also provide information about the certification status (including the granting, extension, maintenance, renewal, suspension, reduction in scope, or withdrawal of certification) of any organisation, in order to develop confidence in the integrity and credibility of certification. Openness is a principle of access to, or disclosure of, appropriate information.
7. CONFIDENTIALITY
To gain the privileged access to information needed to assess conformity with the requirements for certification adequately, a certification body shall keep confidential any commercial information about a client.
8. RESPONSIVENESS TO COMPLAINTS
The certification body shall establish a procedure to handle complaints about decisions and other certification-related activities.
9. LIABILITY AND FINANCING
The certification body shall be able to demonstrate that it has evaluated the risks arising from its certification activities and that it has adequate arrangements (including insurance or reserves) to cover liabilities arising from its operations in each field of its activities and the geographic areas in which it operates.
ANNEX II
Requirements and assessment criteria for organisations applying for an ECM certificate or for a certificate in respect of maintenance functions outsourced by an entity in charge of maintenance
I. Requirements and assessment criteria for the management function
1. Leadership — commitment to the development and implementation of the maintenance system of the organisation and to the continuous improvement of its effectiveness
The organisation shall have procedures for:
|
(a) |
establishing a maintenance policy appropriate to the organisation's type and extent of service and approved by the organisation's chief executive or his or her representative; |
|
(b) |
ensuring that safety targets are established, in line with the legal framework and consistent with an organisation's type, extent and relevant risks; |
|
(c) |
assessing its overall safety performance in relation to its corporate safety targets; |
|
(d) |
developing plans and procedures for reaching its safety targets; |
|
(e) |
ensuring that the resources needed to perform all processes are available to comply with the requirements of this Annex; |
|
(f) |
identifying and managing the impact of other management activities on the maintenance system; |
|
(g) |
ensuring that senior management is aware of the results of performance monitoring and audits and takes overall responsibility for the implementation of changes to the maintenance system; |
|
(h) |
ensuring that staff and staff representatives are adequately represented and consulted in defining, developing, monitoring and reviewing the safety aspects of all related processes that may involve staff. |
2. Risk management — a structured approach to assess risks associated with the maintenance of vehicles, including those directly arising from operational processes and the activities of other organisations or persons, and to identify the appropriate risk control measures
2.1. The organisation shall have procedures and arrangements in place to recognise the need and commitment to collaborate with keepers, railway undertakings, infrastructure managers, designers and manufacturers of vehicles and components or other interested parties.
2.2. The organisation shall have risk management procedures to manage changes in the maintenance file, including maintenance plans, equipment, procedures, organisation, staffing or interfaces, and to apply the common safety methods related to the risk evaluation and assessment methods as adopted pursuant to point (a) of Article 6(1) of Directive (EU) 2016/798.
2.3. When assessing risk, an organisation shall have procedures to take into account the need to determine, provide and sustain an appropriate working environment which conforms to Union and national legislation, in particular Council Directive 89/391/EEC (1).
3. Monitoring — a structured approach to ensure that risk control measures are in place, working correctly and achieving the organisation's objectives
3.1. The organisation shall have a procedure to regularly collect, monitor and analyse relevant safety data, including:
|
(a) |
the performance of relevant processes; |
|
(b) |
the results of processes (including all contracted services and products); |
|
(c) |
the effectiveness of risk control arrangements; |
|
(d) |
information on experience, malfunctions, defects and repairs arising from day-to-day operation and maintenance. |
3.2. The organisation shall have procedures to ensure that accidents, incidents, near-misses and other dangerous occurrences are reported, logged, investigated and analysed.
3.3. For a periodic review of all processes, the organisation shall have an internal auditing system which is independent, impartial and acts in a transparent way. This system shall have procedures in place to:
|
(a) |
develop an internal audit plan, which may be revised depending on the results of previous audits and monitoring of performance; |
|
(b) |
analyse and evaluate the results of the audits; |
|
(c) |
propose and implement specific corrective measures or actions; |
|
(d) |
verify the effectiveness of previous measures or actions. |
3.4. The procedures mentioned in points 3.1, 3.2 and 3.3 of this Section shall comply with the common safety methods related to the risk evaluation and assessment methods as adopted pursuant to point (a) of Article 6(1) of Directive (EU) 2016/798 and to the methods for assessing the safety level and the safety performance of railway operators at national and Union level as adopted pursuant to point (d) of Article 6(1) of that Directive.
4. Continuous improvement — a structured approach to analyse the information gathered through regular monitoring, auditing, or other relevant sources and to use the results to learn and to adopt preventive or corrective measures in order to maintain or improve the level of safety
The organisation shall have procedures to ensure that:
|
(a) |
identified shortcomings are rectified; |
|
(b) |
new safety developments are implemented; |
|
(c) |
internal audit findings are used to bring about improvement in the system; |
|
(d) |
preventive or corrective actions are implemented, when needed, to ensure compliance of the railway system with standards and other requirements throughout the lifecycle of equipment and operations; |
|
(e) |
relevant information relating to the investigation and causes of accidents, incidents, near-misses and other dangerous occurrences is used to learn and, where necessary, to adopt measures in order to improve the level of safety; |
|
(f) |
relevant recommendations from the national safety authority, from the national investigation body and from industry or internal investigations are evaluated and implemented if appropriate; |
|
(g) |
relevant reports or information from railway undertakings/infrastructure managers, keepers or other relevant sources are considered and taken into account. |
5. Structure and responsibility — a structured approach to define the responsibilities of individuals and teams for secure delivery of the organisation's safety objectives
5.1. The organisation shall have procedures to allocate responsibilities for all relevant processes throughout the organisation.
5.2. The organisation shall have procedures to clearly define safety-related areas of responsibility and the distribution of responsibilities to specific functions associated with them as well as their interfaces. Those include the procedures indicated in point 2.1 above between the organisation and the keepers and, where appropriate, railway undertakings and infrastructure managers.
5.3. The organisation shall have procedures to ensure that staff with delegated responsibilities within the organisation have the authority, competence and appropriate resources to perform their functions. Responsibility and competence shall be coherent and compatible with the given role, and delegations shall be in writing.
5.4. The organisation shall have procedures to ensure the coordination of activities related to relevant processes across the organisation.
5.5. The organisation shall have procedures to hold those with a role in the management of safety accountable for their performance.
6. Competence management — a structured approach to ensure that employees have the competences required in order to achieve the organisation's objectives safely, effectively and efficiently in all circumstances
6.1. The organisation shall set up a competence management system providing for:
|
(a) |
the identification of posts with responsibility for performing within the system all the processes necessary for compliance with the requirements of this Annex; |
|
(b) |
the identification of posts involving safety tasks; |
|
(c) |
the allocation of staff with the appropriate competence to relevant tasks. |
6.2. Within the organisation's competence management system, there shall be procedures to manage the competence of staff, including at least:
|
(a) |
identification of the knowledge, skills and experience required for safety-related tasks as appropriate for the responsibilities; |
|
(b) |
selection principles, including basic educational level, mental aptitude and physical fitness; |
|
(c) |
initial training and qualification or certification of acquired competence and skills; |
|
(d) |
assurance that all staff are aware of the relevance and importance of their activities and how they contribute to the achievement of safety objectives; |
|
(e) |
ongoing training and periodical updating of existing knowledge and skills; |
|
(f) |
periodic checks of competence, mental aptitude and physical fitness where appropriate; |
|
(g) |
special measures in the case of accidents/incidents or long absences from work, as required. |
7. Information — a structured approach to ensure that important information is available to those making judgments and decisions at all levels of the organisation
7.1. The organisation shall have procedures to define reporting channels to ensure that, within the entity itself and in its dealings with other actors, including infrastructure managers, railways undertakings, keepers and designers or manufacturers of vehicles or components, or both, when appropriate, information on all relevant processes is duly exchanged and submitted to the person having the right role both within its own organisation and in other organisations, in a prompt and clear way.
7.2. To ensure an adequate exchange of information, the organisation shall have procedures for:
|
(a) |
the receipt and processing of specific information; |
|
(b) |
the identification, generation and dissemination of specific information; |
|
(c) |
making available reliable and up-to-date information. |
7.3. The organisation shall have procedures to ensure that key operational information is:
|
(a) |
relevant and valid; |
|
(b) |
accurate; |
|
(c) |
complete; |
|
(d) |
appropriately updated; |
|
(e) |
verified; |
|
(f) |
consistent and easy to understand (including the language used); |
|
(g) |
made known to staff in accordance with their responsibilities, before it is applied; |
|
(h) |
easily accessible to staff, with copies provided to them where required. |
7.4. The requirements set out in points 7.1, 7.2 and 7.3 apply in particular to the following operational information:
|
(a) |
checks of the accuracy and completeness of national vehicle registers regarding the identification (including means) and registration of the vehicles maintained by the organisation; |
|
(b) |
maintenance documentation; |
|
(c) |
information on support provided to keepers and, where appropriate, to other parties, including railway undertakings/infrastructure managers; |
|
(d) |
information on the qualification of staff and subsequent supervision during maintenance development; |
|
(e) |
information on operations (including mileage, type and extent of activities, incidents or accidents) and requests of railway undertakings, keepers and infrastructure managers; |
|
(f) |
records of maintenance performed, including information on deficiencies detected during inspections and corrective actions taken by railway undertakings or by infrastructure managers such as inspections and monitoring undertaken before the departure of the train or en route; |
|
(g) |
release to service and return to operation; |
|
(h) |
maintenance orders; |
|
(i) |
technical information to be provided to railway undertakings/infrastructure managers and keepers for maintenance instructions; |
|
(j) |
emergency information concerning situations where the safe state of running is impaired, which may consist of:
|
|
(k) |
all relevant information or data needed to submit the annual maintenance report to the certification body and to the relevant customers (including keepers), whereby this report shall also be made available upon request to national safety authorities. |
8. Documentation — a structured approach to ensure the traceability of all relevant information
8.1. The organisation shall have adequate procedures in place to ensure that all relevant processes are duly documented.
8.2. The organisation shall have adequate procedures in place to:
|
(a) |
regularly monitor and update all relevant documentation; |
|
(b) |
format, generate, distribute and verify changes to all relevant documentation; |
|
(c) |
receive, collect and archive all relevant documentation. |
9. Contracting activities — a structured approach to ensure that subcontracted activities are managed appropriately in order for the organisation's objectives to be achieved
9.1. The organisation shall have procedures in place to ensure that safety-related products and services are identified.
9.2. When making use of contractors or suppliers, or both, for safety-related products and services, the organisation shall have procedures in place to verify at the time of selection that:
|
(a) |
contractors, subcontractors and suppliers are competent; |
|
(b) |
contractors, subcontractors and suppliers have a maintenance and management system that is adequate and documented. |
9.3. The organisation shall have a procedure to define the requirements that such contractors and suppliers have to meet.
9.4. The organisation shall have procedures to monitor the awareness of suppliers and/or contractors of risks they entail to the organisation's operations.
9.5. When the maintenance or management system of a contractor or supplier is certified, the monitoring process described in point 3 may be limited to the results of the contracted operational processes referred to in point 3.1(b).
9.6. At least the basic principles for the following processes shall be clearly defined, known and allocated in the contract between the contracting parties:
|
(a) |
responsibilities and tasks relating to railway safety issues; |
|
(b) |
obligations relating to the transfer of relevant information between both parties; |
|
(c) |
the traceability of safety-related documents. |
II. Requirements and assessment criteria for the maintenance development function
1. The organisation shall have a procedure to identify and manage:
|
(a) |
all maintenance activities affecting safety; |
|
(b) |
all safety-critical components. |
2. The organisation shall have procedures to guarantee conformity with the essential requirements for interoperability, including updates throughout the lifecycle, by:
|
(a) |
ensuring compliance with the specifications related to the basic parameters for interoperability as set out in the relevant technical specifications for interoperability (TSIs); |
|
(b) |
verifying in all circumstances the consistency of the maintenance file with the authorisation related to the vehicle (including any national safety requirements), including the conformity to the technical file and the type of records as in the European Register of Authorised Types of Vehicles (ERATV); |
|
(c) |
managing any substitution in the framework of maintenance; |
|
(d) |
identifying the need for risk assessment of the potential impact of the change in question on the safety of the railway system, by application of the common safety methods related to the risk evaluation and assessment methods as adopted pursuant to point (a) of Article 6(1) of Directive (EU) 2016/798; |
|
(e) |
managing the configuration of all technical changes affecting the system integrity of the vehicle. |
3. The organisation shall have a procedure to design and support the implementation of maintenance facilities, equipment and tools specifically developed and required for maintenance delivery. The organisation shall have a procedure to check that these facilities, equipment and tools are used, stored and maintained according to their maintenance schedule and in conformity with their maintenance requirements.
4. When vehicles start operations, the organisation shall have procedures to:
|
(a) |
obtain access to the recommendations for maintenance of the initial documentation and to collect sufficient information on planned operations; |
|
(b) |
analyse those recommendations for maintenance of the initial documentation and to provide, by application of the common safety methods related to the risk evaluation and assessment methods as adopted pursuant to point (a) of Article 6(1) of Directive (EU) 2016/798, the first maintenance file, also taking into account the information contained in any associated guarantees; |
|
(c) |
ensure that the implementation of the first maintenance file is done accordingly. |
5. To keep the maintenance file updated throughout the lifecycle of a vehicle, the organisation shall have procedures to:
|
(a) |
collect at least the relevant information in relation to:
|
|
(b) |
define the need for updates, taking into account the limit values for interoperability; |
|
(c) |
make proposals for and approve changes and their implementation, with a view to a decision based on clear criteria, taking into account the findings from risk assessment performed by application of the common safety methods related to the risk evaluation and assessment methods as adopted pursuant to point (a) of Article 6(1) of Directive (EU) 2016/798; |
|
(d) |
ensure that the implementation of changes is done accordingly; |
|
(e) |
monitor the effectiveness of the changes through a process in consistency with the methods for assessing the safety level and the safety performance of railway operators at national and Union level as adopted pursuant to point (d) of Article 6(1) of Directive (EU) 2016/798. |
6. When the competence management process is applied to the maintenance development function, at least the following activities affecting safety shall be taken into account:
|
(a) |
application of the common safety methods related to the risk evaluation and assessment methods as adopted pursuant to point (a) of Article 6(1) of Directive (EU) 2016/798 for assessment of changes of the maintenance file; |
|
(b) |
engineering disciplines required for managing the establishment and the changes of the maintenance file and the development, assessment, validation and approval of substitutions in the framework of maintenance; |
|
(c) |
maintenance activities on safety-critical components; |
|
(d) |
joining techniques (including welding and bonding); |
|
(e) |
non-destructive testing. |
7. When the documentation process is applied to the maintenance development function, the traceability of at least the following elements needs to be guaranteed:
|
(a) |
the documentation relating to the development, assessment, validation and approval of a substitution in the framework of maintenance; |
|
(b) |
the configuration of vehicles, including, but not limited to, safety-critical components and on-board software modifications; |
|
(c) |
records of the maintenance performed; |
|
(d) |
results of studies concerning return on experience; |
|
(e) |
all the successive versions of the maintenance file, including risk assessment; |
|
(f) |
reports on the competence and supervision of maintenance delivery and fleet maintenance management; |
|
(g) |
technical information to be provided to support keepers, railway undertakings and infrastructure managers. |
III. Requirements and assessment criteria for the fleet maintenance management function
1. The organisation shall have a procedure to check the competence, availability and capability of the entity responsible for maintenance delivery before placing maintenance orders. This requires that the maintenance workshops are duly qualified to decide upon the requirements for technical competences in the maintenance delivery function.
2. The organisation shall have a procedure for the composition of the work package and for the issue and release of the maintenance order.
3. The organisation shall have a procedure to send vehicles for maintenance in due time.
4. The organisation shall have a procedure to manage the removal of vehicles from operation for maintenance or when safe operation is impaired or when needs of maintenance affect the normal operation.
5. The organisation shall have a procedure to define the necessary verification measures applied to the maintenance delivered and the release to service of the vehicles.
6. The organisation shall have a procedure to issue a notice of return to operation, including the definition of restrictions of use to ensure the safe running by taking into account the release to service documentation.
7. When the competence management process is applied to the fleet maintenance management function, at least the return to operation shall be taken into account including defining the restriction of use.
8. When the information process is applied to the fleet maintenance management function, at least the following elements need to be provided to the maintenance delivery function:
|
(a) |
applicable rules and technical specifications; |
|
(b) |
the maintenance plan for each vehicle; |
|
(c) |
a list of spare parts, including a sufficiently detailed technical description of each part to allow like-for-like replacement with the same guarantees; |
|
(d) |
a list of materials, including a sufficiently detailed description of their use and the necessary health and safety information; |
|
(e) |
a dossier that defines the specifications for activities affecting safety and contains intervention and in-use restrictions for components; |
|
(f) |
a list of components or systems subject to legal requirements and a list of those requirements (including brake reservoirs and tanks for the transport of dangerous goods); |
|
(g) |
application of the common safety methods related to the risk evaluation and assessment methods as adopted pursuant to point (a) of Article 6(1) of Directive (EU) 2016/798 for assessing changes affecting the fleet maintenance management function. |
9. When the information process is applied to the fleet maintenance management function, interested parties shall be at least informed of the return to operation, including restrictions on use relevant to users (railway undertakings and infrastructure managers).
10. When the documentation process is applied to the fleet maintenance management function, at least the following elements need to be recorded:
|
(a) |
maintenance orders; |
|
(b) |
return to operation, including restrictions on use relevant to railway undertakings and infrastructure managers. |
IV. Requirements and assessment criteria for the maintenance delivery function
1. The organisation shall have procedures to:
|
(a) |
check the completeness and appropriateness of the information delivered by the fleet maintenance management function in relation to the activities ordered; |
|
(b) |
verify the use of the required, relevant maintenance documents and other standards applicable to the delivery of maintenance services in accordance with maintenance orders; |
|
(c) |
ensure that all relevant maintenance specifications, as defined in applicable regulations and specified standards contained in the maintenance orders, are available to all involved staff (e.g. they are contained in internal working instructions). |
2. The organisation shall have procedures to ensure that:
|
(a) |
components (including spare parts) and materials are used as specified in the maintenance orders and supplier documentation; |
|
(b) |
components and materials are stored, handled and transported in a manner that prevents wear and damage and as specified in the maintenance orders and supplier documentation; |
|
(c) |
all components and materials, including those provided by the customer, comply with relevant national and international rules as well as with the requirements of relevant maintenance orders. |
3. The organisation shall have procedures to determine, identify, provide, record and keep available suitable and adequate facilities, equipment and tools to enable it to deliver the maintenance services in accordance with maintenance orders and other applicable specifications, ensuring:
|
(a) |
the safe delivery of maintenance, including the health and safety of maintenance staff; |
|
(b) |
ergonomics and health protection, also including the interfaces between users and information technology systems or diagnostic equipment. |
4. Where necessary to ensure valid results, the organisation shall have procedures to ensure that its measuring equipment is:
|
(a) |
calibrated or verified at specified intervals, or prior to use, against international, national or industrial measurement standards — where no such standards exist, the basis used for calibration or verification shall be recorded; |
|
(b) |
adjusted or re-adjusted as necessary; |
|
(c) |
identified to enable the calibration status to be determined; |
|
(d) |
safeguarded from adjustments that would invalidate the measurement result; |
|
(e) |
protected from damage and deterioration during handling, maintenance and storage. |
5. The organisation shall have procedures to ensure that all facilities, equipment and tools are correctly used, calibrated, preserved and maintained in accordance with documented procedures.
6. The organisation shall have procedures to check that performed tasks are in accordance with the maintenance orders and to issue the notice of release to service. The notice of release to service shall include all information that is useful to define restrictions of use.
7. When the risk assessment process (in particular points 2.2 and 2.3 of Section I) is applied to the maintenance delivery function, the working environment shall include not only the workshops where maintenance is done but also the tracks outside the workshop buildings and all places where maintenance activities are performed.
8. When the competence management process is applied to the maintenance delivery function, at least the following activities affecting safety where appropriate shall be taken into account:
|
(a) |
joining techniques (including welding and bonding); |
|
(b) |
non-destructive testing; |
|
(c) |
final vehicle testing and release to service; |
|
(d) |
maintenance activities on brake systems, wheel sets and draw gear and maintenance activities on specific components of freight wagons for the transport of dangerous goods, such as tanks, valves, etc.; |
|
(e) |
maintenance activities on safety-critical components; |
|
(f) |
maintenance activities on control-command and signalisation systems; |
|
(g) |
maintenance activities on door control systems; |
|
(h) |
other identified specialist areas affecting safety. |
9. When the information process is applied to the maintenance delivery function, at least the following elements shall be provided to the fleet maintenance management and maintenance development functions:
|
(a) |
works performed in accordance with the maintenance orders; |
|
(b) |
any possible fault or defect regarding safety which is identified by the organisation; |
|
(c) |
the release to service. |
10. When the documentation process is applied to the maintenance delivery function, at least the following elements shall be recorded for the maintenance activities affecting safety, as referred to in point 1(a) of Section II:
|
(a) |
clear identification of all facilities, equipment and tools; |
|
(b) |
all maintenance works performed, including personnel, tools, equipment, spare parts and materials used and taking into account:
|
|
(c) |
the control measures required by maintenance orders and the release to service; |
|
(d) |
the results of calibration and verification, whereby, for computer software used in the monitoring and measurement of specified requirements, the ability of the software to perform the desired task shall be confirmed prior to initial use and reconfirmed as necessary; |
|
(e) |
the validity of the previous measuring results when a measuring instrument is found not to conform to requirements. |
(1) Council Directive 89/391/EEC of 12 June 1989 on the introduction of measures to encourage improvements in the safety and health of workers at work (OJ L 183, 29.6.1989, p. 1).
ANNEX V
Report of the entity in charge of maintenance
1. The entity in charge of maintenance shall issue a report, which covers a period starting 2 months before the last surveillance and ending 2 months before the next planned surveillance.
2. The report shall include at least:
|
— |
explanations and justification on how non-conformities have been addressed or solved, or both; |
|
— |
information on the volume of maintenance carried out during the prevailing period; |
|
— |
the feedback on experience in applying the common safety methods related to the risk evaluation and assessment as adopted pursuant to point (a) of Article 6(1) of Directive (EU) 2016/798 and to the methods for monitoring to be applied by railway undertakings, infrastructure managers and entities in charge of maintenance as adopted pursuant to point (c) of Article 6(1) of that Directive; |
|
— |
changes related to:
|
3. The entity in charge of maintenance shall add to the report all information it considers relevant for the certification body.
4. The entity in charge of maintenance shall address the report to the certification body 1 month before the next planned audit surveillance.
RECOMMENDATIONS
|
27.5.2019 |
EN |
Official Journal of the European Union |
LI 139/390 |
COMMISSION RECOMMENDATION (EU) 2019/780
of 16 May 2019
on practical arrangements for issuing safety authorisations to infrastructure managers
(Text with EEA relevance)
THE EUROPEAN COMMISSION,
Having regard to the Treaty on the Functioning of the European Union, and in particular Article 292 thereof,
Whereas:
|
(1) |
Article 12 of Directive (EU) 2016/798 of the European Parliament and of the Council of 11 May 2016 on railway safety (1) requires the infrastructure managers to obtain a safety authorisation from the national safety authority in the Member State where the rail infrastructure is located in order to be allowed to manage and operate a rail infrastructure. Such a safety authorisation should confirm acceptance of the infrastructure manager's safety management system and include the procedures and provisions fulfilling the requirements necessary for the safe design, maintenance and operation of the railway infrastructure. On 9 March 2017 the European Union Agency for Railways (the ‘Agency’) delivered Recommendation ERA-REC-115-REC on the revision of the common safety methods for conformity assessment and the common safety methods on supervision to the Commission. That Recommendation included provisions on practical arrangements for issuing safety authorisations to infrastructure managers. |
|
(2) |
At its meeting of 5 July 2017, the Commission Expert Group on the Technical Pillar of the 4th Railway Package suggested to the Commission to incorporate the above-mentioned provisions into a Recommendation, since there is no appropriate legal basis to include them in a Regulation. Such a Recommendation would provide a guidance laying down the practical arrangements for issuing safety authorisations to infrastructure managers. Such a common guidance should reduce the complexity of the national authorisation procedures by laying down common methodology to be used. It could also ensure that the objectives of Article 12 of Directive (EU) 2016/798 are more effectively achieved and facilitate the tasks of coordination which should be carried out by the national safety authorities under that Article. Therefore the Commission recommends to the Member States to follows those provisions. |
|
(3) |
In accordance with Article 12(1), the national safety authorities should develop an application guidance document for managing the issuing of safety authorisations, including the procedure to be followed, with a view to reducing administrative burdens and costs for the applicant coming from the administrative processing of the application. |
|
(4) |
The time-limits defined by the national safety authorities in respect of producing additional information requested of the applicant or carrying out visits, inspections or audits should be without prejudice to the timeframe allowed for the assessment of an application set out in Article 12(3) of Directive (EU) 2016/798. |
|
(5) |
Pursuant to Article 12(5) of Directive (EU) 2016/798, in the case of cross-border infrastructure, the national safety authorities concerned should coordinate their assessment to avoid, as far as possible, any duplication of assessment and to ensure consistency of decisions to be taken for the rail infrastructure located in their respective Member State. |
|
(6) |
Within the framework of their activities, infrastructure managers may need to use trains, infrastructure inspection vehicles, on-track machines or other special vehicles for different purposes, such as the transport of materials or staff for construction or infrastructure maintenance, the maintenance of its infrastructure assets or the management of emergency situations. In such cases, the infrastructure manager should be deemed to operate in the capacity of a railway undertaking under its safety management system and safety authorisation without the need to apply for a separate single safety certificate, irrespective of whether it owns the vehicles or not. |
|
(7) |
It is useful to harmonise for the infrastructure managers the categorisation of issues which may be identified in the course of the assessment process of the application. Such a harmonisation should ensure that the applicant understands the gravity of any issues raised by the national safety authority. That categorisation of issues is particularly relevant for the cooperation between national safety authorities in the case of cross-border infrastructure, |
HAS ADOPTED THIS RECOMMENDATION:
SUBJECT MATTER AND SCOPE
|
1. |
This Recommendation lays down guidelines on the assessment of applications submitted by infrastructure managers to national safety authorities for issuing safety authorisations, or for the renewal or update of such authorisations, as provided for in Article 12 of Directive (EU) 2016/798. |
DEFINITIONS
|
2. |
For the purposes of this Recommendation, the following definitions should apply:
|
RESPONSIBILITIES OF THE NATIONAL SAFETY AUTHORITY
|
3. |
The national safety authority should be responsible for the planning, implementation and monitoring of the assessment work it carries out related to the issuing of a safety authorisation. |
|
4. |
The national safety authority should accept pre-engagement at the request of the applicant and provide any clarifications requested by the applicant for the procedure to be followed. |
|
5. |
For the purposes of issuing safety authorisations, the national safety authority should compile the following information:
|
|
6. |
The national safety authority should monitor the expiry dates of all valid safety authorisations to facilitate the planning of the safety assessment activities. |
|
7. |
In order to comply with the third subparagraph of Article 12(1) of Directive (EU) 2016/798, the national safety authority should publish and keep up to date an application guide, including model templates, explaining the requirements for the safety authorisation and the documents required. Those documents should include the national rules that apply to the infrastructure manager and the national procedural provisions. Such a guide should be free of charge and published on the website of the national safety authority concerned. It should also indicate the communication arrangements between the national safety authority and the applicant.
To assist the national safety authorities in this task, the Agency in cooperation with the latter should develop, publish and keep up to date a template of an application guide. |
|
8. |
The national safety authority should establish internal arrangements or procedures for managing the safety assessment process. Those arrangements or procedures should take into account the need to cooperate with other competent national safety authorities in order to issue a safety authorisation in the case of cross-border infrastructure, as provided for in Article 12(5) of Directive (EU) 2016/798. |
|
9. |
When assessing applications, the national safety authorities should accept other types of authorisations, certificates and any other relevant document provided by infrastructure managers or their contractors granted in accordance with relevant Union law, as proof of their capacity to fulfil the requirements laid down in Commission Delegated Regulation (EU) 2018/762 (2). |
SUBMISSION OF AN APPLICATION
|
10. |
Without prejudice to the timeframe set out in Article 12(3) of Directive (EU) 2016/798 for the issuing of a decision by the national safety authority, the applicant should submit the application for a safety authorisation, or for the update or renewal of such an authorisation before the following dates, as appropriate:
|
|
11. |
When submitting an application for a new safety authorisation, the applicant should provide the information listed in Annex I. |
|
12. |
When submitting an application for the update or renewal of a safety authorisation, the applicant should provide the information listed in Annex I and describe changes made to its safety management system since the date the current authorisation was issued.
Where such changes may affect safety performance or create serious safety risks, or where the national safety authority identifies any other areas of concern in the framework of its supervision activities, it should decide whether the whole application file needs to be re-assessed. |
|
13. |
If applicant requests pre-engagement, it should submit the information listed in points 1 to 5 of Annex I to the national safety authority. |
|
14. |
Where the submitted file contains copies of documents issued by entities other than the national safety authority, the applicant should keep the originals for at least 5 years after the end of the period of validity of the safety authorisation. In the case of renewal or update, the applicant should keep the originals of documents submitted for that application and issued by entities other than the national safety authority for at least 5 years after the end of the period of validity of the renewed or updated safety authorisation. The applicant makes available those original documents at the request of the national safety authority. |
PROCEDURAL STAGES AND TIMEFRAMES
|
15. |
The national safety authority should apply the process set out in Annex II. |
|
16. |
The national safety authority should evaluate whether the application contains the documents listed in points 6 to 8 of Annex I. It should inform the applicant, without undue delay, and in any case no later than one month following the date of receipt of the application, whether the application is complete. |
|
17. |
Where the application is not complete, the national safety authority should promptly request the necessary supplementary information and indicate a reasonable timeframe for the applicant's response. The timeframe for providing supplementary information should be reasonable, proportionate to the difficulty of providing the information requested and agreed with the applicant as soon as it is informed that its application file is not complete. If the applicant does not provide the required information within the agreed timeframe, the national safety authority may decide to extend the timeframe for the applicant's response or to notify the applicant that its application is rejected. |
|
18. |
Even if the application file is complete, the national safety authority may request from the applicant any further information at any time prior to taking its decision. It should set a reasonable deadline for the provision of such information. |
|
19. |
The safety authorisation should contain the information listed in Annex III.
A unique identification number should be given to each safety authorisation. |
|
20. |
In order to fulfill its obligation under Article 12(4) of Directive (EU) 2016/798, the national safety authority should transmit to the Agency the information listed in Annex III. |
INFORMATION MANAGEMENT
|
21. |
The national safety authority should register, and regularly update, in an information management system, all relevant information on each stage of the safety assessment process and the outcome of that assessment. |
ARRANGEMENTS FOR VISITS AND INSPECTIONS ON THE SITES OF INFRASTRUCTURE MANAGERS AND AUDITS
|
22. |
In the case of visits, inspections or audits carried out by the national safety authority, the applicant should indicate the person to represent it and the applicable site safety rules and procedures that need to be respected by the staff of the national safety authority responsible for carrying out the visit, inspection or audit. The timeframe for visits, inspections and audits should be agreed between the national safety authority and the applicant. |
|
23. |
In the case of visits, inspections or audits, the national safety authority should draft a report on the issues identified in the course of the assessment and specifying whether they have been solved by evidence provided during the visit, inspection or audit and, if so, how. That report may also include additional issues to be solved by the applicant within an agreed timeframe. |
COOPERATION BETWEEN THE NATIONAL SAFETY AUTHORITIES IN CASE OF CROSS-BORDER INFRASTRUCTURES
|
24. |
The applicant or applicants should submit their applications for the cross-border infrastructure with the national safety authorities in the Member States concerned. Each national safety authority concerned should deliver the safety authorisation for relevant infrastructure located in their territory. |
|
25. |
The national safety authorities should discuss any issues relating to the safety assessment process, and any requests for additional information which have an impact on the timeframe of the assessment or have the potential to affect the work of the other national safety authorities concerned. |
|
26. |
The national safety authority may require from the other national safety authorities concerned any relevant information related to the applicant. |
|
27. |
The national safety authorities concerned should exchange among themselves all relevant information which may have an impact on the safety assessment process, including on implementation of relevant national rules, notified to the Commission by their respective Member State. |
|
28. |
The objectives and scope of audits, inspections and visits, as well as the role assigned to each national safety authority, should be decided by the national safety authorities concerned. The reports of such inspections, visits and audits should be drafted by the national safety authority designed in the framework of the cooperation and be made available to the other national safety authorities concerned. |
|
29. |
Before deciding on the issuing of a safety authorisation for relevant rail infrastructure located in their respective Member States, the national safety authorities concerned should take the following steps:
|
|
30. |
Where the applicant has taken actions to address the identified residual concerns, the national safety authorities concerned should check and agree if those concerns have been solved. To that end, the national safety authorities should cooperate, where appropriate, in accordance with the arrangements referred to in Article 8(2) of Commission Delegated Regulation (EU) 2018/761 (3). |
|
31. |
The national safety authorities should make the safety authorisation they issue for relevant rail infrastructure located in their respective Member States conditional upon the issuance of all other safety authorisations related to the concerned cross-border infrastructure. |
|
32. |
The national safety authorities should keep records of their respective activities and make them available to other national safety authorities concerned. |
CATEGORISATION OF ISSUES
|
33. |
The national safety authority should categorise issues identified in the course of its assessment of the application file as follows:
|
|
34. |
Following the response or the action taken by the applicant according to the issue, the national safety authority should re-evaluate the issues it identified, re-classifies them where relevant and assigns one of the following statuses for each of the issues identified:
|
COMPETENCE OF THE STAFF INVOLVED IN ASSESSMENTS
|
35. |
The national safety authority should ensure that staff involved in assesments have the following competencies:
In the case of team work, the competencies may be shared amongst the team members. Staff carrying out inspections and audits should also demonstrate knowledge of, and experience in interviewing skills. |
|
36. |
With a view to ensuring the correct application of point 35, the national safety authority should put into place a competence management system which includes:
|
REVIEW
|
37. |
Any decision refusing the issuing of a safety authorisation or identifying restrictions or conditions of use other than those requested in the application should be duly justified. |
|
38. |
Member States should ensure that the applicants may request, within a reasonable timeframe, the review of the decision of the national safety authorities and that the national safety authorities have sufficient time from the date of receipt of the request for review in which to confirm or reverse their decisions. |
|
39. |
The review procedure should be carried out impartially. |
|
40. |
The review procedure should focus on the issues which had justified the deviation of the decision of the national safety authority from the applicant's request. |
|
41. |
In the case of cross-border infrastructure, the review should be carried out in coordination with the national safety authorities concerned with the cross-border infrastructure. |
|
42. |
If the decision refusing the issuing of a safety authorisation or identifying restrictions or conditions of use other than those requested in the application is confirmed, the applicant may bring an appeal before the competent jurisdiction in accordance with national law. |
FINAL PROVISIONS
|
43. |
Member States that have not notified the Agency and the Commission in accordance with Article 33(2) of Directive (EU) 2016/798 are requested to give effect to this Recommendation from 16 June 2019. All Member States are requested to give effect from 16 June 2020. |
Done at Brussels, 16 May 2019.
For the Commission
Violeta BULC
Member of the Commission
(1) OJ L 138, 26.5.2016, p. 102.
(2) Commission Delegated Regulation (EU) 2018/762 of 8 March 2018 establishing common safety methods on safety management system requirements pursuant to Directive (EU) 2016/798 of the European Parliament and of the Council and repealing Commission Regulations (EU) No 1158/2010 and (EU) No 1169/2010 (OJ L 129, 25.5.2018, p. 26).
(3) Commission Delegated Regulation (EU) 2018/761 of 16 February 2018 establishing common safety methods for supervision by national safety authorities after the issue of a single safety certificate or a safety authorisation pursuant to Directive (EU) 2016/798 of the European Parliament and of the Council and repealing Commission Regulation (EU) No 1077/2012 (OJ L 129, 25.5.2018, p. 16).
ANNEX I
Content of the application for a safety authorisation
|
Note: |
National safety authorities are encouraged to require all information listed in this Annex, including the documents to be annexed to the application, except where indicated with ‘O’ (optional). Where the infrastructure manager needs to establish a corrective action plan referred to in point 8, the information about it is mandatory. |
1. Type of application:
1.1. New
1.2. Renewal
1.3. Update
1.4. Identification number of the previous authorisation (only in case of application for renewal or update)
2. Particulars of infrastructure(s) (select one or more)
2.1. Trans-European Transport Network (TEN-T)
2.1.1. TEN-T Comprehensive Network
2.1.2. TEN-T Core Freight Network
2.1.3. TEN-T Core Passenger Network
2.1.4. Outside TEN-T Network
2.2. Energy
2.2.1. Overhead contact line
2.2.2. Third Rail
2.2.3. Fourth rail
2.2.4. Not electrified
2.3. Control-Command and signalling
2.3.1. Class A System
2.3.2. Class B System
2.4. Other (specify)
3. Rail network operations:
3.1. Expected date of starting services/operations (O)
3.2. Member State(s) where the infrastructure is located
4. Information concerning the applicant:
4.1. Legal denomination
4.2. Acronym (O)
4.3. Complete postal address
4.4. Phone
4.5. Fax (O)
4.6. E-mail
4.7. Website (O)
4.8. National registration number
4.9. VAT number (O)
4.10. Other relevant information (O)
5. Contact person information:
5.1. First name
5.2. Surname
5.3. Title or function
5.4. Complete postal address
5.5. Phone
5.6. Fax (O)
5.7. E-mail
5.8. Language or languages spoken
DOCUMENTS TO BE ANNEXED TO THE APPLICATION
6. Documents submitted for the safety management system part of the assessment:
6.1. Description of the safety management system and other documents demonstrating compliance with the requirements set out in Annex II of Delegated Regulation (EU) 2018/762.
6.2. Information cross-referencing the safety management system (see point 6.1) against Annex II of Delegated Regulation (EU) 2018/762, including an indication where in the safety management system documentation the relevant requirements of the applicable technical specification for interoperability relating to the operation and traffic management subsystem are met.
7. Documents submitted for the national part of the assessment:
7.1. Description or other demonstration of how the safety management arrangements address the relevant national rules notified in accordance with Article 8 of Directive (EU) 2016/798.
7.2. Information cross-referencing the safety management system (see point 6.1) against the requirements laid down in the relevant national rules (referred to in point 7.1).
8. Corrective action plan(s)
8.1. The current status of the action plan or plans established by the infrastructure manager to resolve any major non-compliance and any other area of concern identified during supervision activities since the previous assessment.
8.2. The current status of the action plan or plans established by the infrastructure manager to resolve residual concerns from the previous assessment.
ANNEX II
Safety assessment process
1. GENERAL
1.1. National safety authority should develop a structured and auditable process for the complete activity which takes into account the elements set out in this Annex. The safety assessment process should be iterative, as shown in the diagram below (see Figure 1 in the Appendix), that is the national safety authority is entitled to make reasonable requests for further information or re-submission in accordance with this recommendation.
2. RECEIPT OF APPLICATION
2.1. After receiving an application for a safety authorisation, the national safety authority should formally and promptly acknowledge receipt of the application and sets up the registered file in order to ensure information management at each stage of the assessment process.
2.2. The national safety authority should assign competent resources to deliver the assessment process.
3. INITIAL SCREEN
3.1. On receipt of the application, the national safety authority should undertake promptly an initial screen to check the following elements:
|
(a) |
the applicant has provided the basic information which is either required by the legislation or needed for it to be processed effectively; |
|
(b) |
the application file contains sufficient evidence and is structured and internally cross-referenced so that it can be properly assessed against the safety management system requirements and relevant notified national rules. The national safety authority conducts an initial review of the actual content of the evidence contained in the application to make an initial judgement on the quality, sufficiency and appropriateness of the safety management system; |
|
(c) |
if applicable, the current status of the action plan (or plans) established by the infrastructure manager to resolve any major non-compliance and any other area of concern identified during supervision activities since the previous assessment is included; |
|
(d) |
if applicable, the current status of the action plan (or plans) established by the infrastructure manager to resolve residual concerns from previous assessment is included. |
3.2. Following the initial screening referred to in point 3.1, the national safety authority should decide if there are any areas in which, for their respective part, further information is necessary. Where further information is necessary, the national safety authority should promptly seek the information, to the extent that they deem reasonably necessary to support their assessment.
3.3. The national safety authority should read a sufficient sample of the application to check that its content is understandable. If it is clearly not, the national safety authority should decide whether it needs to be returned, with a request for an improved version.
3.4. When assessing the infrastructure manager's capacity to operate trains, infrastructure inspection vehicles, on-track machines or other special vehicles, including the use of contractors where relevant, the national safety authority should refer to the relevant requirements defined in Annex I of Delegated Regulation (EU) 2018/762, in particular its points 1, 5.1, 5.2 and 5.5.
4. DETAILED ASSESSMENT
4.1. After the completion of the initial screen stage, the national safety authority should proceed to the detailed assessment of the application file (see Figure 2 in the Appendix), using the safety management system requirements and relevant notified national rules.
4.2. In undertaking the detailed assessment referred to in point 4.1, in accordance with Article 18(1) of Directive (EU) 2016/798, the national safety authority should exercise professional judgment, be impartial and proportionate, and provide documented reasons for conclusions reached.
4.3. The assessment determines whether the safety management system requirements and relevant notified national rules are met or whether further information is needed. During the assessment the national safety authority should also seek evidence that the safety management system requirements and relevant notified national rules have been met from the outputs of the safety management system processes, using sampling methods where appropriate, to ensure that the applicant has understood and can meet the requirements according to the type of the railway operations in order to ensure safe operation of the railway.
4.4. Any type 4 issue should be resolved to the satisfaction of the national safety authority leading to an update of the application file where appropriate before the safety authorisation can be issued.
4.5. Residual concerns may be deferred for consideration to supervision, or actions may be agreed upon with the applicant, based on its proposal for updating the application file, or both. In such a case formal resolution of the issue takes place after the issue of the safety authorisation.
4.6. The national safety authority should be transparent on how it judges the severity of each identified issue.
4.7. When identifying an issue referred to in point 33, the national safety authority should be specific and help the applicant understand the level of detail expected in the response. To that end, the national safety authority should take the following steps:
|
(a) |
refer accurately to the relevant safety management system requirements and notified national rules and help the applicant to understand the identified issues; |
|
(b) |
identify the relevant part of related regulations and rules; |
|
(c) |
state why the individual safety management system requirement or notified national rule, including any related legislation, is not met; |
|
(d) |
agree with the applicant on further commitments, documents and any other supporting information to be provided, as required by the level of detail of the safety management system requirement or the notified national rule; |
|
(e) |
specify and agree with the applicant on a timeframe for compliance, reasonable and proportionate to the difficulty of providing the information requested. |
4.8. In application of Article 12(3) of Directive (EU) 2016/798, if the applicant significantly delays providing the requested information, the national safety authority should decide to extend the timeframe for the applicant's response or to reject the application after notice.
4.9. The timeframe for taking the decision on the issuing of the safety authorisation may only be extended, until the requested information has been submitted, upon decision of the national safety authority and with the agreement of the applicant in one of the following cases:
|
(a) |
type 1 issues that, considered individually or collectively, prevent the assessment or parts of it from continuing; |
|
(b) |
type 4 issues or multiple type 3 issues that, considered collectively, may raise the category to a type 4 issue, preventing the issuing of the safety authorisation. |
4.10. To be satisfactory, the applicant's written responses should be sufficient to allay the concerns expressed and to demonstrate that its proposed arrangements will meet the relevant criteria or notified national rules.
4.11. Where a response is considered unsatisfactory, it should be explained precisely why, identifying the further information or demonstration required of the applicant to make it satisfactory.
4.12. If concerns emerge that the application could be rejected, or that it will take a longer time to reach a decision than the timeframe allowed for the assessment, the national safety authority may consider possible contingency measures.
4.13. When it is concluded that either the application meets all requirements or that further progress in securing satisfactory responses to outstanding matters is unlikely, the national safety authority should complete the assessment by the following steps:
|
(a) |
stating whether all criteria have been met or whether there are still matters outstanding; |
|
(b) |
identifying any residual concern; |
|
(c) |
identifying any restriction or condition of use to be included in the safety authorisation; |
|
(d) |
reporting on the follow-up of major non-compliances identified during supervision activities, as referred to in Article 5 of Delegated Regulation (EU) 2018/761, where appropriate; |
|
(e) |
ensuring that the safety assessment process has been correctly applied; |
|
(f) |
compiling the outcome of the assessment, including summary conclusions and where appropriate, an opinion concerning the issuing of the safety authorisation. |
4.14. The national safety authority should record and justify in writing all findings and judgments in order to facilitate both the assurance process and the decision-making process, as well as to assist with any appeal against the decision to issue the safety authorisation or to reject the application.
5. DECISION-MAKING
5.1. Based on the conclusions of the completed assessment, a decision should be made on whether to issue a safety authorisation or to reject the application. Where a safety authorisation is to be issued, some residual concerns may be identified. A safety authorisation is not issued where any type 4 issue is identified and not resolved during the assessment.
5.2. The national safety authority may decide to restrict the scope of the safety authorisation, by identifying restrictions or conditions of use, if such restrictions or conditions of use address any type 4 issue that would prevent the issue of the safety authorisation. The safety authorisation should be updated on request of the applicant after all residual concerns have been addressed in its application file.
5.3. The applicant should be informed about the decision of the national safety authority, including the outcome of the assessment, and a safety authorisation is issued as appropriate.
5.4. If the application is rejected or if the safety authorisation contains restrictions or conditions of use other than those defined in the application, the national safety authority should inform the applicant, giving the reasons for the decision, and notify it of the procedure to request a review of or to appeal against the decision.
6. CLOSING ASSESSMENT
6.1. The national safety authority should complete the administrative closure by ensuring that all documents and records are reviewed, organised and archived. To continually improve its process, the national safety authority should identify historic information and lessons learned for use by future assessments.
7. SPECIFIC PROVISIONS FOR THE RENEWAL OF A SAFETY AUTHORISATION
7.1. A safety authorisation may be renewed upon request of the applicant before the expiry of its validity to ensure continuity of authorisation.
7.2. In the case of a renewal application, the national safety authority should check details of changes to the evidence submitted in the previous application and consider the results of past supervision activities as referred to in Article 5 of Delegated Regulation (EU) 2018/761 to prioritise or target the relevant safety management system requirements and notified national rules upon which to assess the renewal application.
7.3. The national safety authority should take a proportionate approach to re-assessment, based on the degree of changes proposed.
8. SPECIFIC PROVISIONS FOR THE UPDATE OF A SAFETY AUTHORISATION
8.1. A safety authorisation is updated whenever there is a substantial change proposed to the infrastructure, the signalling, any energy supply used in connection with the infrastructure or the principles of operation and maintenance of such infrastructure, signalling or energy supply in accordance with Article 12(2) of Directive (EU) 2016/798.
8.2. Where it intends to make any change referred to in point 8.1, the infrastructure manager holding the safety authorisation notifies the national safety authority without delay.
8.3. Following the notification by the infrastructure manager as referred to in point 8.2, the national safety authority:
|
(a) |
checks that the change relating to any potential application is clearly described and that potential safety risks are assessed; |
|
(b) |
discusses with the infrastructure manager the need for an update of the safety authorisation. |
8.4. The national safety authority may make further enquiries with the applicant. Where the national safety authority agrees that the proposed change is not substantial, it informs the applicant in writing that an update is not required, keeping a record of the decision for the registered file.
8.5. In the case of an application for un update, the national safety authority should take the following steps:
|
(a) |
check details of changes to the evidence submitted in the previous application upon which the current safety authorisation was issued; |
|
(b) |
consider the results of past supervision activities as referred to in Article 5 of Delegated Regulation (EU) 2018/761, and in particular, issues relating to the ability of the applicant to effectively implement and monitor its change management process; |
|
(c) |
prioritise or target the relevant safety management system requirements and notified national rules in order to assess the update application. |
8.6. The national safety authority should take a proportionate approach to re-assessment, based on the degree of changes proposed.
8.7. An application to the national safety authority to update a safety authorisation should not lead to the extension of its validity period.
8.8. The national safety authority should decide at the request of the applicant whether the safety authorisation needs to be updated where the conditions under which the safety authorisation was issued are to be changed without any impact on the infrastructure, the signalling, any energy supply used in connection with the infrastructure or the principles of operation and maintenance of such infrastructure, signalling or energy supply.
Appendix
SAFETY ASSESSMENT PROCESS
Figure 1
Safety assessment process
DETAILED ASSESSMENT PROCESS
Figure 2
Detailed assessment process
ANNEX III
Content of the safety authorisation
1. Identification number of the safety authorisation
2. Identification of the infrastructure manager:
2.1. Legal denomination
2.2. National registration number
2.3. VAT number
3. Identification of the national safety authority:
3.1. Organisation
3.2. Member State
4. Authorisation information:
4.1. New
4.2. Renewal
4.3. Update
4.4. Identification number of the previous authorisation (in case of renewal or update only)
4.5. Validity start and end dates
4.6. Particulars of infrastructure(s)
5. Applicable national legislation
6. Restrictions and conditions of use
7. Additional information
8. Issuing date and authorised signatory/stamp of the authority
Appendix
The following standard model for safety authorisation is recommended:
|
|
SAFETY AUTHORISATION |
|
|
Safety Authorisation confirming acceptance of the safety management system within the European Union in conformity with Directive (EU) 2016/798 and applicable national legislation |
||
|
IDENTIFICATION NUMBER: |
|
|
1. AUTHORISED INFRASTRUCTURE MANAGER
|
Legal denomination: |
|
|
Infrastructure manager name: |
Acronym: |
|
National registration number: |
VAT No: |
2. AUTHORITY ISSUING AUTHORISATION
Authority:
Member State:
3. AUTHORISATION INFORMATION
|
This is a |
|
|
☐ |
EU Identification Number of the previous authorisation: |
… |
|||
|
|
|
|
||||||
|
|
☐ |
||||||
|
|
|
|
||||||
|
|
☐ |
||||||
|
Validity from: |
to: |
|||||||
|
Particulars of infrastructure(s): |
|
|||||||
4. APPLICABLE NATIONAL LEGISLATION
5. RESTRICTIONS AND CONDITIONS OF USE
6. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION
|
Date issued |
Signature |
|
|
|
|
|
|
Internal reference number |
Authority's stamp |
|
|
|